Whole Body X-ray CT System
Presto（V）
TECHNICAL GUIDE
-- Installation & Adjustment --- Check & Service --
Tokyo, Japan
L2E-BW1444-7
CONFIDENTIALITY : This material contains proprietary information of
Hitachi Medical Corporation and it shall not be disclosed to the third party or
reproduced without the prior written permission of Hitachi Medical Corporation.
Copyright © Hitachi Medical Corporation. 2004, 2005,2006. All rights reserved.
NOTE
The tightening torque of bolts, screws, nuts, and double nuts in the work specified in this manual
shall conform to the values shown in Table 1 and 2.
Table 1 Tightening torque of bolts and screws
Kinds
Tightening torque N･cm (kgf･cm)
Sizes
Max.
Min.
M3
98
(10)
69
(7)
Flat head screw
M4
216
(22)
147
(15)
Pan head screw
M5
392
(40)
275
(28)
M6
540
(55)
373
(38)
M3
108
(11)
79
(8)
M4
265
(27)
187
(19)
M5
539
(55)
392
(40)
M6
833
(85)
588
(60)
M8
1990 (203)
1392 (142)
M10
3528 (360)
2450 (250)
M12
5586 (570)
3920 (400)
M3
138
(14)
98
(10)
M4
343
(35)
245
(25)
M5
696
(71)
510
(52)
M6
1078 (110)
765
(78)
M8
2588 (264)
1804 (184)
M10
4587 (468)
3185 (325)
M12
7262 (741)
5096 (520)
M16
15925 (1625)
11143 (1137)
Hex. head bolt
Hex. socket head bolt
(1)
1 L2E-BW1444
Table 2 Tightening torque of nuts *
Nut
M3
108
(11)
79
(8)
M4
265
(27)
187
(19)
M5
539
(55)
392
(40)
M6
833
(85)
588
(60)
M8
1990 (203)
1392 (142)
M10
3528 (360)
2450 (250)
M12
5586 (570)
3920 (400)
* Tightening method of double nuts
(1) Fix the low nut by a spanner.
(2) Tighten the normal height nut by the other spanner. The tightening torque shall conform to the values
specified in the above table.
Normal height nut
Low nut
(2)
2 L2E-BW1444
Important safety work for installation of X-ray tube(3.5MHU, 5MHU)
installation
engineer
Customer
installation date
NO.
Check point
Criteria
1
Four hexagon socket head bolts (M8, 50mm long) for trunnion rings shall be tighten by 19.6±
2N・m (200±20kgf・cm) of torque.
Check that the fixing bolts are tightly fixed that tightening torque is 19.6±2N・m
(200±20kgf・cm).
Pass ・ Fail
2
Four hexagon socket head bolts (M8, 30mm long) for the base shall be tighten by 19.6±2N・m
(200±20kgf・cm) of torque.
Check that the fixing bolts are tightly fixed that tightening torque is 19.6±2N・m
(200±20kgf・cm).
Pass ・ Fail
3
Seven hexagon socket head bolts (M6) for the mounting plates 1 and 2 shall be tighten by 8±
0.8N・m (82±8.2kgf・cm) of torque.
Check that the fixing bolts are tightly fixed that tightening torque is 8±0.8N・m
(82±8.2kgf・cm).
Pass ・ Fail
No.1 4-M8Ｘ50L
Hexagon socket head bolt
Trunnions ring
＋
－
H9
CS
H7
H8
No.2 4-M8Ｘ30L
Hexagon socket head bolt
Mounting bracket 1
Base
Mounting bracket 2
No.3 7-M6 nut, spring,
and plain washer
(3)
3
L2E-BW1444
Contents
Page
Section 1
CARRYING -IN, MOUNTING, AND ASSEMBLING.......................................................................... 1-1
1.1
Carrying in and mounting of scanner unit .................................................................................... 1-1
1.2
Leveling of scanner unit ............................................................................................................... 1-6
1.3
Carrying in the patient table ......................................................................................................... 1-7
1.4
Leveling and fixing of patient table.............................................................................................. 1-8
1.5
Mounting of other units .............................................................................................................. 1-12
1.6
1.7
1.8
Section 2
Operation unit ............................................................................................................... 1-12
1.5.2
X-ray control unit.......................................................................................................... 1-13
Mounting of detector and detector side collimator...................................................................1-14A
1.6.1
Mounting of detector ..................................................................................................1-14A
1.6.2
Mounting of detector side collimator..........................................................................1-17A
Mounting of X-ray tube unit and cooler ..................................................................................... 1-22
1.7.1
Mounting procedure of X-ray tube assembly (Presto 3.5MHU) ................................... 1-22
1.7.2
Mounting procedure of cooler ...................................................................................... 1-23
1.7.3
Mounting procedure of X-ray tube assembly (Presto 5 MHU) ..................................... 1-24
1.7.4
Mounting procedure of cooler ...................................................................................... 1-25
Removal of protective materials for transport ............................................................................ 1-26
1.9
Internal inspection of patient table ............................................................................................. 1-27
1.10
Mounting of covers .................................................................................................................... 1-29
WIRING .................................................................................................................................................. 2-1
2.1
Wiring of cables between units..................................................................................................... 2-1
2.2
Wiring of cables in each unit ........................................................................................................ 2-6
2.3
Section 3
1.5.1
2.2.1
Scanner ........................................................................................................................... 2-6
2.2.2
Table wiring .................................................................................................................... 2-8
2.2.3
Mounting of foot switch, table electric unit cover, and table control unit....................... 2-9
2.2.4
Image processing unit ................................................................................................... 2-13
2.2.5
X-ray control unit.......................................................................................................... 2-23
2.2.6
Mounting the counter .................................................................................................... 2-27
Internal wiring of system ............................................................................................................ 2-28
2.3.1
Wiring on scanner rotary plate...................................................................................... 2-28
2.3.2
Detector cabling work................................................................................................... 2-30
ADJUSTMENT....................................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1
Turning on the power supply........................................................................................................ 3-1
3.2
Operation check of image processing unit in operation Unit........................................................ 3-1
3.3
Operation check and adjustment of scanner unit .......................................................................... 3-2
3.4
Operation check of patient table and adjustment of scanner gantry tilting ................................. 3-20
3.5
Laser marker adjustment ............................................................................................................ 3-24
3.6
Adjustment of X-ray system ....................................................................................................... 3-27
3.6.1
X-ray tube assembly check ........................................................................................... 3-27
3.6.2
Anode rotation drive unit (starter) adjustment. ............................................................. 3-27
3.6.2.1 Starter CPU-CONT PCB adjusting method .................................................................. 3-31
(4)
(4A)
4 L2E-BW1444
3.6.2.2 Adjustment of control knobs on PC board and dial time
(VR adjustment while checking the LED display) ........................................................ 3-32
3.6.2.3 Voltage adjustment (Measure H7-H9 voltage by a true RMS meter)............................ 3-32
3.6.2.4 CPU-CONT PC board adjustment ................................................................................ 3-33
3.6.2.5 Status display of anode rotation drive unit.................................................................... 3-34
3.7
3.8
3.6.3
Adjustment of mA waveform and checking of kVmA .................................................. 3-35
3.6.4
X-ray tube aging ........................................................................................................... 3-37
3.6.5 Pre-Heating Parameter of RTC Board .......................................................................... 3-39
Adjustment of X-ray field........................................................................................................... 3-40
3.7.1 Adjustment in X-axis direction ..................................................................................... 3-40
3.7.2
R-direction adjustment (Common to each X-ray tube assembly).................................. 3-41
3.7.3
Normal condition of X-ray tube.................................................................................... 3-42
3.7.4 X-ray beam exposure field adjustment (slice thickness direction) ................................ 3-43
Preamplifier check...................................................................................................................... 3-47
3.8.1 Bus line check............................................................................................................... 3-47
3.8.2 Output sequence check ................................................................................................. 3-48
3.9
Checking the influences of vibration noises on measuring data (Vibration check) .................... 3-51
3.10 Center adjustment....................................................................................................................... 3-55
3.11 Compensator position adjustment .............................................................................................. 3-58
3.12A Focus shift detector (FSD) adjustment
*To be applied to PB1 board Rev.1(Display VR3**)................................................................. 3-61
3.12B Focus shift detector (FSD) adjustment
*To be applied to PB2 board Rev.2(Dsiplay VR*)..................................................................... 3-72
3.13 Detector side collimator (Post Patient Collimator - PPC) position adjustment .......................... 3-83
3.14 Phantom calibration.................................................................................................................... 3-88
3.14.1 Procedure ...................................................................................................................... 3-88
3.14.2 Mounting method of phantom mounting bracket .......................................................... 3-89
3.14.3 X-ray detection system warming up.............................................................................. 3-94
3.14.4 X-ray tube warm up and air calibration ........................................................................ 3-94
3.14.5 Phantom position adjustment and phantom calibration................................................. 3-96
3.15 CT number adjustment ............................................................................................................. 3-104
3.15.1 Procedure .................................................................................................................... 3-104
3.15.2 CT number adjustment scan........................................................................................ 3-105
3.15.3 Perform CT number adjustment calculation ............................................................... 3-108
3.16 Interphone (intercommunication) check....................................................................................3-111
3.17 Institution info. settings ............................................................................................................ 3-112
3.18 Computer name change ............................................................................................................ 3-113
3.19 Communication setting............................................................................................................. 3-115
3.19.1 LAN card setting......................................................................................................... 3-115
3.19.2 Deletion of DICOM transmission software................................................................. 3-115
3.19.3 Entry of DICOM transmission software...................................................................... 3-116
3.19.4 Setting of DICOM transmission software ................................................................... 3-118
3.19.5 Setting of storage commitment software ..................................................................... 3-119
3.19.6 Setting of filming software.......................................................................................... 3-120
3.19.7 Entry of SMPTE pattern ............................................................................................. 3-121
(5)
5 L2E-BW1444
Section 4
Reference data ......................................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1
Stationary scan ............................................................................................................................. 4-1
4.2
Detector - preamplifier connectors correspondence table ............................................................ 4-2
4.3
Section 5
Details of service information ...................................................................................................... 4-5
Maintenance software.............................................................................................................................. 5-1
5.1
Maintenance mode ON/OFF ........................................................................................................ 5-1
5.1.1
Maintenance mode ON ................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1.2
Maintenance mode OFF.................................................................................................. 5-1
5.2
Maintenance settings .................................................................................................................... 5-2
5.3
Date / time setting......................................................................................................................... 5-2
5.4
Study number setting .................................................................................................................... 5-2
5.5
System configuration settings....................................................................................................... 5-3
5.6
Maintenance service ..................................................................................................................... 5-4
5.7
Raw Data Analysis ....................................................................................................................... 5-4
5.7.1
Introduction..................................................................................................................... 5-4
5.7.2
Raw Data Analysis start .................................................................................................. 5-5
5.7.3
Opening data................................................................................................................... 5-5
5.7.3.1 Raw Data ........................................................................................................................ 5-5
5.7.3.2 Air calibration data ......................................................................................................... 5-6
5.7.3.3 Phantom profile............................................................................................................... 5-6
5.7.3.4 Phantom calibration data................................................................................................. 5-7
5.7.4
Closing data .................................................................................................................... 5-8
5.7.5
Raw Data Analysis end ................................................................................................... 5-9
5.7.6
Raw Data Analysis screen function................................................................................. 5-9
5.7.6.1 A change of window width and window level ................................................................ 5-9
5.7.6.2 Slice data selection.......................................................................................................... 5-9
5.8
5.7.7
Analysis menu................................................................................................................. 5-9
5.7.8
CACK ........................................................................................................................... 5-17
Check program ........................................................................................................................... 5-19
5.8.1
Basic window structure................................................................................................. 5-19
5.8.2
Preamplifier check ........................................................................................................ 5-21
5.8.3
Scanner check ............................................................................................................... 5-22
5.8.3.1 Scanner system check ................................................................................................... 5-22
5.8.3.2 Table system check ....................................................................................................... 5-23
5.8.3.3 X-ray control system check........................................................................................... 5-25
5.8.3.4 PreAmplifier signal ReTransmission system check ...................................................... 5-25
5.8.3.5 DSP system check......................................................................................................... 5-26
5.9
Control Error List ..................................................................................................................... 5-28
5.9.1
Control error list start/end............................................................................................. 5-28
5.9.2
Setting of the order of date and time............................................................................. 5-28
5.9.3
Display of a specified process only............................................................................... 5-29
5.9.4
Display of a specified message only ............................................................................. 5-29
5.9.5
Setting of the error log information Directory .............................................................. 5-29
5.9.6
Saving of the error log information to MO ................................................................... 5-31
(6)
6 L2E-BW1444
5.10
Service backup ........................................................................................................................... 5-32
5.10.1 Start / end...................................................................................................................... 5-32
5.10.2 Initialization of saving MO ........................................................................................... 5-33
5.10.3 Saving ........................................................................................................................... 5-34
5.10.4 Loading ......................................................................................................................... 5-35
5.10.5 Deletion ........................................................................................................................ 5-36
5.10.6 Other data ..................................................................................................................... 5-37
5.11
System maintenance mode ......................................................................................................... 5-38
5.11.1 System maintenance mode / release mode selection ..................................................... 5-38
5.12
Error codes list ........................................................................................................................... 5-39
5.12.1 Control error codes list ................................................................................................. 5-39
5.12.2 System error log codes table ......................................................................................... 5-56
5.12.3 Details of DSP error codes............................................................................................ 5-70
5.13
Event viewer............................................................................................................................... 5-71
5.13.1 Introduction................................................................................................................... 5-71
5.13.2 Method of use ............................................................................................................... 5-71
5.14
Touch panel calibration .............................................................................................................. 5-73
5.14.1 Locating touch panels ................................................................................................... 5-73
5.14.2 Calibration of touch panel 1.......................................................................................... 5-74
5.14.3 Calibration of touch panel 2.......................................................................................... 5-75
5.15
Cache off setting of MO drive.................................................................................................... 5-77
5.16
Tube current graph ..................................................................................................................... 5-78
5.16.1 Start/Exit ....................................................................................................................... 5-78
5.16.2 Opening Raw data......................................................................................................... 5-79
5.16.3 Viewing chart ................................................................................................................ 5-80
Section 6
Section 7
Software installation ................................................................................................................................ 6-1
6.1
Summary of software installation ................................................................................................. 6-1
6.2
System installation........................................................................................................................ 6-3
6.2.1
CPU1 system installation ................................................................................................ 6-4
6.2.2
CPU0 system installation ................................................................................................ 6-6
6.3
Application installation ................................................................................................................ 6-7
6.4
Setting of System Serial No. (only when the system has been installed)...................................... 6-8
RAID disk................................................................................................................................................ 7-1
7.1
Decision of RAID disk ................................................................................................................. 7-1
7.2
High Point RAID.......................................................................................................................... 7-2
7.2.1
Initialization of RAID ..................................................................................................... 7-2
7.2.2
Remedial measures against the occurrence of troubles ................................................... 7-8
7.2.2.1 In case of Critical Menu.................................................................................................. 7-8
7.2.2.2 In case of Broken Menu.................................................................................................. 7-9
7.3
Promise RAID ............................................................................................................................ 7-10
7.3.1
Initializing the RAID disk............................................................................................. 7-10
7.3.2
Remedial measures against the occurrence of troubles ................................................. 7-14
(7)
7 L2E-BW1444
Section 8 Scanner firmware version up method....................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1
Preparation for version up ............................................................................................................ 8-1
8.1.1
Preparation for version up of VMCPU, VSCPU, and VTCPU/VTCPU2....................... 8-1
8.1.2
Preparation for version up of RXCPU and VATCPU/ VTCPU2 .................................... 8-2
8.1.3
Preparation for version up of XCPU............................................................................... 8-2
8.2.
Down loading method .................................................................................................................. 8-3
8.3.
Version up end processing............................................................................................................ 8-5
8.4
8.3.1
Version up end processing of VMCPU, VSCPU, and VTCPU/ VTCPU2 ..................... 8-5
8.3.2
Version up end processing of RXCPU and VATCPU ..................................................... 8-6
8.3.3 Version up end processing of XCPU............................................................................... 8-6
Version check ............................................................................................................................... 8-6
Section 9 Scanner FPGA version up method ........................................................................................................... 9-1
9.1
9.2
9.3
RXCPU, XCPU version up method ............................................................................................. 9-1
Version up method of MFPGA, TFPGA, TXRFPGA and TXSFPGA......................................... 9-5
Version-up procedure of MFPGA, TFPGA and RFPGA
(for the system installed with the MTCPU2)................................................................................ 9-6
Section 10 Various setting methods of table .......................................................................................................... 10-1
10.1
10.2
Preset height setting method....................................................................................................... 10-1
Stop position accuracy setting method ....................................................................................... 10-2
Appendix 1 System configuration setting items ............................................................................................Appendix -1
Appendix 2 How to initialize HU..................................................................................................................Appendix -2
(8)
8
L2E-BW1444
Section 1
CARRYING -IN, MOUNTING, AND ASSEMBLING
1.1 Carrying in and mounting of scanner unit
The scanner unit is packaged together with its transport cart. After unpacking, carry in and mount the scanner
unit according to the following procedure.
(1) Scribing the mounting position
Determine the mounting position, referring to the mounting layout of the scanner unit and table shown in
Fig.1.1.1, and scribe the outside dimensions on the floor referring to the dimensions in Fig.1.1.2.
Foot rest and table top are used：2775
Foot rest and table top are used：4180
※3950
（3750）
1405
（1205）
※2545
830
690
In case of
forward tilting
In case of
forward tilting
800
300
（100）
740
470
※1175
※475
1000
500
500
1980
250
（100）
（1090）
1430
1010
640
520
（300）
2750
（2380）
1035
1240
In case of
backward tilting
365
1560
1915
（1715）
Scale 1：50
Unit mm
Fig. 1.1.1 Mounting layout of scanner unit and table
Caution 1) Don’t put any obstacle within the two-point dot-dash line when mounting the scanner
unit. Numeric values show the required sizes.
2) Parenthesized dimensions in ( ) show the mounting limit sizes.
3) The dotted line portion shows the required area for opening the front panel and rear
cover of the scanner unit during servicing.
4) The shadowed portion shows the movable range of the patient table.
5) For asterisked sizes (※), their required sizes depend upon the option attachments of
the patient table.
6) The sizes (in case of forward tilting) or (backward tilting) shows the cover position
sizes during tilting.
1－1
L2E-BW1444
7250N (740Kgf)
4-M10 anchor bolt
455
122
1414
633
672
1286
64
500
640
359
7250N (740Kgf)
2940N (300Kgf)
4-M10 anchor bolt
3585
Fig. 1.1.2 Dimensions of scanner table
(2) Bring the scanner unit to the mounting position.
For carrying in the scanner unit, the route should have the dimensions specified in Fig.1.1.3. Check if the
route size is as specified.
Fig. 1.1.3 Required space for carrying in the scanner unit
1－2
L2E-BW1444
Dimensions and weight when carrying in the scanner and patient table
1)
Standard carrying in
Scanner
: 1980mm wide×990mm deep×1870mm high, 1540kg (with cart)
(Weight becomes 1490kg when the rear cover and cone cover are removed at site.)
Patient table : 650mm wide×2120mm long×740mm high, 300kg (with cart having a width of
650mm)
(3) The patient table can be positioned by using the attached templates.
After lowering the scanner unit to the specified position, mount the templates according to the scanner
position and scribe the patient table position. (See Fig.1.1.4)
The patient table position shows an approximate reference position when using the templates.
For precise positioning and anchor bolt fixing, observer [1.4 Leveling and fixing of patient
X-ray center
table].
Stand
Template ①
Scanner base plate
75（Notched size）
Scanner base plate
Scribe table anchor holes
4 positions
Scribe L-holes
4 positions
75
（Notch）
500
Align the notch of the scanner base
plate with the notch of the template ①
①
Stand
130
②
1055
1000
Fig. 1.1.4 Mounting of templates
1－3
L2E-BW1444
(4) Lower the scanner unit onto the floor.
1)
After removing the rear cover once and then, opening the lift cover, loosen the caster adjusting screws
alternately at four right, left, forward, and backward positions, and lower the scanner unit horizontally
until its bottom cover touches the floor.
2)
Remove two cart brackets (front),two cart brackets (rear), and connecting members 1,2,3 connecting
the right and left stands from the scanner unit.
Fig. 1.1.5 Installation of scanner unit
1－4
L2E-BW1444
(5) Remove two suspension jigs, two rotation stop jigs, and two binding jigs from the scanner unit.
Fig. 1.1.6 Removal of transportation jigs
(6) Remove the rotation stop jigs (lower A), (lower B), and tilt preventive jigs. The corn cover can be mounted
as it is during this work.
Fig. 1.1.7 Removal of transportation jigs
1－5
L2E-BW1444
1.2 Leveling of scanner unit
Level the scanner unit according to the following procedure before fixing it to the floor with anchor bolts.
(1) Check the level of the scanner gantry by using a level gauge on both front and rear connecting members
provided between the right and left stands and also on both right and left stand bases as shown in Fig.1.2.1.
(2) Level the scanner unit by adjusting the leveling screws of the scanner stand until the bubble of the level
comes to the center. Place an adjusting plate below the stand bottom cover.
Fig. 1.2.1 Leveling of scanner unit during installation
(3) Fixing of scanner unit to the floor
After leveling the scanner unit, fix the stand bases to the floor with anchor bolts at three places of the right
and left stand bases respectively. Use the following accessory anchor bolts selectively depending upon the
floor conditions.
Article name
Floor with mortar layer of 20mm or less in thickness
..................................... SANPICK ANCHOR (SB-1080) 80mm
(By Sanyo Shoki)
Floor with mortar layer of 20mm or more in thickness
..................................... SANPICK ANCHOR (SB-1010) 100mm
1)
(By Sanyo Shoki)
By using a vibration drill, make holes of 14.5mm in diameter in positions on the floor for fixing the
stand bases. The hole depth should be 70mm for anchor bolts SB1080 or 90mm for SB1010.
2)
Insert anchor bolts into these holes and drive them in lightly. (See Fig.1.2.2)
3)
Tighten the bolts until dome washers are flattened and closely attached to the stand base surface.
Fig. 1.2.2 Anchoring procedure
1－6
L2E-BW1444
1.3 Carrying in the patient table
The patient table is packaged as mounted on a transport cart. After unpacking, carry in and mount it according
to the following procedure.
(1) Bring the patient table to the mounting position.
(2) Mount the patient table on the floor face.
1)
Lift the rear portion of patient table by a hydraulic truck.
2)
Remove the cart mounted at the rear portion of the patient table from the table base.
(a) Loosen the set screws of the cart.
(b) Remove the fixing screws from L-bracket.
(c) Pull the pin of L-bracket out of the table base and remove the L-bracket.
(d) Draw out the pin on the opposite side of the cart from the table base.
3)
Mount the installing jig to the table base.
4)
Tighten the supporting bolts in installing jigs.
5)
Put the receiving plate on the floor.
6)
Lower the patient table in such a way as the supporting bolts meet the groove in the receiving plate to
support the rear portion of the patient table.
7)
Lift the front portion of the patient table by a hydraulic cart.
8)
Support the front portion of the table according to steps (2) ~ (6).
9)
Remove the hydraulic cart from the patient table.
10) After loosening four supporting bolts alternately to lower the patient table horizontally until the table
base touches the floor.
11) After the table base has landed on the floor, loosen the supporting bolts furthermore and remove the
receiving plates.
12) Remove the installing jig from the table base.
(Caution) Tools from *1 to *3 are servicing tools. Return them to the works soon after the end of work.
Supporting bolt
Installing jig (*1)
Hydraulic cart
Pin
Cart
Cart
Installing jig (*1)
Supporting bolt (*2)
Switchboard cover
Receiving plate (*3)
L-bracket
Cart push screw
Installing jig (*1)
Supporting bolt (*2)
Receiving plate (*3)
Installing jig (*1)
Fig. 1.3.1 Installation of table
1－7
L2E-BW1444
1.4 Leveling and fixing of patient table
Fix the foot switch shown in 2.2.3 temporarily before starting this work, and make sure that the foot
switch can be mounted without any trouble.
If the table unit is too close to the scanner side, it is possible that the foot switch cover cannot be
mounted later.
(1) Lift the table to a height of 750mm (display height 0mm) above the floor and turn off the power supply.
(2) Move the tabletop forward up to the extreme front position by turning the manual retreating handle for the
tabletop mounted at the rear of the tabletop. (See Fig.1.4.1)
Tabletop manual retreating handle
Fig. 1.4.1
(3) Remove the rear base cover. (See Fig.1.4.5)
1)
Remove screws A.
2)
Remove the rear base cover.
(4) Remove the power distribution board cover. (See Fig.1.4.5)
1)
Remove screws B and then, remove the power distribution board cover.
(5) Put the leveling jig on the rail, and check if the horizontal level of X-axis turning and Z-axis turning leveled
properly by putting the level on the rail. (See Fig. 1.4.2)
X-axis turning
Level
Z-axis turning
Level
Side cover
Leveling jig
Y
X
Leveling jig
Z
Fig. 1.4.2
(6) If the tabletop is not leveled properly, put adjusting liners below the base after lifting the base by turning the
leveling screw, and then, level the patient table. (See Fig.1.4.6)
Perform adjustment (7) ~ (12) in and after the next paragraph after scanogram has been set to be
ready for radiography.
1－8
L2E-BW1444
(7) Adjust the verticality of the table to the scanner unit by using the scanogram.
1)
Scan the tabletop in the scanogram mode.
Set the scano mode to “P.A”.
2)
Display a scanogram image of the table top as grid display. (See Fig.1.4.3)
3)
Make sure that the scanogram image of the tabletop satisfies the following requirements (a), (b) with
reference to the grid.
(a) Measure the distances (A1-A2, B1-B2) between grid center line and the right and left edges of the
tabletop and make sure that these distances are equal to each other.
(b) Make sure that the right and left edges of the tabletop are parallel to the grid.
4)
Adjust the lateral position of the table until the requirements (a) (b) are satisfied, and confirm it by the
scanogram image again.
Distance measuring icon
Grid display icon
Grid center line
Make sure that
A1-A2 = B1-B2
Displayed by the distance measuring icon.
Fig. 1.4.3
1－9
L2E-BW1444
(8) Turn off the table power supply.
(9) Fix the table body by driving in anchor bolts on the floor. (See Fig.1.4.4)
anchor bolt
Dome washer
Base
Fig. 1.4.4
(10) Mount the removed switchboard cover and rear base cover to the table.
(11) Cover the installing jig screw holes on the side face of the base cover with an installing seal.
(12) Turn on the table power supply.
1－10
L2E-BW1444
A
(For the system installed with the MTCPU2 PCB, refer to Fig. 1.4.6.)
Switchboard cover
Screw B
Bar
Leveling screw
Anchor
Installing jig
M10 washer
Ratchet handle
Base
Anchor bolt
Washer
Adjusting plate
Leveling screw
M10 x 35L hexagon socket bolt
Anchor tongue
Base cover (rear)
Base cover (side face)
Seal (attachment)
Screw A
Arrow view A
Fig. 1.4.5
1－11
L2E-BW1444
A
Switchboard cover
Screw B
Bar
Leveling screw
Anchor
Installing jig
M10 washer
Ratchet handle
base
Anchor bolt
Washer
Adjusting plate
Leveling screw
M10 x 35L hexagon socket bolt
Anchor tongue
Screw A
Base cover (side face)
a
b
Arrow view A
Seal
(attachment)
Base cover (rear)
Fig. 1.4.6
1－11－1
L2E-BW1444
1.5 Mounting of other units
1.5.1
Operation unit
The operation unit is composed of the following units.
(1) IPU (Image Processing Unit)
(2) LCD monitor
(3) Touch panel unit
(4) Keyboard
(5) Mouse
(6) Interphone box
(Note ; The desk is not included in the standard configuration)
Monitor
Touch panel unit
Mouse
Keyboard
Image Processing Unit
Interphone box
1－12
L2E-BW1444
X-ray control unit
(1) Since cooling fans are provided at the back, place the X-ray control unit more than 15cm away
from the wall.
(2) Secure a space for wiring and maintenance work at the front and right side face.
X-ray control unit
15cm or over
(3) After placing the X-ray control unit in position, insert the attached holders to fix the casters.
Work space
1.5.2
Work space
Caster
Caster holder
1－13
L2E-BW1444
1.6 Mounting of detector and detector side collimator
1.6.1
Mounting of detector
Perform the following work by two persons for securing safety.
Before mounting the detector, see the revision label ⑩.
If the revision label shows “0”, you have to connect the 552CN connector before detector fixed.
[ reference → appendix “How to plug in the Temperature Controller” ]
An optimum directive position depends upon the detector. Mount the detector at an optimum directive
position by using the designated direction adjusting pin out of five directive positions. The optimum
directive position is indicated on the direction nameplate ⑧. Mount the detector, referring to
Fig.1.6.1 shown below.
3
2
10
5
1
2
6
6
4
6
1
8
1
7
6
9
①
Grip bar
⑥
Plain washer
②
Guide pin
⑦
Direction adjusting pin
③
Rotary plate
⑧
Direction nameplate
④
Detector
⑨
Shield cover (Front)
⑤
Shaft
⑩
Revision label
Fig. 1.6.1
1－14A
L2E-BW1444
(1) Fix grip bar ① to four detector fixing flanges respectively.
(2) Mount two guide pins ② to rotary plate ③.
(3) Push the detector ④ against rotary plate ③ by inserting the center hole of detector ④ onto the shaft ⑤,
and fix the inner flange temporarily to the rotary plate ③ by using M8 x 35L hexagon socket bolts (A,B in
the figure) with plain washer ⑥ each to such an extent as the detector ④ can rotate slightly.
(4) Remove guide pins ② and grip bars ①.
(5) Fix the outer left flange (C) temporarily to rotary plate ③ by using M8 x 35L hexagon socket bolts with
plain washer ⑥ each to such an extent as the detector ④ can rotate slightly.
(6) Screw in a direction adjusting pin ⑦ to rotary plate ③ through the hole of the outer right flange (D)
(Select the direction adjusting pin ⑦ employed, referring to the direction nameplate ⑧).
(7) Apply the inside of the hole of outer right flange (D) to the direction adjusting pin ⑦ by lightly turning the
detector ④ clockwise or counterclockwise around the axis ⑤ as the center according to Table 1.6.1.
(8) Fasten three M8 x 35L hexagon socket head bolts being fixed temporarily in step ③ and ⑤ with
tightening torque of 2700N-cm (270kgf-cm), while keeping the angle so as not to allow the detector ④ to
get out of shaft ⑤.
(9) Remove the direction adjusting pin ⑦ from rotary plate ③, and fix the outer right flange (D) with
tightening torque of 2700N-cm (270kg-cm) by using M8 x 35L hexagon socket head bolts with plain washer
⑥ each.
Table 1.6.1
Setting positions
Direction adjusting
(Indicated on direction
pins used for
nameplate)
positioning
CENTER
φ20
φ18LD
φ18
φ18RD
φ18
φ16LD
φ16
φ16RD
φ16
Detector fixing methods
Fix the detector at the center as viewed from the front
Fix the detector by lowering its left side as viewed from
the front
Fix the detector by lowering its right side as viewed from
the front
Fix the detector by lowering its left side as viewed from
the front
Fix the detector by lowering its right side as viewed from
the front
1－15
L2E-BW1444
After mounting the detector, connect 552CN of the detector to the temperature controller and slice selection cable
(SD-1CN ~ WA-7CN), referring to Fig.1.6.2.
Temperature
controller
Slice selection cable
SD-1CN
552CN
Detector
WA-7CN
Preamplifire unit
Preamplifire unit
Fig. 1.6.2
It is necessary for stabilizing the performance of the detector (temperature controller) and
preamplifier to apply power to these units for about 4 hours before using them. Continue feeding
power to these units normally.
For the connection between the detector and the preamplifier, refer to 2.3.2.
1－16
L2E-BW1444
Appendix
“How to plug in the Temperature Controller (connect 552CN)”
1. Remove COVER and temperature controller (lower side only).
COVER
Temperature Controller
(lower side)
Fig. 1.6.3
How to remove
COVER → remove four screws (fig.1.6.3 dot circle), then take the COVER off.
Temperature Controller → unlock the hook (fig.1.6.4 dot circle), then pull the controller body out.
1－16－1
L2E-BW1444
Fig. 1.6.4
2. Connect the 552CN with the detector hanging.
Fig. 1.6.5
1－16－2
L2E-BW1444
After the detector mount on the guide pin, keep the detector hanging. (don’t push to the rotary plate)
One person grasps the grip rod so as not to drop it. (fig.1.6.5)
Another person plugs in the 552CN, and tightens two screws. (fig.1.6.6)
Fig. 1.6.6
3. Fix the detector . ( Refer to 1.6.1 Mounting of detector )
4. Put the Temperature Controller and the COVER back.
1－16－3
L2E-BW1444
(10) Mount the shield cover (front) ⑨ onto the detector with M4×10L pan-head screws.
(11) Using the shield metal and plate, clip the sheet copper of the shield cover (front) ⑨ between them, and fix
it with M4×10L pan-head screws.
(The plate is attached to the shield cover.) (Fig. 1.6.7, 1.6.8)
shield cover (Front) ⑨
plate
sheet copper
plate
shield cover
Fig. 1.6.7
Fig. 1.6.8 mounting completed
1－16－4
L2E-BW1444
1.6.2
Mounting of detector side collimator
(1) Mounting of drive unit
Apply the end face of the left mechanical section base to the peak of the spring pin, and fix the left
mechanical section base by three M8×20L hexagon socket head bolts. Fix the right mechanical
section base in the same way. (See Fig.1.6.9 and 1.6.10)
(2) Mounting of collimator plate
Apply the end face of the left mounting bracket to the peak of the spring pin, and fix the left
mounting bracket by two M8×20L hexagon socket head bolts.
Make sure that the mechanical section is engaged with the gear of the collimator plate. Fix the
right mounting bracket in the same way. (See Fig.1.6.9 and 1.6.10)
Mechanical section
base (right)
Spring pin
M8 x 20L hexagon
socket head bolt
Mounting bracket
(right)
Spring pin
Collimator plate
Mounting bracket (left)
Mechanical section base (left)
Fig. 1.6.9
1－17A
L2E-BW1444
(3) Connection of connector
Connect the cable connector 230CN being wound to the lower part of the transformer mounting bracket to
connector 230CN of the right mechanical section. (See Fig.1.6.10)
Wiring differs at the right and left terminals of the collimator mechanical section between 50Hz districts
and 60Hz districts. Check the wiring without fail before turning on the power supply. (See Fig. 1.6.11).
Transformer bracket
Mounting bracket
(right)
Mechanical section
base (left)
Spring pin
Mounting bracket
(left)
Dial
Spring pin
Fig 1.6.10
Mechanical section
base (right)
230CN
Right terminal (Same on
the opposite side, too)
50Hz district
60Hz district
A cable for shorting No. 5 and 8 is
connected.
Fig.1.6.11
1－18A
A cable for shorting No.5 and 8 is
not connected.
L2E-BW1444
(4) Connect cables. (See Fig. 1.6.12)
Make sure that cables are not caught tight nor stretched when the collimator operates.
Collimate plate of detector
side collimator
Detector side collimator cable
Drive unit of detector side
collimator
230ＣＮ
Detector
Fig.1.6.12
1－19A
L2E-BW1444
(5) Adjustment of detector side collimator (coarse adjustment)
1)
Turn off the scanner power supply.
2)
Mount the adjusting jig to the collimator plate by M4×12L pan-head screws (with springs and plain
washers).
3)
Press the jig tip to the rotary plate face by pushing the collimator plate slowly by hand. (See Fig.1.6.13)
Position the stopper to enable the stopper to touch the L bracket under this condition. (See Fig.1.6.14)
Adjust both right and left stoppers.
Don’t push the center of the collimator plate, but slowly push the right and left ribs at the end of
the collimator plate by hand, otherwise the slit accuracy deteriorate.
Stopper (right)
L bracket
Stopper
mounting screw
Rib (Move the collimator plate by
pushing here)
Stopper (left)
Adjusting jig
Apply the stopper
to L bracket
Collimator plate
Detector
Don’t push this portion.
Adjusting jig
M4×12Lpan-head screw
(with spring and plain washer)
Rib
Adjusting jig
Move the collimator plate forward and lightly
apply the adjusting jig tip face against the
rotary plate. The stopper is positioned
correctly when the stopper and L bracket touch
under this condition.
Mount the jig to the collimator plate in
such a way as both side faces of the
collimator plate are lightly caught by the
jig.
Fig. 1.6.13
1－20A
L2E-BW1444
M4 x 40L hexagon socket head bolt (*2)
M4 nut (*3)
L bracket
2- M4 x 12L hexagon socket head bolt (*1)
(spring, plain washer)
Stopper
After loosening the bolts and nuts marked (*1) (*2) (*3), adjust the stopper position. Then, fasten the bolts (*1).
Screw in the bolt (*2) until the bearing surface of bolt (*2) exactly touches “L bracket”, and lock the nut (*3).
Perform this work on both right and left sides.
Fig. 1.6.14 Coarse adjusting method of stopper position
1－21A
L2E-BW1444
1.7 Mounting of X-ray tube unit and cooler
In Presto, two of X-ray tube assemblies (3.5MHU and 5MHU) can be mounted. Since the X-ray tube assembly
and cooler are connected to each other with hoses, etc., be careful not to scratch cooler hoses or cables.
1.7.1
Mounting procedure of X-ray tube assembly (Presto 3.5MHU)
The following mounting procedure applies to the X-ray tube assembly having the tube shift mechanism.
For details, refer to Fig.1.7.1.
(1) Turn the rotary plate until collimator case ① comes up to the highest position.
(2) Screw the holder ③ to the rotary plate.
(Bring the key way of holder ③ into contact with the key of rotary plate.)
(3) Fit insulation ring ⑩ to X-ray tube assembly ⑤, and fix it with Mylar tape.
(4) Mount X-ray tube assembly ⑤ to holder ③.
(5) Mount trunnion ⑥ to holder ③ by using four M8×50 long hexagon socket head bolts.
(Tightening torque 1960N-cm (200kgf-cm).)
(6) Connect the anode and cathode high-voltage cables to the X-ray tube assembly.
(7) Connect the starter cable from the X-ray tube assembly to the terminal ⑦ (7, 8, 9, CS and EX)
and the cable to terminal ⑧ (ED, E, LO, L100, H, and HO).
(8) For wiring and piping, refer to [2.3 Wiring inside the system], too.
(9) Mount pedestal ⑯ and gauge mount ⑰.
(10) Mount the retaining band ⑱ to holder ③ by M8×16L hexagon socket head bolt.
(11) Mount guard bracket ⑲ to the rotary plate by M8×20L hexagon socket head bolts.
(1) Be careful not to forget to use the insulation Mylar sheets (insulation ring) when
mounting the X-ray tube assembly.
If they are not applied, secondary electronic
parts may be damaged due to discharge. Since holders are used to fix the X-ray
tube assembly during delivery, check if the X-ray tube is correctly insulated by using a
circuit tester.
(2) At the delivery time from the works, ⑯ and ⑰ are removed. Mount these parts
securely.
(3) Parts ⑯ and ⑰ must be mounted before centering in chapter 3.
1－22
L2E-BW1444
A : In case of 3.5 MHU X-ray tube assembly
⑱
4-M8Ｘ20L
Hexagon socket head bolt
（with spring and plain washer）
⑥
2-M8Ｘ20L
Hexagon socket head bolt
（with spring and plain washer）
3-M4Ｘ10L
Hexagon socket head bolt
（with plain washer）
a
⑤
⑲
21
⑩
＋
－
3-M4Ｘ10L
Hexagon socket head bolt
（with plain washer）
H9
③
CS
H7
H8
⑭
Power cord
（L0,L110,H,H0,E）
a
⑫
⑬
⑰
⑨
⑯
①
7-M6 nut, spring,
and plain washer
H,H0,L0,L100,E,ED ⑧
⑪
⑦ 7,8,9,CS,EX
④
①
③
④
⑤
⑥
⑦
⑧
Collimator case
Holder (base plate)
Mount plate
X-ray tube assembly
Trunnion
Terminal
Terminal
1.7.2
⑨
⑩
⑪
⑫
⑬
⑭
⑯
Cooler
⑰ Gauge mount
Insulating ring
⑱ Push band
Oil container
⑲ Guard bracket 1
Mounting bracket 1
Guard plate
Mounting bracket 2
Hexagon socket hesd bolt M16×14L with spring and plain washer
Pedestal
Fig. 1.7.1
Mounting procedure of cooler
(1) Mounting bracket 1 ⑫ and mounting bracket 2 ⑬ of cooler ⑨ by hexagon bolts ⑭.
(2) Put the cooler ⑨ on the mount plate ④, and mounting bracket 1 ⑫ and mounting bracket 2 ⑬
with M6 nuts, spring washers, and plain washers.
(3) Connect the power cord from the cooler to terminal ⑧.
(4) Mount guard plate
1.
to guard brackets ⑲ ⑳ by M4×10L hexagon socket head bolts.
Mount guard plate
sure that
after fixing the oil hose and HV cables using tie lap. Make
does not touch any hose or cables. If not, cleat the hose and cables
again so as not to allow them to touch
2.
.
The bending radius of the oil hose is R80mm or over (on the hose center line) as a
reference. Cleat the hose so as not to crush it flat.
1－23
L2E-BW1444
1.7.3
Mounting procedure of X-ray tube assembly (Presto 5 MHU)
The following mounting procedure applies to the X-ray tube assembly having the tube shift mechanism.
For details, refer to Fig.1.7.2.
(1) Turn the rotary plate until collimator case ① comes up to the highest position.
(2) Screw the holder ③ to the rotary plate. (Bring the key way of holder ③ into contact with the
key of rotary plate.)
(3) Fit insulation ring ⑩ to X-ray tube assembly ⑤, and fix it with Mylar tape.
(4) Mount X-ray tube assembly ⑤ to holder ③.
(5) Mount trunnion ⑥ to holder ③ by using four M8×50 long hexagon socket head bolts.
(Tightening torque 1960N-cm (200kgf-cm).)
(6) Connect the anode and cathode high-voltage cables to the X-ray tube assembly.
(7) Connect the starter cable from the X-ray tube assembly to the terminal ⑦ (7, 8, 9, CS and EX)
and the cable to terminal ⑧ (ED, E, LO, L100, H, and HO).
(8) For wiring and piping, refer to [2.3 Wiring inside the system], too.
(9) Mount pedestal ⑯ and gauge mount ⑰.
(10) Mount the retaining band ⑱ to holder ③ by M8×16L hexagon socket head bolt.
(11) Mount guard bracket ⑲ to the rotary plate by M8×20L hexagon scoket head bolts.
(1) Be careful not to forget to use the insulation Mylar sheets (insulation ring) when
mounting the X-ray tube assembly.
If they are not applied, secondary electronic
parts may be damaged due to discharge. Since holders are used to fix the X-ray
tube assembly during delivery, check if the X-ray tube is correctly insulated by using a
circuit tester.
(2) At the delivery time from the works, ⑯ and ⑰ are removed. Mount these parts
securely.
(3) Parts ⑯ and ⑰ must be mounted before centering in chapter 3.
1－24
L2E-BW1444
B : In case of 5MHU X-ray tube assembly
⑱
4-M8Ｘ20L
Hexagon socket head bolt
（with spring and plain washer）
⑥
2-M8Ｘ20L
Hexagon socket head bolt
（with spring and plain washer）
3-M4Ｘ10L
Hexagon socket head bolt
（with plain washer）
a
⑤
⑲
21
⑩
＋
－
H9
③
3-M4Ｘ10L
Hexagon socket head bolt
（with plain washer）
CS
H7
H8
⑭
Power cord
（L0,L110,H,H0,E）
a
⑫
⑬
⑰
⑨
⑯
①
7-M6 nut, spring,
and plain washer
H,H0,L0,L100,E,ED ⑧
⑪
⑦ 7,8,9,CS,EX
④
①
③
④
⑤
⑥
⑦
⑧
Collimator case
Holder (base plate)
Mount plate
X-ray tube assembly
Trunnion
Terminal
Terminal
1.7.4
⑨
⑩
⑪
⑫
⑬
⑭
⑯
Cooler
⑰ Gauge mount
Oil container
⑱ Push band
Insulating ring
⑲ Guard bracket 1
Plate (1)
Guard plate
Plate (2)
Hexagon socket hesd bolt M16×20L with spring and plain washer
Pedestal
Fig. 1.7.2
Mounting procedure of cooler
(1) Mount the mounting brackets 1 and 2 to the upper face of cooler ⑨ by hexagon bolts ⑭.
(2) Put the cooler ⑨ on the mount plate ④, and fix plate A ⑫ and plate B ⑬ with M6 nuts,
spring washers, and plain washers.
(3) Connect the power cord from the cooler to terminal ⑧.
(4) Mount guard plate
to guard brackets ⑲ ⑫ by M4×10L hexagon socket head bolts (with
springs and plain washers).
1.
2.
after fixing the oil hose and HV cables using tie lap Make sure
Mount guard plate
that
does not touch any hose or cables. If not, cleat the hose and cables again
so as not to allow them to touch .
The bending radius of the oil hose is R80mm or over (on the hose center line) as a
reference. Cleat the hose so as not to crush it flat.
1－25
L2E-BW1444
1.8 Removal of protective materials for transport
Remove the vinyl bag covering the electromagnetic brake of the scan drive unit of scanner.
1－26
L2E-BW1444
1.9 Internal inspection of patient table
Make sure that no oil leaks from the hydraulic system and check the oil level in the oil tank according to the
procedure at the end of wiring of patient table.
Observe the following procedure before moving the table.
(1) Remove the link supporting bracket.
1)
Remove screws.
2)
After lifting the table, remove fixtures A and B.
Return the link supporting bracket (fixtures A, B) to the works.
(2) Set the patient table to 900mm above the floor.
(3) Make sure that no oil leaks from the hydraulic system.
(4) Make sure that the oil level of the oil tank gauge is 60mm ±10mm.
(5) Set the patient table to 700mm above the floor and turn off the power supply.
(6) Lift the upper edge pipe of the bellows cover and fit it to the bellows holders.
(Three bellows holders are mounted below the right and left side covers, respectively.)
1－27
L2E-BW1444
Fig. 1.9.1
(7) Fix the front and rear parts of the upper edge pipe of the bellows cover with the bellows fixtures
(Attachments of patient table) at 2 positions respectively.
1－28
L2E-BW1444
1.10 Mounting of covers
The scanner covers consist of those illustrated in Fig.1.10.1. When the system is shipped in the standard style of
packaging, the scanner unit is delivered with the top cover, both side covers, stand covers (right, left, front, rear),
opening covers (right, left, front, and rear), and front lower cover detached.
Top cover
Side cover
Rear cover
Opening cover (rear)
Cone cover
Lift cover
Front lower cover
Stand cover
Opening cover (front)
Side cover
Stand cover (rear)
(Front stand cover on the opposite side)
Fig. 1.10.1 Scanner covers
After completion of wiring and adjustment of the scanner, mount the covers to the scanner referring to Fig. 1.10.2
and Fig. 1.10.3.
(1) Remove four thumb screws and open the lift cover.
(2) Mount the top cover receiver with four sems screws (M4×10L) and then, mount the top cover with four M4
truss head screws and toothed washers. Connect the connector 250CN of the top cooling fan. Connect the
grounding wire.
(3) Insert two hooks mounted at the upper part of the side cover into the U-receiving recesses on either end of
the top cover. Fix the side covers to the support base of the scanner gantry with four M4×8L truss screws
and toothed washers. Cover the screws with attached screw caps.
(4) Mount the front opening cover to the lift cover.
1－29
L2E-BW1444
Lift cover
Hinge
M6 Nut
(Spring and plain washers)
NOTE 1)
Hinge
Large brass spacer
Large washer
M8 nut (Spring and plain washer)
Lift cover
NOTE 2)
Lift cover cable
Gas spring
NOTE: 1) When mounting the lift cover, firstly put the large brass spacer into the opening center shaft
and then put the hinge into the shaft. After that, put the large washer into the shaft and
mount the M8 nut (with spring and plain washers).
Work for both left and right sides.
2) Put the lift cover cable over the opening center shaft as shown above. Wire the cable so as
not to be caught by the ceiling cover when closing the lift cover. Wire the cable so as not to
apply any excessive load to it when opening/closing the lift cover,.
Fig. 1.10.1A Mounting Lift Cover
1－29－1
L2E-BW1444
Top cover
Side cover (left)
Lift cover
Side cover (right)
Front lower cover
Opening cover (front)
Screw cap
Screw cap
Supporting
base
Bottom cover
Fig. 1.10.2 Mounting of scanner front covers
(5) Mount the stand covers.
Fig. 1.10.3 Mounting of stand covers
1－30
L2E-BW1444
(6) Check the cone cover position after mounting the cone cover to meet the scribed line of the gantry side
mounting bracket in such a way as its center is aligned with the lift cover center.
Connect the traffic light, microphone and mat switch connectors 32CN, 312CN, and 88CN.
Connect mat switch connector 88CN without fail before starting the scan, tilt, and table
operation. They are not operated unless 88CN connector is connected.
(7) Mount the front rod and cable holder assembly to the stand. The length of front and rear rods shall be as
shown in Fig. 1.10.4.
After mounting the covers, tilt the system (±25°)and make sure that no excessive load is
applied to the hinge of the opening cover. If an excessive load is applied, adjust the length of
the front and rear rods so as not to apply any excessive load.
(8) Connect cable 163CN of the rear cover X-ray exposure indicator lamp.
(9) Close the rear cover and fix it with truss head screws (M4×8L) at 5 places.
Cover these screws with attached screw caps. (Mount the attached rear cover cart to the rear cover in
advance. After mounting the rear cover, remove the rear cover cart and store it.)
(10) Fix the side face of the rear cover to the side cover by using four sems screws M14×12L, and cover these
screws with the attached screw caps.
(11) Close the lifting cover and fix it with thumb screws.
(12) Mount the front lower cover to the lift cover.
(13) Fix the rear opening cover with truss screws (M4×8L).
Fig. 1.10.4 Mounting of scanner rear cover
1－31
L2E-BW1444
(14) Mount the X-ray transmission window to the lift cover and cone cover.
1)
Label the convex side of the velcro fastening to the concave side of the magic tape of the cone cover
and lift cover. (Be careful with the laser projector window position when labeling the tape.)
(1) Mount the X-ray transmission window closely so as not to produce any clearance from the
cover.
(2) Overlap both ends of the X-ray transmission window with each other as illustrated below
so as not to allow any liquid like a vomited substance to enter the scanner interior even if it
flows down from the upper part.
2)
Insert the collar on the belt into the long hole of the cone cover (lift cover).
3)
Fix one end of the belt by M3×6L flat countersunk head screws.
4)
Butt both ends of the belt to each other, and fix the end on the unscrewed side by M3×6L flat
countersunk head screw, and push the belt to closely attach to the cone cover (lift cover).
5)
Cover the M3 flat counter-sunk head screw portions fixing the collar on the belt with the attached white
seal.
X-ray transmission window
Magic tape of cover (concave part)
Belt
A
Belt
B
Table side
Table side
Long hole
Cone cover
Magic tape
4-M3×6Lsems screw
Seal (white)
Lift cover
Detail of part B
Seal (white)
M3 flat countersunk head screw
Belt
X-ray transmission window
X-ray transmission window
Arrow view A
Butt each other
Collar
(Fit in arrow direction)
7×20 long hole
(2 positions on lift cover (cone cover) )
Insert
1－32
46
L2E-BW1444
Section 2
WIRING
2.1 Wiring of cables between units
Refer to the wiring diagram and cable list on pages 2-2, 2-3, 2-4 and 2-5.
Cautions on wiring
・ Cables are classified roughly into four kinds; high voltage (HV) cables, power (POW) cables, signal (SIG)
cables, and grounding (GND) cables.
・
For preventing malfunction of the CT system, isolate the cables from each other by using wiring pits as
shown below. Ground each pit without fail. If they cannot be isolated from each other by using pits,
isolate them by using a shielded zipper tube Ground the seal of the zipper tube without fail.
HV
POW
SIG
GND
50
100
100
150
An example of wiring pits
SIG
GND
100
POW
100
HV
50
Unit
mm
150
2－1
L2E-BW1444
2－2
L2E-BW1444
Fig.2.1.1 External cable connection diagram (without step-down transformer)
OPTICAL
2－3
L2E-BW1444
Fig.2.1.2 External cable connection diagram (with step-down transformer)
External Cables
CABLE
INTERNAL OUTER LENGTH IN
CONNECTOR SIZE
CABLE NO. OF CONDUCTORS
STD
DESTINATION MAX
CABLE TYP
(H×W×D)
RUN
CASE OF STANDARD
USE
O. Dia AND WIRE THICKNESS
LENGTH LENGTH
No.
LENGTH
POW. SIG. GND FROM
TO
FROM
TO
FROM TO
DRAWING
No.
003
HP-PB
WS
15
12
0
1.2
10.8
3×20
UL1683 6AWG
＊
KA340700-E
031
HP-PB
WS
15
12
0
1.1
10.9
3×20
UL1683 6AWG
＊
KA340700-F
061
HP-PB
OC
15
10
0
0.3
9.7
3×20
UL1683 6AWG
＊
KA340700-H
100
HP-PB
WB
15
10
0
1.4
8.6
41.2
105
WB
WS
15
15
0.4
1.2
13.4
35.0
106
WB
WS
15
12
1.7
0.7
9.6
18.6
107
WB
WL
15
10
1.3
0.0
8.7
6.6
131
WB
WS
15
12
1.5
0.7
9.8
161
WB
OC
15
10
1.6
0.3
302
WB
WS
15
12
1.5
0.7
UL. CSA-ST-SB
＊
KB315896-A
＊
KB315894-A
UL-ST-SB 3×10AWG
＊
KB327035-C
UL2464SB 2×20AWG
＊
KA318151-E
18.6
UL-ST-SB 3×10AWG
＊
KB327035-D
8.1
13.5
ST-SB 2×14AWG
＊
KA338123-E
9.8
11.5
UL2464SB 17P×28AWG
4C×2AWG
UL. CSA-ST-SB
2C×2AWG
20
× 20×61.7
61.7
＊
×51.5
KB211638-C
×51.5
303
WB
DS
15
10
1.4
0
8.6
6.6
UL2464SB 2×20AWG
KA318151-G
＊
20
331
WS
OC
15
12
0.7
0.5
10.8
11.5
UL2464SB 25P×28AWG
× 20×76.8
76.8
＊
×51.5
KB211639-F
SC
KB322808-A
×51.5
333
WS
OC
22
1.5
0.5
20.0
7.0
Optical FIBER
SC
＊
Internal Cables (Scanner)
INTERNAL OUTER LENGTH IN
CONNECTOR SIZE
CABLE NO. OF CONDUCTORS
CABLE DESTINATION MAX
STD
CABLE TYP
(H×W×D)
USE
CASE OF STANDARD
O. Dia AND WIRE THICKNESS
No.
LENGTH LENGTH
LENGTH
POW. SIG. GND FROM
TO
FROM TO
FROM TO
＊1
WS
WT
1.0
1.0
－
－
－
3×20
＊2
WS
WT
3.1
3.1
－
－
－
13.5
UL1683 6AWG
ST-SB 2×14AWG
DRAWING
No.
KB325041-A
＊
KB325527-A
＊
＊3
WS
WT
4.7
4.7
－
－
－
11.5
UL2464SB 25P×28AWG
＊
＊4
WS
SP
6.0
6.0
－
－
－
5.6
UL2464SB 2×22AWG
＊
7.5×68
20×76.8
×15.6
×51.5
10.5
×
KB219492-B
KB325031-A
7.4
×11.7
Table 2.1.1 Cable list (without stepdown transformer)
2－4
L2E-BW1444
External Cables
CABLE
INTERNAL OUTER LENGTH IN
CONNECTOR SIZE
CABLE NO. OF CONDUCTORS
STD
DESTINATION MAX
CABLE TYP
(H×W×D)
RUN
CASE OF STANDARD
USE
O. Dia AND WIRE THICKNESS
LENGTH LENGTH
No.
LENGTH
POW. SIG. GND FROM
TO
FROM TO
FROM TO
DRAWING
No.
003
TR
WS
15
12
0
1.2
10.8
3×20
UL1683 6AWG
＊
KA340700-E
031
TR
WS
15
12
0
1.1
10.9
3×20
UL1683 6AWG
＊
KA340700-F
061
TR
OC
15
10
0
0.3
9.7
3×20
UL1683 6AWG
＊
KA340700-H
100
TR
WB
15
10
0.5
1.4
8.1
41.2
105
WB
WS
15
15
0.4
1.2
13.4
35.0
106
WB
WS
15
12
1.7
0.7
9.6
18.6
UL-ST-SB 3×10AWG
＊
KB327035-C
107
WB
WL
15
10
1.3
0.0
8.7
6.6
UL2464SB 2×20AWG
＊
KA318151-E
131
WB
WS
15
12
1.5
0.7
9.8
18.6
UL-ST-SB 3×10AWG
＊
KB327035-D
161
WB
OC
15
10
1.6
0.3
8.1
13.5
ST-SB 2×14AWG
＊
KA338123-E
110
HP-PB
TR
5
3
0
0.5
2.5
41.2
＊
KB315896-D
302
WB
WS
15
12
1.5
0.7
9.8
11.5
UL2464SB 17P×28AWG
＊
303
WB
DS
15
10
1.4
0
8.6
6.6
UL2464SB 2×20AWG
＊
331
WS
OC
333
WS
OC
15
UL. CSA-ST-SB
4C×2AWG
UL. CSA-ST-SB
2C×2AWG
UL. CSA-ST-SB
4C×2AWG
＊
KB315896-C
＊
KB315894-A
12
0.7
0.5
10.8
11.5
UL2464SB 25P×28AWG
＊
22
1.5
0.5
20.0
7.0
Optical FIBER
＊
20×61.7 20×61.7
×51.5
×51.5
KB211638-C
KA318151-G
20×76.8 20×76.8
×51.5
×51.5
SC
SC
KB211639-F
KB322808-A
Internal Cables (Scanner)
OUTER LENGTH IN
INTERNAL
CASE OF STANDARD CABLE NO. OF CONDUCTORS
CABLE DESTINATION MAX
STD
CABLE TYP
CONNECTOR SIZE
USE
(H×W×D)
O. Dia AND WIRE THICKNESS
LENGTH
No.
LENGTH LENGTH
POW. SIG. GND FROM
TO
FROM TO
FROM TO
＊1
WS
WT
1.0
1.0
－
－
－
3×20
＊2
WS
WT
3.1
3.1
－
－
－
13.5
UL1683 6AWG
ST-SB 2×14AWG
DRAWING
No.
KB325041-A
＊
KB325527-A
＊
＊3
WS
WT
4.7
4.7
－
－
－
11.5
UL2464SB 25P×28AWG
＊
＊4
WS
SP
6.0
6.0
－
－
－
5.6
UL2464SB 2×22AWG
＊
7.5×68
20×76.8
×15.6
×51.5
10.5
×
KB219492-B
KB325031-A
7.4
×11.7
Table 2.1.2 Cable list (with stepdown transformer)
2－5
L2E-BW1444
2.2 Wiring of cables in each unit
2.2.1
Scanner
All the cables for connection to external units should be laid via the power distribution board (joint base
unit) at the lower rear part of the scanner.
For the block diagram of wiring routes, refer to Page 2-2.
For the wiring routes in detail, refer to Page 2-3. Connect each cable after removing the joint base unit
cover.
Fig. 2.2.1
Fig. 2.2.2
2－6
L2E-BW1444
Wiring of RUN No. 333 cable inside the scanner (For the system installed with the MTCPU1 PCB)
TXR5
PCB
SWBD
PCB
TXR5 PCB
SBPCB UNIT
333
Be careful with thin protective
sheath-free cables so as not
to allow them to come out to
the rotation panel side
during wiring.
Connect to the rear
Side of the stand
clamp
Left side of the scanner
Caution: The bending radius of RUN No.333 cable (optical fiber cable) shall be more than 100mm.
The optical cable is connected through the rear of the stand.
Fix the optical cable with tie laps with due care so as not to cause any cable contact failure
during tilt operation.
2－7
L2E-BW1444
Connection of the RUN No. 333 cable inside the scanner (installed with the MTCPU2 PCB)
SBPCB
ＳＷＢ Ｄプリ 板
unit
SBPCB
Ｓ Ｂ Ｐ unit
ＣＢ ユニッ ト
３３３
Route
the cable
スタンド
の
behind
the stand
裏側に配線する
ＭＴ ＣＰPCB
Ｕプリ 板
MTCPU
ク ランプする。
Clamp the cable
スキャナ側面左側
Left
side of the scanner
The smaller-gauge wire without the protective sheath should not be fixed with Tyrap.
Because the RUN No. 333 cable is optical fiber cable, the curvature R of the part of the
cable with the protective sheath (larger-gauge wire) should be 100mm or more and R of
the part without protective sheath (smaller-gauge wire) should be 12mm or more. When
routing the cable, as it is routed through behind the stand, care must be taken in fixing the
cable with Tyrap not to allow the cable to touch with the tilting scanner unit.
2－7－1
L2E-BW1444
2.2.2
Table wiring
All table cables are internally connected from the scanner.
(These cables are enclosed in the scanner and table without any external protrusion.)
Table
Base
*3(SIG.)
*1(GND.)
*2(POW.)
WT-2CN
WT-1TN
Cable cleat
1TN
R
S
Terminal mounting plate
Fig. 2.2.3 Table wiring
1.
Be careful not to apply any excessive force to the connectors or terminals when
holding the cables, since the cable cleat is mounted to be close to the connectors and
terminals.
2.
Connect the Power cable to 1TN through the ferrite core of the foot switch base.
2－8
L2E-BW1444
2.2.3
Mounting of foot switch, table electric unit cover, and table control unit
(1) Mount the foot switch base on the power distribution board at the front of the table.
(2) Fix the foot switch base by driving grip anchors (M6) on the floor.
1)
Prepare each hole of φ10.5×30 deep corresponding to the anchor hole on the floor.
2)
Drive the grip anchor (M6) into theφ10.5 hole.
3)
Fix the foot switch base to the floor by M6×30L hexagon socket head bolts with washers.
Scanner side
Power distribution
board cover
M6x30L
hexagon socket head bolt
Washer
Grip anchor（M6）
Anchor
8mm
Stand base
Be careful not to allow the foot switch base to touch the stand base or stand cover. The
clearances between the foot switch base and the stand base or stand cover are 8mm and
2mm respectively.
(3) Connect cables to the power distribution board.
(4) Connect he foot switch cable connector.
(5) Fix the cables to the foot switch base suitably.
Arrange the cables regularly on the stand base at the lower part of the gantry without
overlapping or coiling them as shown in the following figure.
(All cables are internally connected from the scanner.)
2－9
L2E-BW1444
M4x10L screw with spring and plain washer
WS-5CN
121G
Signal cable（WT-2CN）
Foot switch base
Table side
Power distribution board
120G
Power cable（WT-1TN）
(Connect through the ferrite core)
Ferrite core
Earth cable（WT-E）
Part D
Details of part D
(6) Mount the power distribution board cover to the base cover.
Foot switch cover
(7) Cover the screw hole on the side face of the table base cover with the seal (attachment of table).
Seal
2－10
L2E-BW1444
(8) Mount the table control unit to the rear of the table by using the screws mounted in advance.
Sems screw
(9) Connect cables to the table control unit and table unit.
① PCB140 PCB
16CN
② 113CN
③ 121CN
④ 128CN
⑤ 129CN
⑥ PCB140 PCB
13CN
⑦ PCB140 PCB
14CN
⑧ PCB140 PCB
17CN
2－11
L2E-BW1444
(10) Mount the rear base cover.
Base cover (rear)
Base cover (side)
Screw
2－12
L2E-BW1444
2.2.4
Image processing unit
(1) Method of removing the image processing unit covers.
1)
Remove the rear cover by removing four screws.
Rear cover
2)
Remove the top cover by removing two screws.
Top cover
2－13
L2E-BW1444
(2) Cabling work procedure
1)
Connect the external cables from the scanner unit to the image processing unit.
Connect the external cables from the rear panel of the scanner unit to connectors 56CN and 79CN.
Cleat these cables as shown by arrow view A.
2－14
L2E-BW1444
Arrow view A
Cleat the optical cable (RUN#333) with the power cable and tie lap so as not to allow its bending
radius to be less than 70mm.
Perform cleating from the Image Processing unit to the duct at intervals of about 50cm.
FR-MB4 PC board 79CN
56CN
Fix with cleat
Fix cables so that their shields are
securely attached to the fixtures
56CN
Fix with tie lap
79CN
RUN#
RUN#
333
331
To gantry unit
2－15
L2E-BW1444
(2) As shown in Diagrams (A) and (B), connect the cable to the connector on top of the image processing unit.
Following the procedure below, insert the cable into the gap on the rear of the unit to connect it as illustrated
in the diagram below (the diagram shows the top of the unit):
Figure (A)
Front
28CN
6FC
21CN
79CN
9CN
4FC
2FC
FG4
shielding part
Rear
82CN
83CN
Front
前
Figure (B)
5FC
28CN
22CN
21CN
(33CN)
6FC
4FC
2FC
79CN
9CN
40CN
83CN
FG4
shielding
part
シールド処理部
AI B
H
CJ G F
後
Rear
D
① Connect the cable ‘A’ (intercom box – 9CN) to 9CN of the unit.
At this time, be sure to fix the shielding part with a shielding metal so that it is firmly joined
(see diagram (C) or (E) on page 2-17-1).
② Pass cable ‘C’ (touch panel – 22CN) through the core (5FC), and connect it to 22CN (diagram (B)
only).
2－16
L2E-BW1444
③ Pass cable ‘D’ (monitor – 21CN) through the cores (2FC, 4FC, and 6FC), and connect it to 21CN of the
unit.
When the LCD monitor is connected, connect cable ‘D’ to 33 CN (diagram (B) only).
(4) Pass cable ‘F’ (keyboard – 83CN) through the cores (2FC, 4FC, and 6FC), and connect it to 83CN of
the unit.
(5) Pass cable ‘G’ (mouse – 40CN or 82CN) through the cores (2FC, 4FC, and 6FC), and connect it to
40CN or 82CN of the unit.
(6) Fix cable ’B’ (shielded wire from the intercom box) to FG4 with a screw.
(7) Connect cable ‘H’ (optical cable from the gantry unit) to 79CN of the unit.
(8) Fix cable ‘I’ (shielded wire from the touch panel unit) to FG4 with a screw. (diagram (B) only)
(9) Connect cable ‘J’ (ETHER (10/100Base T)) to 28CN of the unit.
(* Only when DICOM or Hyper Q-Net is used)
(3) Cleat the cables wired in (2) above as shown in diagrams (C) or (D), and (E).
(1) Make sure that each pc board in the PCB unit is firmly inserted in place.
(2) Do not bend cable ‘H’ (optical cable) at a bending radius below 70mm.
(3) If cable ‘A’ has no shielding part, cleat it as shown in diagram (D).
2－17
L2E-BW1444
Figure (C)
Front
Fix F.G cables by
using a wiring band
Shield bracket
(Mount to the shield
processing part of cable A)
Rear
A IB H
Monitor power cable
(Take it out to the rear face of IPU
from a clearance of rubber in the
same way as in other cables)
CJ G F
D
Fix cables B ~ J connected to IPU collectively
by using the cable clamp together with the monitor
power cable.
Figure (D)
Front
Fix F.G cables by
using a wiring band
Rear
Monitor power cable
AI
(Take it out to the rear face of IPU
from a clearance of rubber in the
same way as in other cables)
B
H
CJ G F
D
2－17－1
Fix cables A ~ J connected to IPU collectively
by using the cable clamp together with the monitor
power cable.
L2E-BW1444
Figure (B)
Front
Fix F and G with a
wiring band.
Shield plate
(Mount it on the shielding
part of cable ‘A’.)
Rear
Bundle the cables ‘B’ – ‘J’, monitor power
cable, touch panel signal cable, and touch
panel power cable together, and fix them while
holding them down with a metal.
Monitor power cable
(Like other cables, take it out of the
rubber gap towards the rear of the unit.)
Touch panel signal cable
Touch panel power cable
2－17－2
L2E-BW1444
(4) Magnetic disk units mounting procedure.
1)
Remove the cover of the image processing unit.
Front cover
2)
Connect the cables to the magnetic disks.
Mount the signal cable to face the label face of the connector upward (in the same way as
in the power cable).
3)
Mount the magnetic disks.
Magnetic disk units
2－18
L2E-BW1444
(5) Connect cables to the monitor.
Connect the monitor power cable and monitor signal cable to the specified connectors on the rear panel of
the monitor as illustrated below. (The following figure shows the rear panel of the monitor.)
Connect the power cable only to the monitor whose signal cable directly comes out of the rear
panel of the monitor.
Monitor power cable
Image processing unit
Monitor signal cable
2－19
L2E-BW1444
(6) Remove the cable cover on the rear of the touch panel.
Touch panel (rear view)
Hook and loop
fastener
Cable cover
(7) Connect cable to the touch panel (only in the case of diagram (A)).
As shown in the diagram below, connect touch panel signal cable and touch panel power cable to the
appropriate connectors located on the bottom of the touch panel, respectively.
Rear view of the membrane panel
Touch panel power
cable
Image
processing unit
Touch panel signal cable
2－20－1
L2E-BW1444
(8) Replace the cable cover in such a way that it closes over two signal cables.
Cable cover
Signal cable
2－20－2
L2E-BW1444
(9) Connect the power cable to the image processing unit.
1)
Fix the power cable with clamp A. In this case, fix the cable shield by the shield clamp.
2)
Connect the GND cable as illustrated below and fix it by clamp B.
Connect the GND cable securely, otherwise the image processing unit may be broken.
Shield clamp
Clamp A
Power cable
3)
RUN#
RUN#
161
061
Clamp B
GND cable
Mounting of image processing unit cover.
Mount the cover by reversing the removal work procedure.
(Turn on 1FFB.)
2－21
L2E-BW1444
Fixing of image processing unit
After turning the front casters sideways, fix them by inserting the attached caster holders.
Caster
Caster holder
2－22
L2E-BW1444
2.2.5
X-ray control unit
RUN#
100
RUN#
303
RUN#
106
107
161
131
105
RUN#
RUN#
131
161
RUN#
106
100
Fig. 2.2.4 Front view of X-ray control unit
2－23
L2E-BW1444
Power supply unit
RUN#
100
RUN#
302
RUN#
161
RUN#
131
Starter
RUN#
106
Fig. 2.2.5 Left side face of X-ray control unit
Fig. 2.2.6 Right side face of X-ray control unit
2－24
L2E-BW1444
Terminal 1TN
Power supply unit
Terminal 5TN
RUN#
100
RUN#
131
161
Fig. 2.2.7 Power supply unit
Starter
Terminal TB1
(H7,H8,H9)
RUN#
106
Fig. 2.2.8 Starter
2－25
L2E-BW1444
For cabling to the X-ray control unit, remove the front, right, and left covers, and observe the following
procedure.
(1) For the cables being connected from the front lower part of the X-ray control unit, separate
these cables from the front of the inverter unit and the front of the rectifier circuit as much as
possible for the purpose of preventing ingress of noises.
(2) Cleat Run #100 after cleating Run #131, 161, and 106.
(3) Short 2TN DI terminals if the door switch is not used, otherwise a “DOOR OPEN” error occurs.
(4) AC 100V is output to 2TN - WL terminals in the following cases.
・ The voltage is output by turning on the X-ray when No. 1 of DIP SW DSW1 of XCONT5
PCB is turned on.
・ The voltage is output by turning on the gantry power supply when No. 1 of DIP SW DSW1
of XCONT5 PCB is turned off.
For setting the mode where the AC 100V is output when turning on X-rays, don’t connect
any fluorescent lamp between WL terminals, otherwise the system does not function
normally. Connect a fluorescent lamp whose power consumption is lower than 60W.
(5) RUN#100 cable is provided with a crimp style terminal as an attachment. Terminate this
cable as occasion demands after adjusting its length.
*
Treat the shield securely.
(6) RUN #105 cable is a high-voltage transformer input side cable. It is not a high voltage cable,
but it produces noises. Separate this cable from the other cables.
A cable length change may cause X-ray output fluctuations. Fix the cable length to a range of
15m.
2－26
L2E-BW1444
2.2.6
Mounting the counter
To avoid malfunction caused by vibration during transportation, the scanner counter is shipped as
dismantled.
To install it, follow these steps:
1.
Press the separately packed counter onto the metal plate on the pc board of the X-ray control unit
and fit into it.
2.
Connect the lead wire of the counter to 501CNT cable.
Then get on a tube over the terminal so that the bare terminal is not exposed.
2－27
L2E-BW1444
2.3 Internal wiring of system
2.3.1
Wiring on scanner rotary plate
Connect the following cables after assembling the X-ray tube assembly and detector unit if these units
are delivered separately without being assembled to the system.
(1) Connect the anode and cathode high voltage cables to the X-ray tube assembly. (Remove dirt
from the high voltage cable plugs by using gauze or the like and coat them with silicon compound
before connecting these cables.)
(2) Connect X-ray tube assembly and cooler cables to terminal boards 91TN and 92TN. (See
Fig.2.3.1)
(3) Connect the oil container ⑧ and relief valve ⑨ of the X-ray tube assembly to each other by
using vent hose ⑦, and fix the hose by hose clip ⑩.
(4) Fix high voltage cables ②, ③, oil hose ⑥, and vent hose ⑦ securely by using tie laps so as not
to allow them to come outside.
(5) Turn the rotary plate clockwise (as viewed from the gantry unit front) slowly by hand, and make
sure that neither high voltage cables nor vent hose touches any other part.
Refer to 1.7 Mounting of X-ray unit and cooler.
2－28
L2E-BW1444
Front of scanner
①
②
⑪
⑫
④
92TN
Rear of scanner
91TN
⑥
③
⑤
⑨
⑧
⑩
⑦
Note : This figure shows X-ray tube assembly GS4570.
⑤ Starter cable
① X-ray tube assembly
(91TN:7, 8, 9, CS, EX)
② High voltage cable (cathode side)
⑥ Cooling oil hose
③ High voltage cable (anode side)
⑦ Vent hose
④ Cooler power cable
⑧ Oil container
(92TN:ED,E, L0, L110, H, H0)
⑨
⑩
⑪
⑫
Relief valve of X-ray tube assembly
Hose clip
Guard bracket 1
Guard plate
Fig. 2.3.1 X-ray tube assembly wiring
2－29
L2E-BW1444
2.3.2
Detector cabling work
(1) Remove the cover from the detector connector unit.
(2) Connect one slice width switching signal cable (10-signal flat ribbon cable) and 38 detector signal
cables (100 signal flexible PC board cables) between the detector and the preamplifier unit,
referring to Fig.2.3.2.
(3) Mount the cover of the detector connector.
Fig. 2.3.2 Signal connections between detector and preamplifier
2－30
80
L2E-BW1444
Section 3
ADJUSTMENT
3.1 Turning on the power supply
Check the following items before turning on the power supply
(1) Check if cable connection destinations are correct. Check if terminal screws are fastened securely.
(2) Check the insulation between each power line and the grounding point in all units.
(3) Check if PCB and connectors are securely connected.
3.2 Operation check of image processing unit in operation Unit
POWER ON
(It takes about 2 minutes after turning on the power supply)
Is the unit initialized?
(Screen display)
NO
YES
Check if PCB are inserted securely and
also cables are connected securely
Check DC power supply
Image display
NO
YES
Normal?
Is the unit
initialized?
NO
YES
Check by the
check program
OK
Fig. 3.2.1
3－1
L2E-BW1444
3.3 Operation check and adjustment of scanner unit
(1) Turning on the power supply
Open the front cover and side covers of the scanner unit to make sure that circuit breakers 21FFB , 22FFB,
31FFB are turned on (set to the upper position) and switches 21S and 22S are set to NORMAL (lower
position). When the front cover is opened, front cover limit switch 3LS is turned off. Turn on the limit
switch by using front cover limit switch jig. When front cover limit switch is detected please turn off the
scanner at once.
Refer to the enlarged view of
SWBD PCB periphery
(2)
3LS：Front cover switch
Control unit
MTCPU1 PCB
Or MTCPU2 PCB
Inverter unit
31FFB
22FFB
Left side view of scanner
21FFB
Front view of scanner
Fig. 3.3.1 Mounting layout of scanner switch and PCB
3SW Manual/Normal selector switch
14SW Manual rotation switch
15SW Manual rotation switch
4SW Emergency switch
22SW Brake free selector switch
21SW Stationary/Normal selector switch
Fig.3.3.2 Enlarged view of SWBD PCB periphery
3－2
L2E-BW1444
(2) By turning on the power switch on the scanner gantry side on the central operator console, the STATUS
indicator lamp on MTCPU1 (or MTCPU2) PCB changes since the CPU is being checked first. Then,
power is applied to the inverter. When no abnormal symptom occurs, STATUS indicator lamp LD1 lights
V-TRIG2 (Not used)
X-TRIG indicator LED/check pin
V-TRIG indicator LED/check pin
ZEBRA indicator LED/check pin
ABORT indicator LED/check pin
to be ready for receiving the communication from the operator console.
DEADMAN check pin
7
～
0
STATUS indicator LED
Fig.3.3.3 Mounting layout of indicator LED and check pins on MTCPU1 PCB
3－3
L2E-BW1444
ABORT check pin
ZEBRA check pin
V-TRIG check pin
X-TRIG check pin
7~0
STATUS display
LED
X-TRIG check pin
V-TRIG check pin
ZEBRA check pin
ABORT check pin
DEADMAN check pin
Fig.3.3.3.1 Wiring Diagram of MTCPU2 PCB Display LED and Check Pins
3－3－1
L2E-BW1444
(3) Check parameter values according to the following procedure after power supply has been applied to the
motor controller (inverter).
Change the parameter values according to the same procedure when the motor controller has been replaced
or when the values have been changed. Data 024, 025, 026, 027, 028, and 031 have been finely adjusted
by scan speed adjustment and scanner stationary position adjustment. Don’t change them, except for
readjustment. (Adjusted values remain held even after the power supply has been turned off)
*
In case of inverter type CIMR-V7AA22P2
The following figure shows the names of keys and their functions on the inverter operator panel. By
turning on the power supply, FREF lamp of handy run lamps lights. By pressing DSPL key, the lamp
indications change in the order of FREF →FOUT → IOUT → MNTR → F/R→ LO/RE → PRGM →
FREF. For running the inverter, reset the lamp to the FREF lighting condition.
Indicator
Data indicator
DIGITAL
OPERATOR
JVOP-140
Handy run lamps
Lighting of the lamps of these items moves
one by one each time DSPL key is
pressed once. Also, the upper data
display contents change correspondingly.
FREF
FOUT
F/R
IOUT
MNTR
Changes the frequency
setting continuously
LO/RE PRGM
Changes the handy run contents
DSPL
RUN
Increases constant No/ data value
DATA
ENTER
STOP
RESET
MIN
constant No. by PRGM key
MAX
Issues a run command
Enters constant data
Data are displayed after selecting
Frequency setting
control knob
Decreases constant No
/data value
Issues a run stop command
Error reset key in case of the
occurrence of an error
Status indicator lamp
(same function as in RUN lamp of main unit)
Names of handy run lamps
FREF
Frequency command
setting/monitor(green)
Parenthesized colors in ( ) indicate the lighting colors of lamps
FOUT
Output frequency
monitor (green)
Forward/reverse
selection of operator
run command (green)
IOUT
Output current monitor
(green)
MNTR
Multifunction monitor
(green)
LO/RE
Local/remote selection
(red)
PRGM
Constant No/data
(green)
Fig. 3.3.4 Inverter operator panel
3－4
L2E-BW1444
For referring to setting parameters or changing the setting, light PRGM lamp, select a parameter number
according to the following procedure, and refer to or change data. After the end, reset to FREF lighting
condition by pressing DSPL key.
Remote/local selection
Method of changing data by selecting parameter No.
LO/RE
DSPL
PRGM
Parameter No
/data
DSPL
・Setting of parameter n003 (run command selection)
PRGM
ENTER
Parameter
n003 run
command selection
PRGM
Initialization
contents [0]
operator command
PRGM
FREF
PRGM
ENTER
Setting selection [1]
Control circuit terminal
command
(Data flickers during change)
PRGM
Returns to constant
Data setting
No. display after 1 second
Don’t change to [Lo], but keep [RE] unchanged as preset at the delivery time from the works in
remote/local selection. Change it to [RE] if the initial value is set to [Lo]. If [Lo] remains set, the
scanner does not rotate even if the mode is returned to FREF mode.
Fig. 3.3.5 Inverter operation procedure
3－5
L2E-BW1444
List of inverter setting parameters (For Presto)
No.
Parameter names
Parameter Maker’s Adjusting
No（n） set values values
001
1
4
002
0
0
003
0
1
1
2
3
Constant write
Control mode selection
Run command selection
4
Frequency command selection
004
0
1
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
Reverse run disable selection
Maximum output frequency
Maximum voltage
Maximum voltage output frequency
Intermediate output frequency
Intermediate output frequency voltage
Minimum output frequency
Minimum output frequency voltage
Acceleration/deceleration time unit selection
Acceleration time 1
Deceleration time 1
Frequency command 1
Frequency command 2
Frequency command 3
Frequency command 4
Frequency command 5
Frequency command 6
Frequency command 7
Frequency command 8
Motor rated current
Multi- function input selection
Input terminal 7 function selection
Carrier frequency
DC braking current
Stall prevention function selection during
deceleration
Stall prevention operation level during
acceleration
Stall prevention operation level during run
Moor rating slip
Motor phase component resistance
Motor no-load current
Frequency command 9
006
011
012
013
014
015
016
017
018
019
020
024
025
026
027
028
029
030
031
036
051
056
080
089
0
60.0
200.0
60.0
1.5
12.0
1.5
12.0
0
10.0
10.0
6.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
8.5
2
10
3
50
1
60.0
200.0
60.0
5.0
15.0
0.1
18.0
1
5.5
5.5
53.42
42.85
28.65
21.50
14.37
10.00
0.60
0.80
7.0
9
8
13
100
092
0
1
093
170
200
094
106
107
110
120
160
2.9
0.800
35
0.00
200
2.4
1.175
52
47.61
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
Remarks
Settable up to 4: n001 ~ n179
1: Input terminals are effective
1: Frequency command 1 is
effective
1: Reverse run is disabled
1: 0.01s unit
*Note 2
*Note 2
*Note 2
*Note 2
*Note 2
*Note 3
8: Multi-stage speed command 3
13:15kHz
1: Not provided
(1) This table shows initial set values when replacing the inverter. Don’t change any parameter values
other than indicated here. Don’t change any parameter during motor rotation.
(2) Parameters n024, n025, n026, n027, and n028 are finally adjusted in case of speed check described
later.
(3) Parameter n031 is finally adjusted during stop adjustment described later.
(4) If the contents of a parameter number other than specified in the table was changed by mistake, set
parameter number n001 to 8 once. All parameter values are reset to the setting at the delivery time
from the works of the inverter maker.
3－6
L2E-BW1444
(4) Select 3SW switch to the manual side. Perform manual scan operation by pressing 14SW and 15SW
switches at the same time to make sure that the rotating part does not contact any fixed part.
(5) Perform a series of scan operation at a scan speed of 0.8sec, 1sec,1.5sec, 2sec, and 3sec in NORMAL SCAN
mode to make sure that the operation ends normally without being interrupted halfway. If the X-ray system
adjustment and check is not completed yet, perform scanning under the turn-off condition of X-rays (by
turning off 2FFB of the X-ray control unit). Perform scan once each.
(6) Check the scanner speed from the operator console after checking the manual scan operation in (4).
1)
Display the basic window by the following method.
・ Enter the maintenance mode by selecting [System/Exit] →[Maintenance] → [Maintenance Mode
ON/OFF] from the menu.
・ Select [System/Exit] →[Maintenance] → [Services]→ [Check] again from the menu.
・ By starting [Check], a message is displayed. Check its contents and click [Yes] when no problem
exists.
Check dialog
Check program window
3－7
L2E-BW1444
2)
Click a desired check time out of 0.8sec / 1.0sec, 1.5sec, 2.0 sec., and 3.0sec. from <SCANNER
SUBSYSTEM> items in <CHECK MENU> in this window, and put a check mark. After clicking a
selection item, click [Check start] button, and the check operation is started.
3)
When check ends, the required CW scan time is displayed in Check Result window. Make sure that
respective speed values conform to the specified values.
4)
If the speed does not conform to the specified values, set it to the value, whichever smaller in the
adjusting value range by adjusting the motor controller parameters according to the following table.
3－8
L2E-BW1444
Speed
Adjusting
values
0.8
1.0
1.5
2.0
3.0
0.80±0.02
1.00±0.03
1.50±0.05
2.00±0.06
3.00±0.10
Parameter names
Inverter
（V7AA22P2）
n024
n025
n026
n027
n028
As the parameter value increases, the speed value decreases.
As the parameter value decreases, the speed value increases.
(7) Adjust the parameters so that the stop position detection sensor center is closest to the striker center when
the scanner has stopped after rotating it.
If the distance between these centers is deviated from each other more than 2mm, adjust the inverter
parameter n031 every 0.05 so that the deviation between the sensor center and the striker center does not
exceed 2mm.
As n031 increases as 0.80 → 0.85 →0.90, the striker position shifts in the plus direction.
As n031 decreases as 0.80 → 0.75 →0.70, the striker position shifts in the minus direction.
If the striker does not stop at the center completely, set it to stop after being deviated toward minus direction.
If the scan rotation is started and stopped repeatedly, the motor and regenerative resistor are heated to
decrease the braking force, causing the striker position to be gradually deviated toward the plus direction.
Don’t repeat the stop operation at the sensor position more than 5 times. If it is desired to repeat the stop
operation more than 5 times, pause it for longer than 3 minutes before restarting the operation.
Striker
(-) direction
Sensor
(+) direction
Sensor mounting plate
Rear view
Fig. 3.3.6 Mounting layout of sensor and striker
3－9
L2E-BW1444
(8) Setting of interlocking buzzer tone
The buzzer tone can be turned on or off by selecting the DIP switches (DSW5 - 6 bit) on MTCPU1 PCB.
Buzzer tone ON : DSW5- bit 6 ON (standard)
Buzzer tone OFF : DSW5- bit 6 OFF
(9) 7-segment LED display selection By selecting the SW16 [rotary switch (RSW)] on SWBD PCB, the
following contents can be displayed on the 7-segment LED on SWBD PCB.
The adjustment mode may be set by selecting the rotary switch.
Set the rotary switch to [0] whenever it is not used.
RSW
Contents
Remarks
0
MCPU status display
Note 1
1
SCPU status display
Note 1
2
TCPU status display
Note 1
3
Table position display
4
Table height display
5
Tilt angle (display/adjustment)
6
Tilt speed display
7
Limit switch status display
Note 3
8
Switch status display
Note 3
9
TXR error display
Note 3
A
MFPGA Revision display
Note .5
B
TFPGA Revision display
Note .5
C
RFPGA Revision display
Note .5
D
MCPU firmware (Revision display/write mode)
Note 4
E
SCPU firmware (Revision display/write mode)
Note 4
F
TCPU firmware (Revision display/write mode)
Note 4
Note 2
Note 1: For the status contents, refer to the subsequent items.
Note 2: For the tilt angle adjusting method, refer to “Tilt angle adjustment” item.
Note 3: For details of display, refer to the subsequent items.
Note 4: For the firmware writing method, refer to the version up method item.
Note 5: These are displayed only for the system installed with the MTCPU2 PCB.
3－10
L2E-BW1444
Details of MCPU status
By setting RSW to 0, MCPU status are displayed on the 7-segment LED
The status contents are described below.
MCPU status (Displayed on LD3)
Display No.
Status contents
1
Idle status
2
Preparation for measurement in progress
3
Preparation for measurement ends
4
Measurement in progress
5
Error status
6
Emergency status
7
Check program is operating
MCPU sequence (Displayed on LD4 ~ 5)
Display No.
Sequence contents
0
Other than measurement in progress
11
Waiting for offset measurement start by warm up
12
Offset measurement is being executed by warm up
13
Waiting for normal measurement by warm up
14
Normal measurement is in progress by warm up
15
Communication status after the end of normal measurement by warm up
21
Waiting for the offset measurement start by scanogram
22
Offset measurement is being executed by scanogram
23
Table move start after the end of offset measurement by scanogram
24
Waiting for normal measurement by scanogram
25
Normal measurement is in progress by scanogrm
26
Communication status after the end of normal measurement by scanogram
31
Waiting for the offset measurement start by normal scan
32
Waiting for offset measurement/table feed end by normal scan
33
Waiting for the normal measurement start from OC by normal scan
34
Waiting for the normal measurement start from SCPU by normal scan
35
Normal measurement is being executed by normal scan
41
Waiting for offset measurement start by volume scan
42
Offset measurement is being executed by volume scan
43
Waiting for offset measurement/table operation start by volume scan
44
Waiting for normal measurement start after starting the table operation by volume scan
45
Normal measurement is being executed by volume scan
46
Communication status after the end of normal measurement by volume scan
3－11
L2E-BW1444
Details of SCPU status
By setting RSW to 1, SCPU status are displayed on the 7-segment LED.
The status contents are as described below.
LD6/7 flicker alternately to indicate that CPU is operating.
SCPU status (Displayed on LD4~ 5)
Display No.
0
4
9
16
17
18
25
30
32
80
21
22
23
24
26
27
28
29
30
39
40
48
96
97
Status contents
Measurement ready
Preliminary exposure ready
Stationary scan ready
Not ready (Tube up)
Not ready (Other than Tube up)
Not ready (Rotating)
Stationary switch ON
Manual switch ON
Brake reset switch ON
Check sequence in progress
Inverter power control relay OFF
Inverter unit power control relay OFF
Tilt power supply OFF
General-purpose inverter FFB OFF
X-ray tube overheat
Servo pack power supply OFF
Tilt power cylinder thermal relay L OFF
Tilt power cylinder thermal relay R OFF
Emergency
Tape switch ON
Scanner error (For error status, refer to the following table)
Command error
Communication error (time out)
Communication error (sum value error)
SCPU status (Displayed on LD1 ~ 2)
Display No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
Note:
Status contents
Idle status
Preparation for measurement in progress
Preparation for measurement ends
Measurement in progress
Error status
Emergency
Check in progress
Manual
When no scanner error occurs, the above values are displayed on LD1 ~ 2.
If an error occurs, the display is switched to the error status display shown in the next item.
3－12
L2E-BW1444
Error status (Displayed on LD1 ~ 2)
Display No.
8
29
30
37
67
68
69
84
87
88
89
90
Error status contents
Upside sensor miss
Time over every 90o +12%
Time shortage every 90o -12%
Collimator error operation
General-purpose inverter thermal relay OFF
General purpose inverter trip OFF
Scanner front cover open
DPRAM communication initialization error
Measurement end signal time-out error
Timer 0/4 asynchronization
Rotary panel PCB cover open
Zebra counter abnormal
Details of TCPU status
By setting RSW to 2, TCPU status are displayed on the 7-segment LED
The status contents are as described below.
Display No.
0
2
3
4
10
11
14
15
16
18
19
20
25
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
64
112
Note:
Status contents
Ready
Index sequence in progress
Tilt set sequence in progress
Measurement sequence (scano /volume) in progress
Table - direction (forward move) limit
Table + direction (backward move) limit
Operation inhibition (Measurement in progress)
Guide shot measurement in progress
Manual operation/PAT sequence in progress
Waiting for the end of index sequence
Waiting for the end of tilt set sequence
Waiting for the end of table operation during measurement sequence
STOP switch ON
Emergency
Table speed error
Servo ready time out
Servo alarm error
Servo motor stop time out
Deadman relay OFF time out
A/D conversion end time out
SPULSE cycle abnormal (±5%)
Tape switch ON
Table tabletop overrun
Angio mode
The above status are displayed on LD3 ~ 5. Flickering of [0] of LD1 shows that the CPU is
operating.
3－13
L2E-BW1444
Details of status display
By setting RSW to 7/8, the status of the limit switch (LSW) and switch (SW) being read by CPU are
displayed on the 7-sgment LED as shown below.
If inputs overlap each other, a value obtained by adding the overlapped signals is displayed.
<Display example>
If [6] is displayed on LD4 when 7 is set to RSW, table forward move deceleration LSW and table forward
move stop LSW are input.
Details of limit switch status display
RSW
Display digits
Display No.
7
LD5
1
Operation contents
Table highest digit LSW
2
Table lowest digit LSW
4
Table backward move deceleration LSW
1
Table backward move stop LSW
2
Table forward move deceleration LSW
4
Table forward move stop LSW
1
Table forward/backward overrun LSW
2
Tilt - (backward tilt) LSW
4
Tilt + (forward tilt) LSW
LD2
1
Servo alarm
LD1
1
Deadman (IPU)
2
Deadman circuit is operating
4
Delay relay is operating
LD4
LD3
Switch status display
RSW
Display digits
Display No.
8
LD5
1
LD4
LD3
LD2
LD1
Operation contents
LIGHT
SW
2
PAT
4
RESET
1
HOME SW
2
PRESET
4
TAPE SW
1
SET
2
EMG SW
4
TILT－ SW
1
TILT＋ SW
2
HISPEED SW
4
LOWFORWARD SW
1
LOWBACKWARD SW
2
TABLEDOWN SW
4
TABLEUP SW
3－14
SW
SW
SW
SW
L2E-BW1444
By setting RSW to 9, the number of data retransmittion errors if image data is displayed on the 7-segment
LED. Kinds of errors are displayed on LD1, and No. of errors is displayed on LD3 ~ LD5. (Maximum
displayable number of errors is 255 times)
TXR errors display
RSW
Display digits
Display No.
9
LD1
0
Operation contents
Number of resend errors (VN non-coincidence error)
1
Number of resend errors (LRC error)
2
Number of resend errors (start/end bit error)
3
Number of resend errors (No. of data abnormal error)
Note:
For the error contents, refer to the operation principle volume.
3－15
L2E-BW1444
(10) RXCPU･7-segment LED display selection
The following contents can be displayed by 7-segment LED on RXCPU PCB by selecting the rotary switch
(SW1/STATUS) on RXCPU PCB. Select this rotary switch as occasion demands. Set values of the
rotary switch are displayed by 7-segment LED/LED1.
0.............. CPU status (LED2, 3…ATMA status)
(LED4, 5…RCPU status)
1.............. TXS5 status
2.............. ATMA CPU status
3, 4.......... Error status
5.............. Collimator sensor status
6.............. RXCPU DIP switch (CPU1-DIP1) set value
7.............. FPGA DIP switch (CPU-DIP2/FPGA) set value
8.............. RXCPU CPU firmware version
9.............. RXCPU FPGA revision
A ............. ATMA CPU firmware version
B ............. Auxiliary heating reference data value
C ~ F....... Not used
RXCPU PCB
7-segment LED
SW1
3－16
L2E-BW1444
(11) Optical module laser output check
After confirming the rotary action, measure the optical module (hereinafter referred to as OPTM) laser
output, and make sure that the measured value conforms to the reference range.
1)
Turn off the scanner power supply.
2)
Remove the lift cover, rear cover, and cone cover of the scanner.
3)
Remove the OPTM protective cover on the rotary panel side at the position shown in the photo.
Stationary
side OPTM
Rotary panel side
OPTM and
protective cover
Stationary side
(Lower right side on the rear panel of gantry)
Rotary panel side
(Lower part of rotary panel CPU unit)
2KYSW
5LSW
Enlarged view of rotary panel
Fig. 3.3.7 OPTM position and limit switch and key switch positions
For removing the rotary panel side OPTM protective cover, remove the key switch (2KYSW) first.
After removing the cover, insert the key again, and lock it by turning it.
(Bring the OPTM cover to the lowest position by turning the rotary panel for easy work)
Caution : The black cable around the OPTM is the optical cable.
Be careful not to flaw, pinch, or bend it to be less than 30mm in radius.
4)
After removing the cover, fix the limit switch (rotary panel side 5LSW) which detects the removal of
the cover to the ON condition by using tie lap or the like.
3－17
L2E-BW1444
5)
Set the LASER TEST switch on the rotary panel side OPTM (FO6508-1) to TEST.
(The selecting direction of the switch is described on the nameplate on the side.)
LASER TEST switch
Rotary side OPTM (FO6508-1)
FO6508-1 switch position
Fig. 3.3.8 Rotary side OPTM
6)
Make sure that the TEST PHOTODIODE switch of the stationary side OPTM (FO6509-1) is set to
LOW, and select it to LOW if it is set to HIGH.
TP2CN
TP3CN
TEST
PHOTODIODE switch
Stationary side OPTM (FO6509-1)
F06509-1 switch, connector position
Fig. 3.3.9 Stationary side OPTM
(The selecting direction of the switch is described on the upper nameplate.) Prepare a circuit tester or
a measuring unit that can measure the voltage, and two crocodile clips, and connect the plus side of the
probe to TP2CN and also connect the minus side to TP3CN.
Probe minus side
Probe plus side
An example of the crocodile clip connection
3－18
L2E-BW1444
7)
Turn on the scanner power supply, and measure and record the voltage of the measuring unit connected to
the stationary side OPTM. (Caution : Don’t directly see the semiconductor laser beam after turning on the
power supply.) The value becomes about 0mV. This is an OFFSET voltage and it serves as the reference
of the voltage to be measured hereafter. Make sure that the entire FORJ on the rear side of the rotary panel
illuminates red.
8)
Remove the stationary side OPTM cover, and change the stationary side OPTM optical fiber connection
from RX connector to TEST connector. If a black protective cap is mounted to the TEST connector,
remove it before changing the connection.
OPTM cover
TEST connector
(Connected during test)
RX connector
(Normally connected)
Fig. 3.3.10 Stationary side OPTM test connector connection face
9)
Clean the FORJ groove by using alcohol and a cotton rod (Prepare alcohol. For the cleaning method, refer
to [Maintenance and Inspection] volume.)
10) Release the scanner brake. Turn the rotary panel side at a ratio of one turn/minute manually, observe the
maximum voltage and minimum voltage of the connected voltage measuring unit, and make sure that these
values are within the following range. (This voltage is called optical output.) Record the maximum value
and minimum value as reference values for periodical check.
Table 3.3.10 Optical output range
Measuring channel
Reference range
High-speed light transmission
50mV~400mV
11) After the end of measurement, reset the unit to the original condition by reversing the above procedure. Be
careful with the following items.
・ Make sure that the TEST PHOTODIODE switch of stationary OPTM is set to LOW.
・ Make sure that the fiber on the stationary OPTM is connected to RX connector.
・ Make sure that the LASER TEST switch of rotary panel side OPTM is set to RUN.
・ Remove the tie lap which fixes the limit switch (5LSW).
・ Make sure that the key switch (2KYSW) is inserted and locked by rotating to the ON side.
3－19
L2E-BW1444
3.4 Operation check of patient table and adjustment of scanner gantry tilting
(1) Vertical move of patient table
For the system installed with the MTCPU2 PCB, refer to (5).
(a) Lift the tabletop to 750 +0/-3mm above the floor level, and make sure that the height display is 000.
(b) Make sure that the patient table height is 1000±3mm above the floor and the display indicates 250
when lifting the tabletop up to 1000mm. Make sure that the lift switch LED goes out.
(c) Make sure that the patient table height is 420±3mm above the floor when the table lowers to the
lowest position. Make sure that the lowering switch LED goes out. If deviated, adjust TCB140 PCB
in the table according to the following procedure.
(d) Adjust R41 of TCB140 PCB so that the table height indication becomes 079 when the patient table
height above the floor level is 829+0/-1mm.
(e) Adjust R42 so that the table height indication becomes 250mm when the patient table height above the
floor level is 1000±3mm.
Caution 1) No display appears if the patient table is lower than 750mm above the floor level.
Mounting position of R41
of TCB140 PCB
See Fig.3.4.1
Display
decreases
R41
Display
Mounting position of R42 increases
of TCB140 PCB
See Fig.3.4.1
Display
increases
Display
decreases
Reference adjusting value
Change quantity in 180° rotation
= approx. 5mm
Reference adjusting value
Change quantity in 3 turns
= approx. 5mm
R42
Update the height indication by pressing table up/down switch momentarily after adjusting
R41/42, and check the height.
3－20
L2E-BW1444
Rear of table
Table control unit
TCB 140 PCB
DC power supply 1DPS
(lower part of PCB)
TCB140 PCB
R41
(offset adjustment)
R42
(gain adjustment)
Fig. 3.4.1 Mounting layout of component parts of patient table
3－21
L2E-BW1444
(2) Gantry tilting
(a) Set an angle gauge on the gantry.
(b) Make sure that the gantry angle indicating LED goes out at 0o gantry angle position on the angle meter
and also the tilt angle display LED becomes +25.0 and -25.0 when the gantry angle is +25o and -25o
positions respectively.
For tilting the scanner gantry before mounting the lift cover, fix the gas spring to the frame
(square pipe) with tie lap or the like, and be careful not to allow the gas spring to collide
against the scanner gantry to be broken.
(c) If the gantry angle on the angle gauge does not coincide with the value of the tilt angle indicating LED ,
perform the tilt adjustment according to the following procedure.
1.
Press RESET switch first without fail when pressing plural switches at the same time in
the following procedure.
2.
If the work was mistaken in the following procedure, continue pressing the RESET
switch until the buzzer sounds (for longer than 15 seconds) ,and then, repeat the
procedure from the beginning.
3.
When the buzzer sounds once in the following procedure, it shows that the work has
been succeeded. If it sounds three times, it shows that the work was failed.
Survey the PCB in case of the latter.
(d) Move the table to the most backward move position, and make sure that the buzzer sounds at this time.
If the buzzer does not sound, open the rear cover of the scanner, and set No. 6 of DIP switch 5 (DSW5)
of MTCPU1 (or MTCPU2) PCB to ON (1) [Buzzer warning tone ON setting].
(e) Open the small cover on the side panel of the scanner (left side as viewed from the front).
(f) Set the rotary switch (SW16) of SWBD PCB to [5 Tilt angle display].
DIP switch 5
（DSW5）
DIP switch 5
（DSW5）
Fig.3.4.2 MTCPU1 PCB
Fig.3.4.3 MTCPU2 PCB
3－22
L2E-BW1444
Rotary switch
（SW16）
Fig.3.4.4 SWBD PCB
(g) Continue pressing the RESET switch until the buzzer sounds (for longer than 15 seconds) until the
buzzer sounds. When the buzzer has sounded, release the switch, and make sure that the tilt angle
indicating LED flickers at intervals of one second.
(h) Continue pressing the tilt (+) switch and tilt (-) switch while pressing RESET switch at the same time
until the buzzer sounds (for longer than 5 seconds) until the buzzer sounds at 0o gantry angle position
on the angle gauge. When the buzzer has sounded, release the switch.
(i)
Continue pressing the tilt (+) switch while pressing RESET switch at the same time until the buzzer
sounds (for longer than 5 seconds) until the buzzer sounds at +25.0o gantry angle position on the angle
gauge. When the buzzer has sounded, release the switch.
(j)
Continue pressing the tilt (-) switch while pressing. RESET switch at the same time until the buzzer
sounds (for longer than 5 seconds) until the buzzer sounds at -25o gantry angle position on the angle
gauge. When the buzzer has sounded, release the switch.
(k) After restarting the power supply, make sure that the tilt angle indicating LED goes out at 0o position
and also the tilt angle meets the LED value at ±25o positions.
If they don’t coincide with each other, repeat the above procedure starting with step (g).
(l)
Set the rotary switch (SW16) of SWBD PCB to [0].
(m) If No. 6 of DIP switch 5 (DSW5) was changed to [ON (1)] in step (d), reset it to [OFF (0)].
(n) End
(3) Longitudinal move of tabletop
(a) Measure the time when moving the table top 300mm at high speed, and make sure that this time is
within a range of 5±0.2s. (Type CT-WT-12L, within a range of 3±0.2s)
(b) Measure the time when moving the table top 25mm at low speed, and make sure that this time is within
a range of 5±1s.
(4) Table stop position check
(a) Move the table top several times by index 10mm feed from the console side, and make sure by
indications that the table top move precisely by a set value.
(b) If the table top does not move by the set value, perform adjustment, referring to [10.2 Stop position
accuracy setting method].
3－23
L2E-BW1444
(5) Table vertical movement (the system with the MTCPU2 PCB installed)
(a) Make sure that the height indicator LED shows a value of 000 when the tabletop is set at the height
750+1/-3mm above the floor level.
(b) Make sure that when the tabletop is moved up to the height 1000mm the height above the floor level is
1000±3mm and the height indicator LED shows a value of 250.
(c) Make sure that when the tabletop is moved down to the lowest position the height is 420±3mm. Also,
make sure that the move-down switch LED goes out.
If the height is not correctly indicated, make adjustment in the following procedure.
1. The interlock for vertical movement does not function while the adjustment for table height
being made, and the movement is stopped only with the limit switch.
The interlock for tilt movement does not accurately function. Therefore, full care must be
exercised in carrying out the adjustment.
2. When more than one button are simultaneously pressed in the following steps, be sure to
press the PRESET button first.
3. If the work is incorrectly done in the following steps, after pressing and holding down the
PRESET button until the buzzer sounds (more than 15sec.) with the rotary switch (SW16)
on the SWBD PCB set to [4], retry the steps from the beginning.
4. The buzzer sounding one beep means successful work in the following steps, while three
beeps means unsuccessful work. If the buzzer sounds three beeps, the PCB must be
checked.
(d) Move back the table to the backmost position, and make sure that the buzzer sounds at this position. If
the buzzer does not sound, open the rear cover of the scanner unit, and set No. 6 of the dip switch 5
(DSW5) on the MTCPU2 to [ON(1): “Buzzer warning sound set to ON”].
(e) Open the small cover of the side cover of the scanner unit (left side in view from the front).
(f) Set the rotary switch (SW16) on the SWBD PCB to [4: “Table height display”].
(g) Press and hold down the RESET button until the buzzer sounds (more than 15sec.).
When the buzzer sounds, release the button, and make sure that the table height indicator LED flashes
at [999].
(h) At the table height 745mm above the floor level measured with a scale, as pressing and holding down
the RESET button press and hold down the move-down switch all the two buttons together until the
buzzer sounds (more than 5 sec.). When the buzzer sounds, release the buttons.
(i)
At the table height 829mm above the floor level measured with a scale, as pressing and holding down
the RESET button press and hold down the move-up button and move-down button all the three buttons
together until the buzzer sounds (more than 5 sec.). When the buzzer sounds, release the buttons.
(j)
At the table height 1005mm above the floor level measured with a scale, as pressing and holding down
the RESET button press and hold the move-up switch all the two buttons together until the buzzer
sounds (more than 5 sec.). When the buzzer sounds, release the buttons.
3－23－1
L2E-BW1444
(k) After the system power is turned on again, make sure that the table height indicator LED does not flash
and the table height indicator LED shows 0 and 250 respectively at the table height 750+1/-3mm and
1000±3mm measured with a scale.
※ If the measured table height and LED indicator height do not agree, after pressing and holding down the
RESET button until the buzzer sounds (more than 15 sec), retry the steps from (4).
(l)
Set the rotary switch (SW16) on the SWBD PCB to [0].
(m) If No. 6 of the dip switch 5 (DSW5) was changed to [ON(1)] in the step (3), reset it to [OFF(0)] and
finish the work.
3－23－2
L2E-BW1444
3.5 Laser marker adjustment
Fig. 3.5.1 shows the mounting layout of the laser makers.
Fig.3.5.4 ~ Fig.3.5.7 show the mounting method of each laser marker.
Mount the laser marker adjusting jig to the rotary plate and adjust the laser marker beam to meet the black line of
the jig.
Laser marker (3)
(Patient positioning)
Laser marker (1)
(slice side)
Laser marker (4)
(median line)
Laser marker (2)
(Scan center height)
Adjusting jig
Fig.3.5.1
Black line A
Black line C
Black line B
4-M6×25L
Hexagon socket head bolt
Black line D
Fig.3.5.2
Basic method of using the adjusting jig ... Common to each laser marker
(i)
Coincide the laser marker beam with the black line on
Black line of
rear plate
the front plate (plate close to the laser marker in case
of the right laser marker).
(ii) Coincide the beam passing through the front plate
hole with the black line of the rear plate.
Black line of
front plate
Laser beam
passing hole
of front plate
Fig. 3.5.3
3－24
L2E-BW1444
(1) Laser marker ① adjustment
This laser marker projects the slice face.
Coincide the laser marker beam with black line A shown in Fig.3.5.2 by moving the laser marker after
loosening the screws shown in Fig.3.5.4. Coincide the beam passing the hole with the black line of the rear
plate.
M4 hexagon socket head screw
These screws are used for largely
rotating the laser marker itself.
Don’t adjust these screws normally,
but keep them fixed.
M4 pan head screw
Laser marker
M4 pan head screw
Set to
36mm
Bracket
Fig. 3.5.4
(2) Laser marker ② adjustment
This laser marker projects the horizontal line showing the scan center height.
Coincide the laser marker beam with black line B shown in Fig.3.5.2 by moving the laser marker after
loosening the screws shown in Fig.3.5.5. Coincide the beam passing the hole with the black line of the rear
plate.
M4 pan head screw
M4 hexagon socket head screw
These screws are used for largely
rotating the laser marker itself.
Don’t adjust these screws normally,
but keep them fixed.
M4 pan head screw
Laser marker
Set to
36mm
Bracket
Fig. 3.5.5
3－25
L2E-BW1444
(3) Laser marker ③ adjustment
This laser marker projects the beam perpendicular to the patient body axis.
Coincide the laser marker beam with black line D shown in Fig.3.5.2 by moving the laser marker after
loosening the screws shown in Fig.3.5.6. Coincide the beam passing the hole with the black line of the
lower plate.
M4 pan head screw
M4 hexagon socket head screw
These screws are used for largely
rotating the laser marker itself.
Don’t adjust these screws normally,
but keep them fixed.
M4 pan head screw
Laser marker
Fig. 3.5.6
Set to
36mm
Bracket
(4) Laser marker ④ adjustment when the system is provided with a tube shift device.
This laser marker projects the median line.
Coincide the laser marker beam with black line C shown in Fig.3.5.2 by moving the laser marker after
loosening the screws shown in Fig.3.5.7. Coincide the beam passing the hole with the black line of the
lower plate.
M4 pan head screw
M4 hexagon socket head screw
These screws are used for largely
rotating the laser marker itself.
Don’t adjust these screws normally,
but keep them fixed.
M4 pan head
screw
Laser marker
Set to
36mm
Bracket
Fig. 3.5.7
3－26
L2E-BW1444
3.6 Adjustment of X-ray system
3.6.1
X-ray tube assembly check
Check the following operation.
(1) The cooler fan is rotating.
(2) The cooler pump operates and coolant is circulating.
3.6.2
Anode rotation drive unit (starter) adjustment.
Connect a digital voltmeter across H7 and H9 of terminals TB1 of the built-in starter of the X-ray
control unit. Turn off 2FFB of the X-ray control unit.
Select
Scan
or
Scanogram
in the measuring main menu on the operation panel, and also select
120kV, 200mA, slice thickness 1.25mm×4, 2-second scan on the operator console, and press
Confirm .
As a result of this operation, the anode rotation drive unit operates in the following
sequence. Perform the adjustment and check as shown in the following table.
Start
Normal run
Note : Approx. 290 seconds
Braking
Fig. 3.6.1
In this system, this time is set to starter unit time plus 40 seconds on the CPU side.
(Hold on time 250 seconds)
3－27
L2E-BW1444
X-ray tube GS3070 (3.5MHU)
Table 3.6.1 Low speed mode
Items
Adjusting value
Adjusting position (CPU CONT PCB)
Normal voltage
＋10
230 －0 Vac rms
＋0.5
12 －0 sec.
＋5
88 －0 Vac rms
4RSW
Anode rotation speed
2700 rotations/min. or over
―――
Braking voltage
90±5Vdc
5RSW
Braking time
12.7±0.5sec.
14VR
Hold on time
250±1sec.
12VR
Start voltage
Start time
16VR
10VR
Select 120kV, 175mA, 0.75mm×2 slice, 2-second scan on the operator console, and press
Confirm .
As a result of this operation, the anode rotation drive unit operates according to the following sequence.
Perform adjustment and check according to the following table.
Table 3.6.2 High speed mode
Items
Adjusting value
Adjusting position (CPU CONT PCB)
Normal voltage
＋10
470 －0 Vac rms
＋0.5
12 －0 sec.
＋5
168 －0 Vac rms
2RSW
Anode rotation speed
8000 rotations/min. or over
―――
Braking voltage
135±5Vdc
3RSW
Braking time
12.7±0.5sec.
13VR
Hold on time
250±1sec.
11VR
Start voltage
Start time
15VR
9VR
3－28
L2E-BW1444
X-ray tube GS4570 (5MHU)
Table 3.6.3 Low speed mode
Items
Adjusting value
Adjusting position (CPU CONT PCB)
Normal voltage
＋10
244 －0 Vac
＋0.5
12 －0 sec.
＋5
104 －0 Vac
Anode rotation speed
3000 rotations/min. or over
Braking voltage
100 －0 Vdc
5RSW
Braking time
12.7±0.5sec.
14VR
Hold on time
250±1sec.
12VR
Start voltage
Start time
rms
16VR
10VR
rms
4RSW
―――
＋10
Select 120kV, 175mA, 0.75mm×2 slice, 2-second scan on the operator console, and press
Confirm .
As a result of this operation, the anode rotation drive unit operates according to the following sequence.
Perform adjustment and check according to the following table.
Table 3.6.4 High speed mode
Items
Adjusting value
Adjusting position (CPU CONT PCB)
Normal voltage
＋10
470 －0 Vac rms
＋0.5
12 －0 sec.
＋5
150 －0 Vac rms
2RSW
Anode rotation speed
6000 rotations/min. or over
―――
Braking voltage
＋10
135 －0
3RSW
Braking time
12.7±0.5sec.
13VR
Hold on time
250±1sec.
11VR
Start voltage
Start time
15VR
9VR
Vdc
3－29
L2E-BW1444
(1) Output voltage adjustment (CPU CONT PCB)
(1) For adjusting VR and VSW, check the symbols sufficiently so as not to mistake them.
Refer to the figure (Mounting positions of VR and RSW on CPU CONT PC board).
(2) Connect a true RMS meter across H7 and H9 securely and measure the output voltage.
(3) An accurate value is not always be displayed in auto mode depending upon the digital
voltmeter types. Select the manual mode for measurement.
(4) Adjust VR and RSW while turning them bit by bit. VR can be adjusted continuously, but
RSW changes stepwise form 0 to F.
(5) The start voltage cannot be adjusted in real time during starting. After adjusting VR first
and starting, check the output voltage. Starting must be done about 3 times until the
feedback control is stabilized. Accordingly, check the output voltage after starting three
times.
(6) The steady-state voltage and braking voltage can be adjusted in real time. However,
since the output voltage changes stepwise, set RSW to the position where is the closest to
the specification.
(7) Select the correct drive frequency.
For details, refer to 3.6.2.1 and subsequent
paragraphs.
(8) Start the starter once more after braking, and check the anode rotation and braking by
applying your hand to the X-ray tube container.
Use the following true RMS digital voltmeter for the starter combined with 5Mhu
・ FLUKE87
・ FLUKE179
・ TR6845 ADVANTEST
3－30
L2E-BW1444
3.6.2.1
Starter CPU-CONT PCB adjusting method
CPU-CONT PC board (in anode rotation drive unit)
Fig. 3.6.2 Entire CPU-CONT PC board
High speed braking
voltage adjustment
Low speed normal
voltage adjustment
Low speed braking
voltage adjustment
High-speed normal
voltage adjustment
Numeric display LED
1RSW display
setting change
Low speed braking time
adjustment
Low speed starting
voltage adjustment
Low speed
hold ON time
adjustment
High speed hold ON
time adjustment
Low speed starting
time adjustment
High speed braking time
adjustment
High speed starting
voltage adjustment
High speed starting
time adjustment
Fig. 3.6.3 Adjusting points of CPU-CONT PC board
3－31
L2E-BW1444
3.6.2.2
Adjustment of control knobs on PC board and dial time
(VR adjustment while checking the LED display)
Set IRSW (16-position code switch) on CPU CONT PC board to the position corresponding to the time
to be adjusted, and display the set time. Adjust each time, referring to the following table. Set the
starter to the idle state.
IRSW
position
0
*
Contents of numerical
display LED
Control
knob
Standby state
Numeric LED
display
Setting method
-
-
Set an actual adjusting value
1
High speed starting time
9VR
1H☆☆☆
2
High speed hold ON time
11VR
2H☆☆☆
Set steady-state rotation time - 40 sec.
3
High speed braking time
13VR
3H☆☆☆
Set an actual adjusting value
4
Low speed starting time
10VR
4L☆☆☆
Set an actual adjusting value
5
Low speed hold ON time
12VR
5L☆☆☆
Set steady-state rotation time - 40 sec.
6
Low speed braking time
14VR
6L☆☆☆
Set an actual adjusting value
For the hold ON time, ROM of the PC board has 40 seconds as its fixed value. Accordingly, the
set value becomes 290 seconds (total) - 40 seconds (ROM) = 250 seconds when it is desired to set
the normal rotation time to 290 seconds.
3.6.2.3
*
☆☆☆ becomes an adjusting value (a desired adjusting time is displayed).
*
IRSW 7 ~ F positions are used for adjustment in the works.
*
After the end of adjustment, reset IRSW to the 0 position.
Voltage adjustment (Measure H7-H9 voltage by a true RMS meter)
Voltage setting
Mode
Adjusting
VR, RSW
High speed starting voltage
AC
15VR
Display does not change in real time.
High speed normal voltage
AC
2RSW
Adjustable while monitoring the display.
High speed braking voltage
DC
3RSW
Adjustable while monitoring the display.
(Check the voltage in DC mode)
Low speed starting voltage
AC
16VR
Display does not change in real time.
Low speed normal voltage
AC
4RSW
Adjustable while monitoring the display.
Low speed braking voltage
DC
5RSW
Adjustable while monitoring the display.
(Check the voltage in DC mode)
3－32
Remarks
L2E-BW1444
3.6.2.4
No.
1
CPU-CONT PC board adjustment
Adjustment and check
Low speed starting time check and
adjustment
Adjusting value
As specified in adjustment
instruction
Adjusting
VR, RSW
Measuring point
mode
10VR
1RSW – 4
2
Low speed hold ON time change
0
12VR
1RSW – 5
3
Low speed braking time As specified in
adjustment instruction
Low speed starting voltage
adjustment and check
14VR
1RSW – 6
As specified in adjustment instruction
Low speed starting voltage
adjustment and check
16VR
H7-H9 AC voltage
①
②
③
④
4
⑤
⑥
⑦
⑧
Remarks
For shortening the adjusting time
Caution
Select 120kV, 200mA, 1.25mm x 4 slice, 2-sec scan and press Confirm .
Record H7-H9 voltage while observing it. Don’t touch 16VR. Proceed to the next item if no adjustment is necessary.
Change 16VT by one scale division if voltage adjustment is necessary.
Normal voltage turns off in 40 seconds at present After confirming that the braking voltage ends, select 120kV, 200mA, 1.25mm x 4
slice, 2-sec scan and press Confirm .
Record H7-H9 voltage while observing it. Don’t touch 16VR. Proceed to the next item if no adjustment is necessary.
Check a difference between the first starting voltage and the present starting voltage. Decide the next adjusting quantity by comparing
the change quantity of one scale division of 16VR with the starting voltage change quantity, and change the adjusting quantity.
Normal voltage turns off in 40 seconds at present. After confirming that the braking voltage ends, select 120kV, 200mA, 1.25mm x 4
slice, 2-sec scan and press Confirm .
Repeat steps ⑤~⑦ and terminate the adjustment.
5
Low voltage normal voltage adjustment
and check
As specified in adjustment
instruction
4RSW
H7-H9 AC voltage
6
Low speed braking voltage adjustment
and check
As specified in adjustment
instruction
5RSW
H7-H9 DC voltage
7
Low speed starting voltage adjustment
and check
As specified in adjustment
instruction
16VR
H7-H9 AC voltage
Caution
8
Low speed hold ON time setting
As specified in adjustment
instruction
12VR
1RSW – 5
Normal rotation time - 40
seconds
9
High speed starting time check and
adjustment
As specified in adjustment
instruction
9VR
1RSW – 1
10 High speed hold ON time change
0
11VR
1RSW – 2
11 High speed braking time
As specified in adjustment
instruction
13VR
1RSW – 3
As specified in adjustment
instruction
15VR
H7-H9 AC voltage
High speed starting voltage adjustment
and check
①
②
③
④
12
⑤
⑥
⑦
⑧
For shortening the adjusting time
Caution
Select 120kV, 175mA, 0.75mm x 2 slice, 2-sec scan and press Confirm .
Record H7-H9 voltage while observing it. Don’t touch 15VR. Proceed to the next item if no adjustment is necessary.
Change 15VR by one scale division if voltage adjustment is necessary.
Normal voltage turns off in 40 seconds at present. After confirming that the braking voltage ends, select 120kV, 175mA, 0.75mm x 2
slice, 2-sec scan and press Confirm .
Record H7-H9 voltage while observing it. Don’t touch 15VR. Proceed to the next item if no adjustment is necessary.
Check a difference between the first starting voltage and the present starting voltage. Decide the next adjusting quantity by comparing
the change quantity of one scale division of 15VR with the starting voltage change quantity, and change the adjusting quantity.
Normal voltage turns off in 40 seconds at present. After confirming that the braking voltage ends, select 120kV, 175mA, 0.75mm x 2
slice, 2-sec scan and press Confirm .
Repeat steps ⑤~⑦ and terminate the adjustment.
13 High voltage normal voltage adjustment
and check
As specified in adjustment
instruction
2RSW
H7-H9 AC voltage
14 High peed braking voltage adjustment and
check
As specified in adjustment
instruction
3RSW
H7-H9 DC voltage
15 High speed starting voltage adjustment and As specified in adjustment
check
instruction
15VR
H7-H9 AC voltage
Caution
16 High speed hold ON time setting
As specified in adjustment
instruction
11VR
1RSW – 2
Normal rotation time - 40
seconds
17 Measurement of each setting time
As specified in adjustment
instruction
Stop watch
Measure
3－33
L2E-BW1444
3 4 5 6
B
C D
E
F 0 1 2
7 8 9 A
1DSW
1 2 3 4
1RSW
3RSW
5RSW
2RSW
4RSW
Numerical LED
CPU CONT PC board
Fig. 3.6.4
3.6.2.5
Status display of anode rotation drive unit
(a)
is displayed in numeric LED under an idle condition.
(b)
is displayed in numeric LED in low speed starting mode.
(c)
is displayed in numeric LED in high speed starting mode.
(d)
is displayed in numeric LED in the low speed normal run mode.
(e)
is displayed in numeric LED in the high speed normal run mode.
(f)
is displayed in numeric LED in the low speed braking mode.
(g)
is displayed in numeric LED in the high speed braking mode.
3－34
L2E-BW1444
3.6.3
Adjustment of mA waveform and checking of kVmA
The following check must be carried out in stationary scan mode.
Connect CH1 of the oscilloscope probe to TP4 (coordinates:1D) on the RTC board of the scanner rotor
plate. Connect CH2 of the probe to TP10 (coordinates:1F) of the RTC board. Connect GND of the
probe to GND terminal of the board (at coordinates:6A) (to avoid radiation exposure, be sure to use an
oscilloscope which has STORAGE mode).
Set the mode, time range, and voltage range of the oscilloscope to CHOP mode, 20[ms]/div, and
CH1:2V/div and CH2:1V/div, respectively. Through the operation on the central operator console,
perform X-ray irradiation and check the waveform as shown in the diagrams below.
Adjustment criteria using waveform (with RSW9):
Make sure that the time from kV rise to steady mA waveform (at [A]) be adjusted close to within 30
[ms], using the following waveforms as targets.
It is absolutely necessary to avoid rise overshoot (otherwise the tube is liable to be damaged).
RSW for adjustment (common to large and small focuses):
RSWs (shown below) are mounted on RXCPU-1 board: RSW8 (for steady-state value adjustment)
on front left and RSW9 (for rise adjustment) on front right. Be sure not to mess up.
Ｓ Ｗ８ ： ｍＡ－Ｔ Ｂ Ｌ Ｅ
０ ： ±０
１ －７ ： ＋３ ｍＡ／ｂ ｉ ｔ
Ｆ －８ ： －３ ｍＡ／ｂ ｉ ｔ
SW9 position
Waveform
Ｓ Ｗ９ ： ｍＡ－Ｍａ ｃ ３ １
０ ： ±０
１ －７ ： ＋１ ０ ｍＡ／ｂ ｉ ｔ
Ｆ －８ ： －１ ０ ｍＡ／ｂ ｉ ｔ
8 9 A B C D E F 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 ７
Undershoot ・・・・・・・・・・・・Overshoot
Fig. 3.5.5.1 RSW for adjustment
(1) Perform stationary scan in maintenance scan of four 1.25mm slices at 120kV and 200mA for two
seconds, and refer to the diagrams below to make adjustment.
(1) : Basic waveform
(2) : 1-bit lowered
(3) : NG waveform
Fig.3.5.5.2 Example of adjustment of large focus waveform
3－35
L2E-BW1444
(2) Like (1) above, perform stationary scan of two 0.75mm slices at 120kV and 150mA for two seconds
to check that the waveform is as shown in Fig. 3.5.5.3.
(1) : Basic waveform
(2) : 1-bit lowered
(3) : NG waveform
Fig.3.5.5.3 Example of adjustment of small focus waveform
If overshoot is observed also in small focus, lower SW9 by one bit and check the small focus
waveform again whether it is as shown in Fig. 5.1. If overshoot is still observed, lower SW9 by
another one bit to check if the waveform is as shown in Fig. 3.1.
Combination of large and small focuses:
In adjustments (1) and (2) above, set RSW so that either of these focuses will not make overshoot.
Where any one of these focuses makes waveform with overshoot, it may cause the tube to be
damaged.
(3) kV and mA adjustment
In all combinations of kV and mA that are capable of irradiating X-ray, check that tube voltage and
tube current fall within the following range:
kV : ±7％
mA : ±10％
3－36
L2E-BW1444
3.6.4
X-ray tube aging
Perform the X-ray tube aging according to the following procedure.
1.
In case of GS3070 (3.5 MHU )
(1) Perform scanning under the following conditions.
Perform serial scan 19 times under the conditions of 100kV, 250mA, 1.25mm x 4 slice, and
3.0 sec. scan at 10 seconds internal without scanning.
(2) Wait for 30 seconds without scanning.
(3) Perform scanning 11 times under the X-ray conditions specified in (1) at 35 seconds interval
without scanning.
(4) Wait for 30 minutes without scanning while keeping the power supply turned on.
(5) Perform scanning under the following conditions.
Perform serial scan 4 times under the conditions of 120kV, 250mA, 1.25mm x 4 slice, and
2.0 sec. scan at 10 seconds interval without scanning.
(6) Wait for 30 seconds without scanning.
(7) Perform scanning under the following conditions.
Perform serial scan 4 times under the conditions of 130kV, 250mA, 1.25mm x 4 slice, and
2.0 sec. scan at 10 seconds interval without scanning.
(8) Wait for 30 seconds without scanning.
(9) Perform scanning under the following conditions.
Perform serial scan 4 times under the conditions of 100kV, 150mA, 0.75mm x 2 slice, and 2.0
sec. scan at 10 seconds interval without scanning.
(10) Wait for 30 seconds without scanning.
(11) Perform scanning under the following conditions.
Perform serial scan 4 times under the conditions of 120kV, 150mA, 0.75mm x 2 slice, and
2.0 sec. scan at 10 seconds interval without scanning.
(12) Wait for 30 seconds without scanning.
(13) Perform scanning under the following conditions.
Perform serial scan 4 times under the conditions of 130kV, 150mA, 0.75mm x 2 slice, and
2.0 sec. scan at 10 seconds interval without scanning.
(14) Wait for 30 seconds without scanning.
3－37
L2E-BW1444
2.
In case of GS4570 (5 MHU )
(1) Perform scanning under the following conditions.
Perform serial scan 22 times under the conditions of 100kV, 250mA, 1.25mm x 4 slice, and
3.0 sec. scan at 5 seconds internal without scanning.
(2) Wait for 30 seconds without scanning.
(3) Perform scanning 8 times under the X-ray conditions specified in (1) at 30 seconds interval
without scanning.
(4) Wait for 30 minutes without scanning while keeping the power supply turned on.
(5) Perform scanning under the following conditions.
Perform serial scan 4 times under the conditions of 120kV, 250mA, 1.25mm x 4 slice, and
2.0 sec. scan at 10 seconds interval without scanning.
(6) Wait for 30 seconds without scanning.
(7) Perform scanning under the following conditions.
Perform serial scan 4 times under the conditions of 130kV, 250mA, 1.25mm x 4 slice, and
2.0 sec. scan at 10 seconds interval without scanning.
(8) Wait for 30 seconds without scanning.
(9) Perform scanning under the following conditions.
Perform serial scan 4 times under the conditions of 100kV, 150mA, 0.75mm x 2 slice, and
2.0 sec. scan at 10 seconds interval without scanning.
(10) Wait for 30 seconds without scanning..
(11) Perform scanning under the following conditions.
Perform serial scan 4 times under the conditions of 120kV, 150mA, 0.75mm x 2 slice, and
2.0 sec. scan at 10 seconds interval without scanning.
(12) Wait for 30 seconds without scanning.
(13) Perform scanning under the following conditions.
Perform serial scan 4 times under the conditions of 130kV, 150mA, 0.75mm x 2 slice, and
2.0 sec. scan at 10 seconds interval without scanning.
(14) Wait for 30 seconds without scanning.
3－38
L2E-BW1444
3.6.5
Pre-Heating Parameter of RTC Board
After installation and adjustment, this parameter should be checked when:
(1) The RTC board is replaced with an RTC (B/1 or later); (in this case follow steps from 1
below), and/or
(2) X-4A/4C error occurs sporadically;
(in this case check the parameter first, then carry out adjustment 3 or 4)
For ordinary installation other than the above cases, no particular adjustment is required.
To carry out the following adjustment, be sure that HU = 20[%]or less.
10 to 20 minutes after turning on the power, check the parameter value, displayed when the RSW
of RXCPU-1 is set to ‘b’, to see if the value falls within 5A-60. If it does not, carry out the
following adjustment:
1. Where the 7-segment LED of RXCPU-1 indicates “2B”
Turn off the power, rotate VR16 counterclockwise by three to five turns, and then turn on
the power again.
If the LED still indicates “2B”, repeat rotating VR16 counterclockwise by further three to
five turns.
After making sure that LD8 (yellow) is blinking, carry out adjustment 3 or 4..
2. Where the 7-segment LED of RXCPU-1 indicates “24”
Turn off the power, rotate VR16 clockwise by three to five turns, and then turn on the power
again.
If the LED still indicates “X-24”, repeat rotating VR16 clockwise by further three to five
turns.
After making sure that LD8 (yellow) is blinking, carry out adjustment 3 or 4..
3. Where the figure of the 7-segment LED is decreasing while LD8 is blinking (be careful not to
rotate VR16 excessively)
The figure of the 7-segment LED will not change when VR is rotated by one to 1.5 turns.
Further turns will make the 7-segment LED change slightly. Do not attempt to rotate it
impatiently.
With the power being as it is, turn VR16 clockwise until the 7-segment LED indicates
“5A-60”. If it indicates “X-2B” in the course of adjustment, turn the power on again, and
continue to make the above-mentioned adjustment..
4. Where the figure of the 7-segment LED is increasing while LD8 is blinking (be careful not to
rotate VR16 excessively)
The figure of the 7-segment LED will not change when VR is rotated by one to 1.5 turns.
Further turns will make the 7-segment LED change slightly. Do not attempt to rotate it
impatiently.
While observing the 7-segment LED,
(1) If the figure exceeds “60”, turn VR16 counterclockwise to adjust the figure until it becomes
“5A-60”.
(2) If the figure stops increasing at “5A”, turn VR16 clockwise to adjust the figure until it becomes
“5A-60”.
(3) If the figure indicates “5A-60”, no adjustment is needed.
If the figure indicates “X-2B” during adjustment, turn on the power again, and continue the
above-mentioned adjustment.
3－39
L2E-BW1444
3.7 Adjustment of X-ray field
3.7.1
Adjustment in X-axis direction
(1) Loosen M8 hexagon socket head bolts ①.
(2) Loosen nuts ②.
(3) Adjust the X-axis direction position of X-ray tube by using bolts 3A 3B .
(For this adjustment, mount a dial gauge as shown in the following figure, and check the moving
quantity of the X-ray tube. Remove the dial gauge after adjustment)
(4) Fasten four M8 hexagon socket bolts ①.
(5) Tighten nuts ② to lock bolts 3A 3B securely.
M8 hexagon socket head bolt ①
Nut ②
R direction
A
X direction
Fig. 3.7.1 Positioning of X-ray tube assembly
Dial gauge
M8 hexagon socket
head bolt (1)
Bolt 3B (for pulling)
Bolt 3A (for pushing)
Fig. 3.7.2 Enlarged view of part A
3－40
L2E-BW1444
3.7.2
R-direction adjustment (Common to each X-ray tube assembly)
(1) Loosen four M8 hexagon socket head bolts ⑤ [or six M6 hexagon socket head bolts in case of
5MHU] and remove the retaining band ④.
(2) Remove four M8 hexagon socket head bolts ⑥, and remove X-ray tube clamp ⑦.
(3) Align the center mark line of the X-ray tube housing with the end face of the X-ray tube holder
exactly.
(4) Fasten the X-ray tube clamp ⑦, and then, fasten four M8 hexagon socket head bolts ⑥.
Fastening torque 1960N-cm (200kg-cm).
(5) After mounting the retaining band ④, fasten four M8 hexagon socket head bolts ⑤ [or six M6
hexagon socket head bolts in case of 5MHU].
Retaining band ④
X-ray tube clamp ⑦
M8 hexagon socket
head bolt ⑥
M8 hexagon socket
head bolt ⑤
Fig.3.7.3
Fig.3.7.4
3－41
L2E-BW1444
3.7.3
Normal condition of X-ray tube
Certain adjustment work of the system must be done under the stable condition of the elongation of the
anode axis of the X-ray tube. In this manual, the stable condition of the elongation of the anode axis
of X-ray tube is called normal condition. For setting the X-ray tube to be normal condition, the X-ray
tube must be cooled down suitably after heating it sufficiently. Warm it up according to 3.1.4.3 and
interrupt it just before starting the air calibration to set the accumulated heat quantity of the anode to be
43 ~58%. This condition is called normal condition. This normal condition must be maintained in
3.7.5 and 3.12.
If the normal condition is already maintained, it is not necessary to repeat the warm up in the
adjustment work requiring the [normal condition].
3－42
L2E-BW1444
3.7.4
X-ray beam exposure field adjustment (slice thickness direction)
(1) Stop the focus shift detector control by turning off SW10 of RXCPU PCB (LD26 (FSD_ON) goes
out).
SW6
BACK
LED15
SW7
MOVE
LED17
FRWD
LED16
FSD_ON
LED26
SW10
（RXCPU PCB）
Goes out
OFF
SW10
: Focus shift detector ON/OFF selector toggle switch
LED26 (FSD_ON) : Lights when the focus shift detector turns on.
SW6
: Press this switch when moving the X-ray tube toward the rear of the gantry.
SW7
: Press this switch when moving the X-ray tube toward the front of the gantry.
LED15 (BCK)
: Lights when pressing SW6
LED16 (FWRD)
: Lights when pressing SW7
LD17 (MOVE)
: Lights when the X-ray tube moves
(2) Set the X-ray tube to the normal condition. Keep the X-ray tube under normal condition hereafter
by using the [stationary scan] as occasion demand during the X-ray beam exposure position
adjustment in the slice thickness direction.
The anode accumulated heat quantity increases when executing 100kV, 200mA, 3-second scan.
Anode accumulated heat quantity increases about 3% in case of 3.5MHU X-ray tube
Anode accumulated heat quantity increases about 2% in case of 5MHU X-ray tube
3－43
L2E-BW1444
(3) Set the switch 21SW at the front right of the scanner unit to the STATIONARY SCAN side so that
the scanner does not rotate (See Fig.3.7.5).
Front view of scanner
Fig. 3.7.5 Stationary method of scanner
(5) Apply the beam adjusting jig ① to beam adjusting jig collision plate ② (See Fig.3.7.6). The
1mm groove of beam adjusting jig ① serves as the normal X-ray beam center.
(6) Set the film ③ to be caught between the detector and beam adjusting jig ①.
(7) Select the maintenance scan out of the main menu on the operation panel.
(If the maintenance scan is not displayed, display it according to 5.1.1).
(7.1) Set the following conditions and press
Items
No. of scans
Table index (mm)
Gantry angle (°)
Tube current (mA)
Tube voltage (kV)
Scan time (s)
Collimation (mm)
Stationary scan
Other items
Confirm
switch.
Set values
1
0
0
50
100
1
1.25mm×4slice
ON
Any
3－44
L2E-BW1444
(7.2)
START
Press
switch flickers when the system has been set to be ready for measurement.
START
switch.
(7.3) After the end of stationary scan, develop the film.
(8) Measure the deviation between the narrow X-ray tube part and the broad X-ray tube part. The move
quantity of the X-ray tube corresponds to about 40% of the above quantity. Move the X-ray tube backward
by pressing SW6 of RXCPU PCB if the narrow X-ray tube part is displaced toward the front of gantry unit.
Move the X-ray tube forward by pressing SW7 if the narrow x-ray tube part is displaced toward the rear of
gantry tube. Repeat steps (2) ~ (5) until the deviation between the narrow X-ray tube part and the broad
X-ray tube part becomes within 0.5mm.
(9) After the end of adjustment, perform (9.1) ~ (9.2)
(9.1) Reset switch 21SW changed in (4) above to NORMAL. (See Fig.3.7.5)
(9.2) Turn off No.1 of 3SW of FSD PC board.
If the X-ray beam exposure position was adjusted in the system having the focus move
detector, the adjustment (3.12) about the focus move detector must be done even if the other
adjustment is not necessary.
3－45
L2E-BW1444
②
③
①
①
③
②
Detector
Detector
Broad X-ray part
Narrow X-ray part
Photosensitive film
Less than 0.5mm
① Beam adjusting jig
② Beam adjusting jig collision plate
③ Film
Fig. 3.7.6 X-ray beam adjustment
3－46
L2E-BW1444
3.8 Preamplifier check
3.8.1
Bus line check
Execute the bus-line check of the check program referring to the bus line check method in 5.8.2 (1).
In the bus-line check, whether data bus line between the preamplifier and the image processor is normal
or not by generating a simulated signal from the preamplifier. In this case, the preamplifier control
signal functions in the same way as in scan measurement. For confirming the control signal, set the
switch 21SW at the front upper right of the scanner unit to STATIONARY so that the scanner does not
rotate.
3－47
L2E-BW1444
3.8.2
Output sequence check
Check the data sequence from the detector channel to the image processing unit via the preamplifier
according to the following procedure.
(1) Execute the calibration according to the following procedure.
(1.1) Select the modes in the order of warm up→calibration select mode from the main menu on
the operation panel.
(1.2) Select 120kV, 5mm x 4 slice thickness on the operation panel, and press
Confirm
button.
(1.3) After the system has been set to be ready for measurement,
Press
START
START
switch flickers
switch.
(2) After the end of calibration, fix either Cu wire solder wire having a size of about 1mm to the right
or left end of the tabletop using an adhesive tape, and adjust the patient table height to obtain the
maximum visual field.
(3) Select the maintenance scan from the main menu of the operation panel.
(3.1) Set the scan conditions on the operation panel as shown below and press
Confirm
button.
Items
No. of scans
Table index (mm)
Gantry angle
Tube current
Tube voltage
Scan time
Collimation
Inter-scan time
Stationary scan
Delay
Start mode
FOV (mm)
Filter
Variation code
Phantom correction
Bias
ADPP (measurement)
ADPP (reconstruction)
Scattered ray correction
CT number adjustment
Large attenuation correction
Set values
1
0
0
50
120
1
5mm×4slice
Any
OFF
Any
Any
Maximum
1
OFF
OFF
0
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
(Note) For the items indicated as [option], their set values at that time may be
used as they are.
For the item indicated as [Maximum], input a settable maximum value.
(3.2) After the system has been set to be ready for measurement,
3－48
START
switch flickers.
L2E-BW1444
(4) After the end of scan, start RAW DATA analysis of the service program to indicate raw data.
(4.1) Select items in the order of [File] - [Open] - [Raw Data].
(Click [File] by the left key of mouse, point [Open], and click [Raw Data] by the left key of
mouse.)
(4.2) Select the Raw Data scanned in (3) (Click the corresponding patient number and slice
number data by the left key of mouse), and click
OK
by the left key of mouse to display
Raw Data.
(4.3) Set a window width (W/W) suitable for observing the wire trajectory. (Be careful since the
input is not completed unless
ENTER
key is pressed when inputting them from the
keyboard.)
3－49
L2E-BW1444
(4.4) Make sure that the wire trajectory changes smooth without any difference in level or other
defects.
Short-circuit
Disconnection
ch disconnection
of detector cable
(4.5) For terminating the raw Data, select items in the order of [File]-[Exit].
(Click [File] by the left key of mouse, and then, click [Exit] by the left key of mouse.)
3－50
L2E-BW1444
3.9 Checking the influences of vibration noises on measuring data (Vibration check)
Check the vibration noises of detector, detector cable, and preamplifier according to the following procedure.
(1) Turn off 2FFB of the X-ray control unit to turn off X-rays.
(2) Select the maintenance scan from the main menu of the operation panel. (If the maintenance scan is not
displayed, display it according to 5.1.1)
(2.1) Set the scan conditions on the operation panel as shown below and press
Items
button.
Set values
No. of scans
Table index (mm)
Gantry angle (°)
Tube current (mA)
Tube voltage (kV)
Scan time (s)
Collimation (mm)
Inter-scan time (s)
Stationary scan
Delay (s)
Start mode
F.O.V. (mm)
Filter
B.H.C.
B.G.C.
Variation code
Phantom correction
Bias
ADPP (measurement)
ADPP (reconfiguration)
Scattered ray correction
CT number adjustment
Large attenuation correction
(Note)
Confirm
1
0
0
175
120
0.8
0.75mm×2slice
Any
OFF
Any
Any
Maximum
4
OFF
OFF
3
OFF
320
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
For the items indicated as [option], their set values at that time may be used as
they are. For the item indicated as [Maximum], input a settable maximum value.
(2.2) After the system has been set to be ready for measurement,
START
switch flickers. Press it.
(3) At the end of scan, start RAW DATA analysis of the service program to indicate Raw Data.
(3.1) Select items in the order of [File] - [Open]- [Raw Data] from the menu bar of RAW DATA analysis,
click [File] by the left key of mouse, point [Open], and click [Raw Data] by the left key of mouse.
3－51
L2E-BW1444
(3.2) Select the Raw Data scanned in (2) (Click the corresponding patient number and slice number data by
the left key of mouse), and click
OK
by the left key of mouse to display Raw Data.
(3.3) Set a window width (W/W) to 500 and window level (W/L) to 21430 (Be careful since the input is
not completed unless
ENTER
key is pressed when inputting them from the keyboard).
(3.4) Make sure that the displayed Raw Data are free of extreme longitudinal streaks, lateral streaks, black
lines, and white lines, and execute VCK processing as described in and after (3.5).
3－52
L2E-BW1444
(3.5) Select items in the order of [Analysis] - [VCK] from the menu bar of RAW DATA analysis (Click
[Analysis] by the left key of mouse and then, click [VCK] by the left key of mouse).
(3.6) Set the Diff. threshold value to 2000 and set the SD threshold value to 400 (No
input is required). Click
Check
ENTER
key by the left key of mouse.
Threshold value of Diff.
Threshold value of SD
2000
400
(3.7) If no channel exceeds the threshold values being set in (3.6), a message [All channels are OK] is
displayed.
If a channel exceeds these threshold values, data of the channel are displayed.
If none of channels exceeds Diff. threshold values, check results are acceptable (OK).
(3.8) The ordinate range of Diff. graph or SD graph can be changed by clicking
Max./Min. , or
Key Input
as desired using the left key of mouse.
Switches
Default
Default ,
Processing contents
Set ordinate higher-limit value to 65535 and ordinate lower-limit value to 0.
Max./Min.
Set ordinate higher-limit value to the maximum value of graph and the ordinate
lower-limit value to the minimum value of graph.
Key Input
Display the key input window, and input the higher-limit value and lower-limit value
of ordinate.
3－53
L2E-BW1444
(3.9) For returning to the RAW DATA display after terminating VCK processing, select items in the order
of [Analysis] - [VCK] from the menu bar of RAW DATA analysis (Click [Analysis] by the left key of
mouse and then, click [VCK] by the left key of mouse).
(3.10) For terminating Raw Data analysis, select items in the order of [File]-[Exit] (Click [File] by the left
key of mouse and then, click [Exit] by the left key of mouse).
(4) Reset 2FFB of the X-ray control unit to ON.
3－54
L2E-BW1444
3.10 Center adjustment
Adjust the center for correcting the positional relations of X-ray focus, scanner rotation center, and detector
center according to the following procedure.
(1) Turn off SW10 of RXCPU PCB. (LED26 (FSD_ON) goes out).
(2) Execute air calibration according to the following procedure.
(2.1) Select the modes in the order of warm up →calibration select mode from the main menu on the
operation panel.
(2.2) Select 120kV, 1.25mm×4 slice and 0.75mm×2 slice on the operation panel and press
Confirm
button.
(2.3) After the system has been set to be ready for measurement,
START
switch flickers. Press it.
(3) After the end of air calibration, set the center adjustment rod to 20 ~ 25mm deviated from the scanner
rotation center.
(4) Select the maintenance scan from the main menu of the operation panel.
(4.1) Set the scan conditions on the operation panel as shown below and press
Items
button.
Set values
1
0
0
50
120
3
1.25mm×4slice
Auto
OFF
Any
Any
160
1
OFF
OFF
0
OFF
0
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
No. of scans
Table index (mm)
Gantry angle (°)
Tube current (mA)
Tube voltage (kV)
Scan time (s)
Collimation (mm)
Inter-scan time (s)
Stationary scan
Delay (s)
Start mode
F.O.V. (mm)
Filter
B.H.C.
B.G.C.
Variation code
Phantom correction
Bias
ADPP (measurement)
ADPP (reconfiguration)
Scattered ray correction
CT number adjustment
Large attenuation correction
(Note)
Confirm
For the items indicated as [option], their set values at that time may be used as
they are.
(4.2) After the system has been set to be ready for measurement,
START
switch flickers. Press it.
(4.3) At the end of scan under the conditions specified in (4.1) above, perform scan at 0.75mm×2 slice
(The other conditions remain unchanged from (4.1)).
3－55
L2E-BW1444
(5) At the end of scan, start RAW DATA analysis of the service program to indicate Raw Data.
(5.1) Select items in the order of [Analysis] - [CACK] from the menu bar of Raw Data analysis.
(5.2) Select the Raw Data scanned in (4) (Click the corresponding patient number and slice number data by
left key of the mouse), and then, click
OK
by the left key of mouse. Now, the X-ray tube move
quantity is displayed.
3－56
L2E-BW1444
(6) Move the X-ray tube according to the D calculated in (5) above. (See 3.6) Perform the work while
monitoring the move quantity on the dial gauge.
(a) Don’t move the X-ray tube when -0.03 ≦D ≦0.03.
(b) Fasten fixing bolts at 4 positions without fail after moving the X-ray tube (See 3.6).
(7) Repeat (2)～(6) until the D calculated in (5) satisfies -0.03 ≦D ≦0.03.
Be careful since the air calibration must be repeated without fail after moving the X-ray tube.
(8) Perform (8.1)～(8.3) after the end of center adjustment.
(8.1) Fasten and check the X-ray tube fixing bolts. (See 3.7)
(8.2) Loosen the X-ray moving bolts, and fix them by lock nuts at a position where they don’t touch the
X-ray tube assembly. (See 3.7)
(8.3) Turn on SW10 on the RXCPU pc board (LED26 (FSD_ON) is lighted).
After center adjustment, Compensator adjustment in 3.11 and focus shift detector (FSD)
adjustment in 3.12 must be done.
3－57
L2E-BW1444
3.11 Compensator position adjustment
Adjust the compensator position according to the following procedure.
(1) After making sure that the phantom, tabletop of patient table, etc. are not put in the gantry opening to be
ready for air scan, select the maintenance scan from the main menu of the operation panel. (Display the
maintenance scan according to 5.1.1, if not displayed.)
(1.1) Set the scan conditions on the operation panel as shown below and then, press
Items
button.
Set values
1
0
0
150
120
1
2.5mm×4slice
Auto
OFF
Any
Any
Any
Any
OFF
OFF
4
OFF
0
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
No. of scans
Table index (mm)
Gantry angle (°)
Tube current (mA)
Tube voltage (kV)
Scan time (s)
Collimation (mm)
Inter-scan time (s)
Stationary scan
Delay (s)
Start mode
F.O.V. (mm)
Filter
B.H.C.
B.G.C.
Variation code
Phantom correction
Bias
ADPP (measurement)
ADPP (reconfiguration)
Scattered ray correction
CT number adjustment
Large attenuation correction
(Note)
Confirm
For the items indicated as [option], their set values at that time may be used as
they are.
(1.2) After the system has been set to be ready for measurement,
START
switch flickers. Press it.
(2) At the end of scan, start RAW DATA analysis of the service program to indicate Raw Data.
(2.1) Select items in the order of [File] - [Open] - [Raw Data] from the menu bar of RAW DATA analysis,
click [File] by the left key of mouse, point [Open] and click [Raw Data] by the left key of mouse.
3－58
L2E-BW1444
(2.2) Select the Raw Data scanned in (1) (Click the corresponding patient number and slice number data by
the left key of mouse), and click
OK
by the left key of mouse to display Raw Data.
(2.3) Select items in the order of [Analysis] - [CLB] from the menu bar of Raw Data analysis (Click
[Analysis] by the left key of mouse, and then, click [CLB] by the left key of mouse).
(2.4) Check the values being displayed at the lower end of the CLB window. These values are Left, Right,
Center, and Diff. in 4 kinds.
A “Diff” of less than 5% is acceptable. If “Diff” exceeds 5%, compare Left and Right values with
each other, and move the X-ray tube assembly as shown below.
If Left ＞Right, move the compensator rightward as viewed from the table side.
If Left ＜ Right, move the compensator leftward as viewed from the table side.
Move the compensator according to the following procedure (See Fig.3.11)
1)
Remove the collimator box cover.
2)
Loosen the right and left sems screws.
3)
Loosen the M4 hexagon socket head bolts in the moving direction to produce a suitable
clearance at the bolt tips.
4)
Move the compensator by fastening M4 hexagon socket head bolts on the opposite side.
5)
Fix the compensator by fastening sems screws.
6)
Loosen the right and left M4 hexagon socket head bolts to produce a suitable clearance at the
bolt tips. Then, fix the bolts with nuts.
3－59
L2E-BW1444
7)
After confirming that Diff in CLB processing is less than 5%, mount the collimator box cover.
Collimator box cover
Sems screw
Hexagon socket head bolt
Nut
Fig. 3.11
(2.5) For returning to the Raw Data display at the end of CLB processing, select items in the order of
[Analysis] - [CLB] from the menu bar of Raw Data analysis in the same way as in (2.3) (Click
[Analysis] by the left key of mouse and then, click [CLB] by the left key of mouse).
(2.6) For returning to the Raw Data display, select items in the order of [File] - [Analysis] (Click [File] by
the left key of mouse and then, click [Exit] by the left key of mouse).
(2.7) Repeat steps (1) and (2) until the criterion in (2.4) is satisfied. The Center value in CLB processing
should be within a range of 21500+4300/-5375 (16125 ~ 25800) when the criterion in (2.4) has been
satisfied.
After compensator adjustment, focus shift detector (FSD) adjustment in 3.12 must be done.
3－60
L2E-BW1444
3.12A Focus shift detector (FSD) adjustment
Rev.1(Display VR3**)
*To be applied to RTC PCB
Perform all FSD adjustment to all KV conditions, otherwise a ring artifact occurs.
Set the X-ray
tube to the normal condition in advance.
If an oscillation waveform is observed during the measurement of each TP, this symptom may be
avoided by turning the corresponding VR clockwise or counterclockwise.
If the system was installed with the X-ray tube mounted at the installation time, no adjustment is necessary any
more.
Perform steps (15) ~ (17) in this chapter to make sure that FSD functions normally. Adjustment is necessary in
all cases other than described above.
For this adjustment, observe the following flows as required.
Remove the PCB upper cover and PCB side cover.
(1) Refer to Flow 1 when X-ray tube has been mounted at the installation time, when the X-ray tube has been
replaced, or when the image detector has been replaced
(2) Refer to Flow 2 when FSD has been replaced
(3) Refer to Flow 3 when RTC board has been replaced
(4) Refer to Flow 4 in the cases other than specified above
PCB Upeer Cover
RTC PCB
PCB Side Cover
TP27(GND)
3－61
L2E-BW1444
[Flow 1 ] when the X-ray tube or the image
detector has been replaced
[Flow 2 ] when FSD has been replaced
Normal condition of X-ray tube (See 3.7.3)
Normal condition of X-ray tube (See 3.7.3)
X-ray tube positioning
FSD offset adjustment
FSD positioning
X-ray tube positioning
RTC board VR adjustment
FSD positioning
Correction to X-ray tube
Correction to X-ray tube
Correction to rotating operation
RTC board VR adjustment
Correction to X-ray tube
Correction to rotating operation
3－62
L2E-BW1444
[Flow 3 ] when RTC board has been
replaced
[Flow 4 ] in the cases other than specified above
Normal condition of X-ray tube (See 3.7.3)
Normal condition of X-ray tube (See 3.7.3)
FSD offset adjustment
FSD offset adjustment
FSD reference adjustment
FSD reference adjustment
X-ray tube positioning
X-ray tube positioning
RTC board VR adjustment width check
FSD positioning
RTC board VR adjustment
RTC board VR adjustment width check
Correction to X-ray tube
RTC board VR adjustment
Correction to rotating operation
Correction to X-ray tube
Correction to rotating operation
Indications of adjusting parts of FSD
The adjusting methods are described every flow
Corresponding flow numbers are marked O below respective adjusting items, and also, whether HU is
restricted or not and whether rotary scan is done or stationary scan is done are also described.
Proceed the work while confirming that the present work is correct or not.
(Example)
Detector positioning
Rotary ・ Stationary HU during measurement =50~ 55%
1 2 3 4
Corresponding flow No.
In this case, the work is necessary for flow No. 2 and No. 4, the work is done by stationary scan, and
measurement is done at HU = 50 ~ 55%.
3－63
L2E-BW1444
1. Normal condition of X-ray tube
1
2
3
Rotary ・ Stationary HU during measurement =Normal condition
4
(1) Make sure that SW10 of RXCPU PCB is turned off ( LED26 (FSDON) goes out) and the collimator case
cover is mounted.
(2) Set the X-ray tube to normal condition. (See 3.7.4) Perform step (3) and (4) during stop of scan. For (3)
and (4), use a storage oscilloscope.
2. FSD offset adjustment
1
2
3
Rotary ・ Stationary HU during measurement = Not restricted
4
(3) Adjust VR363 so that the TP22 output becomes 0 ±10mV when X-ray tube is turned off. (A digital voltmeter
can be used )
Adjusting point
Measuring point
Adjusting value
TP22
0±10mV
VR363
Table (3)
Rotary ・ Stationary HU during measurement = Not restricted
3. FSD reference adjustment
1
2
3
The output increases when turning
VR363 clockwise.
4
(4) Adjust RTC board VR according to the following table.
Measuring conditions
Slice
kV
mA
1.25mm×4
100
0.75mm×2
150
Adjusting
Measuring
Adjusting
Scan time
point
point
value
3 sec
VR430
1 sec
VR428
3 sec
VR355
TP21
1~3V
1 sec
VR429
Table (4)
4 .X-ray tube adjustment
1
2
3
The output increases when turning
each VR clockwise.
Rotary ・ Stationary HU during measurement = 50 ~ 55%
4
The OPR change quantity per 10µm is dispersed depending upon systems. The dial gauge
point may be deviated when the scanner is set to the rotary condition. Perform adjustment by
increasing or decreasing the move quantity of the X-ray tube to (the output ratio) as occasion
demands.
(5) Perform “FSD adjustment – small focus 1” of maintenance scan by rotary scan,check its raw data by OPR of
raw data analysis , and then, adjust the X-ray tube position by SW6 and SW7 of RXCPU PCB so that the
output ratio in 444 ~ 453 channels becomes 0±3%. ( Move the X-ray tube backward by pressing SW6 when the
output ratio is plus or move the X-ray tube forward by pressing SW7 when the output ratio is minus. ) The
output ratio changes about 3% when moving the X-ray tube 10µm in case of small focus.
3－64
L2E-BW1444
5. FSD positioning (lateral direction) Rotary ・ Stationary HU during measurement = Not restricted
1
2
3
4
(6) Set the X-ray tube at a position where it is rotated clockwise by 90°as viewed from the top as illustrated below
and set 21SW to “STATIONARY SCAN” side.
９０°
Figure (6)
(7) Perform scan under the following conditions and measure the sum of the outputs at TP19 and TP20. Set the
oscilloscope trigger to TP21.
Slice
1.25mm×4
Measuring conditions
kV
mA
Scan time
120
150
Stationary 3sec.
Measuring point
TP19
TP20
Table (7)
Figure (7)
(8) Adjust the lateral position of FSD so that the sum of the outputs of TP19 and TP20 becomes as shown below.
－3.0V ≦TP19+TP20≦－1.5V
Perform adjustment as specified in the following table by tube.
ＦＳ
Ｄ検 出器
FSD
Lateral
囲
動範range
横移move
Ａ
Adjusting固screw
定ね じ
(a) Loosen four fixing screws mounted on
the lower face of FSD.
(b) Position the FSD , and then, fix it by
fastening the fixing screws.
Ｘ 線管
X-ray
tube
コ
リメ ータ ボッ
クス
Collimator
box
Figure (8)
3－65
L2E-BW1444
TP19+TP20
1
FSD adjustment
-3.0V≦TP19+TP20≦-1.5V
No adjustment is necessary
Move the FSD rightward ( in the inserting direction
2 -1.5V＜TP19+TP20＜0V
into the collimator box) , and fix it at the position
where -3.0V ≦TP19+ TP20 ≦-1.5V.
Move the FSD leftward ( in the direction coming
3
-3.0V＞TP19+TP20
out of
the collimator box) , and fix it at the
position where -3.0V ≦TP19+ TP20 ≦-1.5V
Table (8)
In (8), if, as a result of FSD movement, the sum of the outputs at TP19 and TP20 does not fall within the
following range: -3.0≦TP19 + TP20 < -1.5V
make fine adjustment of the position of the Compensator according to the following instruction.
･where -1.5V < TP19 + TP20 < 0
Move the Compensator rightward, viewed from the table side, within the adjustment value in 3.11
“Compensator position adjustment”, and check again the sum of the outputs at TP19 and TP20.
･where -3.0V > TP19 + TP20
Move the Compensator leftward, viewed from the table side, within the adjustment value in 3.11
“Compensator position adjustment”, and check again the sum of the outputs at TP19 and TP20.
6. FSD positioning ( longitudinal direction) Rotary ・ Stationary HU during adjustment = 45 ~ 65%
1
2
3
4
(9) After turning VR368 ( white mark for 120KV) (click sound is heard by turning it about 30 turns ) , turn it
counterclockwise by 12 turns from the above condition, and fix FSD at the position where TP22 output (point
A) becomes 0±2V after 1.5 seconds from turning on the X-ray in the scan under the following conditions.
Measuring conditions
Measuring
Reference
Slice
kV
mA
Scan time
point
value
1.25mm×4
120
150
3 sec
Table (9)
TP22
0±2V
（Ｏｓｃｉｌｌｏｓｃｏｐｅ Ｓｃｒｅｅｎ）
２［Ｖ］
ＴＰ２２
Ｐｏｉｎｔ［Ａ］
０［Ｖ］
*Set TP21 as trigger when checking the
ＴＰ２１
TP22 waveform.
－２［Ｖ］
１．５ｓｅｃ
３ｓｅｃ
Ｘ－Ｒａｙ ＯＦＦ
Ｘ－Ｒａｙ ＯＮ
Figure (9)-a
3－66
L2E-BW1444
Ｃ：Scanner
スキャside
ナ側
Ｄ：Table
テーside
ブル側
Longitudinal
direction
前後方
向
Collimator
コ
リメーbox
タボックス
引
ねじ
Pullき
screw
Push
押
しscrew
ねじ
Fixing
固定screw
ねじ
Fixing
固定screw
ねじ
Figure (9)-b
(a) Loosen the fixing screws on both right and left sides of the FSD.
(b) Increase the output voltage by moving the FSD in the C direction by the push screw when the TP22 output
voltage is lower than -2V.
Decrease the output voltage by moving the FSD in the D direction by the pull screw when the TP22 output
voltage exceeds +2V.
(c) Fix FSD at the position where TP22= 0±2V.
7. RTC board VR adjustment width check Rotary ・ Stationary HU during adjustment = 45~ 65%
1
2
3
4
(10) (The VR to be adjusted are VR364 ~ 366 (yellowish green) and VR367~ 369 (white). )
Make sure that the
TP22 output after 1.5 seconds from turning on the X-ray in scan under the following conditions fluctuates when
turning the corresponding VR.
Measuring conditions
Slice
1.25mm×4
kV
Scan time
100
VR369
120
VR368
130
VR367
100
0.75mm×2
mA
Check position
150
3 sec
VR366
120
VR365
130
VR364
VR clockwise and it becomes lower
than -1V when turning VR
counterclockwise.
Table (10)
If the output does not become higher than 1Vunder certain KV condition in (10), adjust the FSD position again
to increase the TP22 output and check (10) again.
If the output does not become lower than -1Vunder certain KV condition in (11), adjust the FSD position again
to decrease the TP22 output and check (10) again.
3－67
L2E-BW1444
8. RTC board VR adjustment
1
2
3
Rotary ・ Stationary HU during adjustment = 45~ 65%
4
(11) (The VR to be adjusted are VR364 ~ 366 (yellowish green) and VR367~ 369 (white). ) Adjust respective VR so
that the TP22 output during scan shown in the following table becomes 0±0.3V at 100kV or 0±0.5V at
120kV and 130kV after about 1.5 seconds from turning on the X-ray when HU is 45 ~ 65%.
(The output decreases when turning VR364~ VR369 counterclockwise. )
Measuring conditions
Slice
kV
1.25mm×4
mA
2
3
Adjusting
point
point
value
VR369
120
VR368
130
VR367
150
3sec
TP22
VR366
120
VR365
130
VR364
Table (11)
tolerance
0V
±0.3V
0V
±0.5V
0V
±0.3V
0V
±0.5V
Rotary ・ Stationary HU during adjustment = 45~ 65%
9. Correction to X-ray tube
1
Measuring
100
100
0.75mm×2
Scan time
Adjusting
4
(12) Measure [a ~ d] under the following table for adjusting the FSD operation when the X-ray tube s set to 0°and
180°positions.
※Measurement of a,b,c,d
(Measure the output after 1.5 seconds from X-ray irradiation)
Measuring conditions
X-ray tube position
a
0°
b
180°
c
0°
d
180°
Slice
kV
mA
Scan time
120
150
3sec
Measuring point
1.25mm×4
TP22
0.75mm×2
Table (12)
(13) Perform calculation & set the value as adjusting value by substituting[a～d] obtained by measurement into the
table(13).
Perform scan with each measuring condition on the table(13).
Check the output of measuring point & adjust the value to be “Adjustment Value”.
Perform scan again & check if the value becomes “adjustment value”.
※If the calculated value is within “0～0.2[V]”、set to the “Adjustment Value” 0.2[V].
3－68
L2E-BW1444
Measuring conditions
Slice
kV
mA
Adjusting
Measuring
Calculated
Adjusting
Scan time
point
point
value
value
3sec
VR430
1sec
VR428
（ａ－ｂ）
＋ ０．３ Ｖ
２
1.25mm×4
120
（ａ－ｂ）
＋０．３ ×０．６ Ｖ
２
150
TP21
3sec
VR355
1sec
VR429
（ｃ－ｄ）
＋０．３ Ｖ
２
0.75mm×2
（ｃ－ｄ）
＋０．３ ×０．６ Ｖ
２
(Example)
tolerance
+0.2V
-0V
+0.2V
-0V
+0.2V
-0V
+0.2V
-0V
Table (13)
TP22
output
Ｔ
Ｐ２２
の出力
０°
１８０°
Calculation 算value
出値 ＝
１．２Ｖ
← ”ａ”
－１．８Ｖ
← ”ｂ”
１．２－（－１．８）
1
2
3
＋０．３Ｖ =1.8
２
10. Correction to rotary operation
Adjust VR430 so that the TP21 output
becomes 1.8 [V] ~ 2.0[V] in this
case.
Rotary ・ Stationary HU during adjustment = 45~ 65%
4
This adjustment is done under the rotary operation. Make sure that the probe ,etc. are removed
without any skip.
Start scanning when HU is 45 ~ 65% .
(14) Turn on SW10 of RXCPUPCB ( LED26 (FSD_ON) lights to be turned on) and set 21SW to “NORMAL”.
(15) Check the OPR value under the following conditions If the OPR value does not meet the specified value,
adjust each VR shown in (11) again.
Perform this scan by switching the kV and slice thickness from the protocol of FSD adjustmentlarge focus 1 of maintenance scan.
Turn off PPC in case of 0.75mm x 2 scan.
Measuring conditions
Slice
kV
OPR value check
mA
Scan time
No. of scans
150
3sec
3 times
150
3sec
3 times
100
1.25mm×4
120
130
100
0.75mm×2
120
130
OPR value in the 3rd scan shall be
within a range of -0.6~ -1.8%
OPR value in the 3rd scan shall be
within ±6%
*OPR : show P5-15(11)
Table (15)
3－69
L2E-BW1444
(16) Measure the OPR value by executing maintenance scan under the following. Protocol conditions and
assume [f~i] be the obtained values. (All these values shall be the OPR values in the final scan. )
プロトコname
ル名
Protocol
スscan
キャンtime
タイム No.
スキofャンscans
回数
ｆ
ＦＳＤ ａｄｊｕｓｔｍｅｎｔ－ｌａｒｇｅ
ｆｏｃｕｓ２
１．０［ｓ］ 5 ５
回
times
ｇ
ＦＳＤ ａｄｊｕｓｔｍｅｎｔ－ｌａｒｇｅ
ｆｏｃｕｓ３
０．８［ｓ］ 5 ５
回
times
ｈ
ＦＳＤ ａｄｊｕｓｔｍｅｎｔ－ｓｍａｌｌ
ｆｏｃｕｓ２
times
１．０［ｓ］ 5 ５
回
ｉ
ＦＳＤ ａｄｊｕｓｔｍｅｎｔ－ｓｍａｌｌ
ｆｏｃｕｓ３
times
０．８［ｓ］ 5 ５
回
Table (16)
(17) Adjust relevant VR so that [f~ i] obtained in (16) conform to the following specified values respectively.
The DSW setting is OFF-Defalut. When adjustment is impossible even if you turn volume, turn on the DSW.
① [f] → Adjust VR385 so that -0.6% ≧f ≧ -1.8%. (See the following table)
OPR value
-0.6%≧f≧-1.8%
VR385 adjustment
No adjustment is necessary
When No. 6 of DSW2 is turned off
Adjust VR by turning it counterclockwise.
Adjust VR by turning it clockwise. If adjustment
-1.8%＞f
cannot be done even when turning VR fully
When No. 6 of DSW2 is turned on
clockwise, turn off No.6 of DSW2 , and adjust VR
by turning it counterclockwise.
Adjust VR by turning it clockwise. If adjustment
f＞-0.6%
cannot be done even when turning VR fully
When No. 6 of DSW2 is turned off
clockwise, turn off No.6 of DSW2 , and adjust VR
by turning it counterclockwise.
When No. 6 of DSW2 is turned on
Adjust VR by turning it counterclockwise.
Table (17)-①
② 「g」→ Adjust VR383 so that -0.6% ≧ g ≧ -1.8% (See the following table)
OPR value
-0.6%≧g≧-1.8%
VR383 adjustment
No adjustment is necessary
When No. 8 of DSW2 is turned off
Adjust VR by turning it counterclockwise.
Adjust VR by turning it clockwise. If adjustment
-1.8%＞g
When No. 8 of DSW2 is turned on
cannot be done even when turning VR fully
clockwise, turn off No.8 of DSW2 , and adjust VR
by turning it counterclockwise.
Adjust VR by turning it counterclockwise. If
g＞-0.6%
When No. 8 of DSW2 is turned off
adjustment cannot be done even when turning VR
fully clockwise, turn off No.8 of DSW2 , and adjust
VR by turning it counterclockwise.
When No. 8 of DSW2 is turned on
Adjust VR by turning it counterclockwise.
Table (17)-②
3－70
L2E-BW1444
③ 「h」→ Adjust VR401 so that 6% ≧ h ≧ -6% (See the following table)
OPR value
6%≧h≧-6%
VR401 adjustment
No adjustment is necessary
When No. 5 of DSW2 is turned off
Adjust VR by turning it counterclockwise.
Adjust VR by turning it clockwise. If adjustment
-6%＞h
cannot be done even when turning VR fully
When No. 5 of DSW2 is turned on
clockwise, turn off No.5 of DSW2 , and adjust VR
by turning it counterclockwise.
Adjust VR by turning it clockwise. If adjustment
h＞6%
cannot be done even when turning VR fully
When No. 5 of DSW2 is turned off
clockwise, turn off No.5 of DSW2 , and adjust VR
by turning it counterclockwise.
When No. 5 of DSW2 is turned on
Adjust VR by turning it counterclockwise.
Table (17)-③
④ 「i」→Adjust VR384 so that 6% ≧ i ≧ -6%. (See the following table)
OPR value
6%≧i≧-6%
VR384 adjustment
No adjustment is necessary
When No. 7 of DSW2 is turned off
Adjust VR by turning it counterclockwise.
Adjust VR by turning it clockwise. If adjustment
-6%＞i
When No. 7 of DSW2 is turned on
cannot be done even when turning VR fully
clockwise, turn off No.5 of DSW2 , and adjust VR
by turning it counterclockwise.
Adjust VR by turning it clockwise. If adjustment
i＞6%
When No. 7 of DSW2 is turned off
cannot be done even when turning VR fully
clockwise, turn off No.5 of DSW2 , and adjust VR
by turning it counterclockwise.
When No. 7 of DSW2 is turned on
Adjust VR by turning it counterclockwise.
Table (17)-④
Perform scan in (16) again when VR383, VR384, VR385, or VR401 was adjusted , and make sure that the
values in f ~ i are within a range where no adjustment is necessary.
(18) Make sure that SW10 of RXCPU PCB is turned on again ( LED26 (FSD_ON) lights).
3－71
L2E-BW1444
3.12B Focus shift detector (FSD) adjustment
Rev.2(Dsiplay VR*)
*To be applied to RTC2 PCB
Perform all FSD adjustment to all KV conditions, otherwise a ring artifact occurs.
Set the X-ray
tube to the normal condition in advance.
If an oscillation waveform is observed during the measurement of each TP, this symptom may be
avoided by turning the corresponding VR clockwise or counterclockwise.
If the system was installed with the X-ray tube mounted at the installation time, no adjustment is necessary any
more.
Perform steps (15) ~ (17) in this chapter to make sure that FSD functions normally. Adjustment is necessary in
all cases other than described above.
For this adjustment, observe the following flows as required.
Remove the PCB upper cover and PCB side cover.
(1) Refer to Flow 1 when X-ray tube has been mounted at the installation time, when the X-ray tube has been
replaced, or when the image detector has been replaced
(2) Refer to Flow 2 when FSD has been replaced
(3) Refer to Flow 3 when RTC2 board has been replaced
(4) Refer to Flow 4 in the cases other than specified above
PCB Upeer Cover
RTC2 PCB
PCB Side Cover
3－72
L2E-BW1444
[Flow 1 ] when the X-ray tube or the image
detector has been replaced
[Flow 2 ] when FSD has been replaced
Normal condition of X-ray tube (See 3.7.4)
Normal condition of X-ray tube (See 3.7.4)
X-ray tube positioning
FSD offset adjustment
FSD positioning
X-ray tube positioning
RTC board VR adjustment
FSD positioning
Correction to X-ray tube
Correction to X-ray tube
Correction to rotating operation
RTC board VR adjustment
Correction to X-ray tube
Correction to rotating operation
3－73
L2E-BW1444
[Flow 3 ] when RTC board has been
replaced
[Flow 4 ] in the cases other than specified above
Normal condition of X-ray tube (See 3.7.4)
Normal condition of X-ray tube (See 3.7.4)
FSD offset adjustment
FSD offset adjustment
FSD reference adjustment
FSD reference adjustment
X-ray tube positioning
X-ray tube positioning
RTC board VR adjustment width check
FSD positioning
RTC board VR adjustment
RTC board VR adjustment width check
Correction to X-ray tube
RTC board VR adjustment
Correction to rotating operation
Correction to X-ray tube
Correction to rotating operation
Indications of adjusting parts of FSD
The adjusting methods are described every flow
Corresponding flow numbers are marked O below respective adjusting items, and also, whether HU is
restricted or not and whether rotary scan is done or stationary scan is done are also described.
Proceed the work while confirming that the present work is correct or not.
(Example)
Detector positioning
Rotary ・ Stationary HU during measurement =50~ 55%
1 2 3 4
Corresponding flow No.
In this case, the work is necessary for flow No. 2 and No. 4, the work is done by stationary scan, and
measurement is done at HU = 50 ~ 55%.
3－74
L2E-BW1444
1. Normal condition of X-ray tube
1
2
3
Rotary ・ Stationary HU during measurement =Normal condition
4
(1) Make sure that SW10 of RXCPU PCB is turned off ( LED26 (FSDON) goes out) and the collimator case
cover is mounted.
(2) Set the X-ray tube to normal condition. (See 3.7.4) Perform step (3) and (4) during stop of scan. For (3)
and (4), use a storage oscilloscope.
2. FSD offset adjustment
1
2
3
Rotary ・ Stationary HU during measurement = Not restricted
4
(3) Adjust VR1 so that the TP22 output becomes 0 ±10mV when X-ray tube is turned off. (A digital voltmeter can
be used )
Adjusting point
Measuring point
Adjusting value
VR1
TP22
Table (3)
0±10mV
Rotary ・ Stationary HU during measurement = Not restricted
3. FSD reference adjustment
1
2
3
The output increases when turning
VR1 clockwise.
4
(4) Adjust RTC board VR according to the following table.
Measuring conditions
Slice
kV
mA
1.25mm×4
100
0.75mm×2
4 .X-ray tube adjustment
1
2
3
150
Adjusting
Measuring
Adjusting
Scan time
point
point
value
3 sec
VR2
1 sec
VR3
3 sec
VR4
TP21
1~3V
1 sec
VR5
Table (4)
The output increases when turning
each VR clockwise.
Rotary ・ Stationary HU during measurement = 50 ~ 55%
4
The OPR change quantity per 10µm is dispersed depending upon systems. The dial gauge
point may be deviated when the scanner is set to the rotary condition. Perform adjustment by
increasing or decreasing the move quantity of the X-ray tube to (the output ratio) as occasion
demands.
(5) Perform “FSD adjustment – small focus 1” of maintenance scan by rotary scan,check its raw data by OPR of
raw data analysis , and then, adjust the X-ray tube position by SW6 and SW7 of RXCPU PCB so that the
output ratio in 444 ~ 453 channels becomes 0±3%. ( Move the X-ray tube backward by pressing SW6 when the
output ratio is plus or move the X-ray tube forward by pressing SW7 when the output ratio is minus. ) The
output ratio changes about 3% when moving the X-ray tube 10µm in case of small focus.
3－75
L2E-BW1444
5. FSD positioning (lateral direction) Rotary ・ Stationary HU during measurement = Not restricted
1
2
3
4
(6) Set the X-ray tube at a position where it is rotated clockwise by 90°as viewed from the top as illustrated below
and set 21SW to “STATIONARY SCAN” side.
９０°
Figure (6)
(7) Perform scan under the following conditions and measure the sum of the outputs at TP19 and TP20. Set the
oscilloscope trigger to TP21. (about 0.5 - 1.0V)
Measuring conditions
Slice
kV
mA
1.25mm×4
120
150
Scan time
Measuring point
Stationary
TP19
3sec.
TP20
Table (7)
Figure (7)
(8) Adjust the lateral position of FSD so that the sum of the outputs of TP19 and TP20 becomes as shown below.
－3.0V ≦TP19+TP20≦－1.5V
Perform adjustment as specified in the following table by tube.
ＦＳFSD
Ｄ検出器
Lateral
move
囲
動範range
横移
Ａ
Adjusting固定ねじ
(c) Loosen four fixing screws mounted on
the lower face of FSD.
(d) Position the FSD , and then, fix it by
fastening the fixing screws.
Ｘ線管tube
X-ray
コ
リメータボッbox
クス
Collimator
Figure (8)
3－76
L2E-BW1444
TP19+TP20
1
FSD adjustment
-3.0V≦TP19+TP20≦-1.5V
No adjustment is necessary
Move the FSD rightward ( in the inserting direction
2 -1.5V＜TP19+TP20＜0V
into the collimator box) , and fix it at the position
where -3.0V ≦TP19+ TP20 ≦-1.5V.
Move the FSD leftward ( in the direction coming
3
-3.0V＞TP19+TP20
out of
the collimator box) , and fix it at the
position where -3.0V ≦TP19+ TP20 ≦-1.5V
Table (8)
In (8), if, as a result of FSD movement, the sum of the outputs at TP19 and TP20 does not fall within the
following range: -3.0V≦TP19 + TP20 < -1.5V
make fine adjustment of the position of the Collimator according to the following instruction.
･where -1.5V < TP19 + TP20 < 0
Move the Collimator rightward, viewed from the table side, within the adjustment value in 3.11 “Collimator
position adjustment”, and check again the sum of the outputs at TP19 and TP20.
･where -3.0V > TP19 + TP20
Move the Collimator leftward, viewed from the table side, within the adjustment value in 3.11 “Collimator
position adjustment”, and check again the sum of the outputs at TP19 and TP20.
6. FSD positioning ( longitudinal direction) Rotary ・ Stationary HU during adjustment = 45 ~ 65%
1
2
3
4
(9) After turning VR7 ( white mark for 120KV) (click sound is heard by turning it about 30 turns ) , turn it
counterclockwise by 12 turns from the above condition, and fix FSD at the position where TP22 output (point
A) becomes 0±2V after 1.5 seconds from turning on the X-ray in the scan under the following conditions.
Measuring conditions
Measuring
Reference
Slice
kV
mA
Scan time
point
point
1.25mm×4
120
150
3 sec
Table (9)
TP22
0±2V
（Ｏｓｃｉｌｌｏｓｃｏｐｅ Ｓｃｒｅｅｎ）
２［Ｖ］
ＴＰ２２
Ｐｏｉｎｔ［Ａ］
０［Ｖ］
Set TP21 as trigger when checking the
TP22 waveform.
ＴＰ２１
－２［Ｖ］
１．５ｓｅｃ
３ｓｅｃ
Ｘ－Ｒａｙ ＯＦＦ
Ｘ－Ｒａｙ ＯＮ
Figure (9)-a
3－77
L2E-BW1444
Ｃ：Scanner
スキャside
ナ側
Ｄ：Table
テーside
ブル側
Collimator
コリメーbox
タボックス
Longitudinal
direction
前後方
向
引
ねじ
Pullき
screw
Push
押
しscrew
ねじ
Fixing
固定screw
ねじ
Fixing
固定screw
ねじ
Figure (9)-b
(a) Loosen the fixing screws on both right and left sides of the FSD.
(b) Increase the output voltage by moving the FSD in the C direction by the push screw when the TP22 output
voltage is lower than -2V.
Decrease the output voltage by moving the FSD in the D direction by the pull screw when the TP22 output
voltage exceeds +2V.
(c) Fix FSD at the position where TP22= 0±2V.
7. RTC board VR adjustment width check Rotary ・ Stationary HU during adjustment = 45~ 65%
1
2
3
4
(10) (The VR to be adjusted are VR9 ~ 11 (yellowish green) and VR6 ~ 8 (white). )
Make sure that the TP22
output after 1.5 seconds from turning on the X-ray in scan under the following conditions fluctuates when
turning the corresponding VR.
Measuring conditions
Slice
1.25mm×4
kV
Scan time
100
VR6
120
VR7
130
VR8
100
0.75mm×2
mA
Check position
150
3 sec
VR9
120
130
VR10
VR clockwise and it becomes lower
than -1V when turning VR
counterclockwise.
VR11
Table (10)
If the output does not become higher than 1Vunder certain KV condition in (10), adjust the FSD position again
to increase the TP22 output and check (10) again.
If the output does not become lower than -1Vunder certain KV condition in (11), adjust the FSD position again
to decrease the TP22 output and check (10) again.
3－78
L2E-BW1444
8. RTC board VR adjustment
1
2
3
Rotary ・ Stationary HU during adjustment = 45~ 65%
4
(11) (The VR to be adjusted are VR9 ~ 11 (yellowish green) and VR6~ 8 (white). ) Adjust respective VR so that the
TP22 output during scan shown in the following table becomes 0±0.3V at 100kV or 0±0.5V at 120kV and
130kV after about 1.5 seconds from turning on the X-ray when HU is 45 ~ 65%.
(The output decreases when turning VR6~ VR11 counterclockwise. )
Measuring conditions
Slice
kV
1.25mm×4
2
3
point
point
Scan time
VR6
120
VR7
130
VR8
150
3sec
VR9
120
VR10
130
VR11
Table (11)
9. Correction to X-ray tube
1
Measuring
100
100
0.75mm×2
mA
Adjusting
tolerance
±0.3V
±0.5V
TP22
±0.3V
±0.5V
Rotary ・ Stationary HU during adjustment = 45~ 65%
4
(12) Measure [a ~ d] under the following table for adjusting the FSD operation when the X-ray tube s set to 0°and
180°positions.
※Measurement of a,b,c,d
(Measure the output after 1.5 seconds from X-ray irradiation)
Measuring conditions
X-ray tube position
a
0°
b
180°
c
0°
d
180°
Slice
kV
mA
Scan time
120
150
3sec
Measuring point
1.25mm×4
TP22
0.75mm×2
Table (12)
(13) Perform calculation & set the value as adjusting value by substituting[a～d] obtained by measurement into the
table(13).
Perform scan with each measuring condition on the table(13).
Check the output of measuring point & adjust the value to be “Adjustment Value”.
Perform scan again & check if the value becomes “adjustment value”.
※If the calculated value is within “0～0.2[V]”、set to the “Adjustment Value” 0.2[V].
3－79
L2E-BW1444
Measuring conditions
Slice
kV
mA
Adjusting
Measuring
Calculated
Adjusting
Specified
Scan time
point
point
value
value
value
3sec
VR2
1sec
VR3
（ａ－ｂ）
＋０ ．３ Ｖ
２
1.25mm×4
120
（ａ－ｂ）
＋０．３ ×０．６ Ｖ
２
150
TP21
3sec
VR4
1sec
VR5
（ｃ－ｄ）
＋０．３ Ｖ
２
0.75mm×2
（ｃ－ｄ）
＋０．３ ×０．６ Ｖ
２
+0.2V
-0V
+0.2V
-0V
+0.2V
-0V
+0.2V
-0V
Table (13)
(Example)
TP22
output
Ｔ
Ｐ２２
の出力
０°
１８０°
Calculation 算value
出値 ＝
１．２Ｖ
← ”ａ”
－１．８Ｖ
← ”ｂ”
１．２－（－１．８）
２
10. Correction to rotary operation
1
2
3
Adjust VR2 so that the TP21 output
becomes 1.8 [V] ~ 2.0[V] in this
case.
＋０．３Ｖ =1.8
Rotary ・ Stationary HU during adjustment = 45~ 65%
4
This adjustment is done under the rotary operation. Make sure that the probe ,etc. are removed
without any skip.
Start scanning when HU is 45 ~ 65%.
(14) Turn on SW10 of RXCPUPCB ( LED26 (FSD_ON) lights to be turned on) and set 21SW to “NORMAL”.
(15) Check the OPR value under the following conditions If the OPR value does not meet the specified value,
adjust each VR shown in (11) again. (turning VR clockwise causes ‘%’ to alter in ‘+’ direction)
Perform this scan by switching the kV and slice thickness from the protocol of FSD adjustmentlarge focus 1 of maintenance scan.
Turn off PPC in case of 0.75mm x 2 scan.
Measuring conditions
Slice
kV
OPR value check
mA
Scan time
No. of scans
150
3sec
3 times
150
3sec
3 times
100
1.25mm×4
120
130
100
0.75mm×2
120
130
OPR value in the 3rd scan shall
be within a range of -0.6~ -1.8%
OPR value in the 3rd scan shall
be within ±6%
*OPR : show P5-15(11)
Table (15)
3－80
L2E-BW1444
(16) Measure the OPR value by executing maintenance scan under the following. Protocol conditions and
assume [f~i] be the obtained values. (All these values shall be the OPR values in the final scan. )
プロトコname
ル名
Protocol
スscan
キャンtime
タイム No.スキofャンscans
回数
ｆ
ＦＳＤ ａｄｊｕｓｔｍｅｎｔ－ｌａｒｇｅ
ｆｏｃｕｓ２
１．０［ｓ］ 5 ５
回
times
ｇ
ＦＳＤ ａｄｊｕｓｔｍｅｎｔ－ｌａｒｇｅ
ｆｏｃｕｓ３
０．８［ｓ］ 5 ５
回
times
ｈ
ＦＳＤ ａｄｊｕｓｔｍｅｎｔ－ｓｍａｌｌ
ｆｏｃｕｓ２
times
１．０［ｓ］ 5 ５
回
ｉ
ＦＳＤ ａｄｊｕｓｔｍｅｎｔ－ｓｍａｌｌ
ｆｏｃｕｓ３
times
０．８［ｓ］ 5 ５
回
Table (16)
(17) Adjust relevant VR so that [f~ i] obtained in (16) conform to the following specified values respectively.
The DSW setting is OFF-Defalut. When adjustment is impossible even if you turn volume, turn on the DSW.
① [f] → Adjust VR12 so that -0.6% ≧f ≧ -1.8%. (See the following table)
OPR value
-0.6%≧f≧-1.8%
VR12 adjustment
No adjustment is necessary
When No. 6 of DSW2 is turned off
Adjust VR by turning it counterclockwise.
Adjust VR by turning it clockwise. If adjustment
-1.8%＞f
cannot be done even when turning VR fully
When No. 6 of DSW2 is turned on
clockwise, turn off No.6 of DSW2 , and adjust VR
by turning it counterclockwise.
Adjust VR by turning it clockwise. If adjustment
f＞-0.6%
cannot be done even when turning VR fully
When No. 6 of DSW2 is turned off
clockwise, turn off No.6 of DSW2 , and adjust VR
by turning it counterclockwise.
When No. 6 of DSW2 is turned on
Adjust VR by turning it counterclockwise.
Table (17)-①
② 「g」→ Adjust VR13 so that -0.6% ≧ g ≧ -1.8% (See the following table)
OPR value
-0.6%≧g≧-1.8%
VR13 adjustment
No adjustment is necessary
When No. 8 of DSW2 is turned off
Adjust VR by turning it counterclockwise.
Adjust VR by turning it clockwise. If adjustment
-1.8%＞g
When No. 8 of DSW2 is turned on
cannot be done even when turning VR fully
clockwise, turn off No.8 of DSW2 , and adjust VR
by turning it counterclockwise.
Adjust VR by turning it counterclockwise. If
g＞-0.6%
When No. 8 of DSW2 is turned off
adjustment cannot be done even when turning VR
fully clockwise, turn off No.8 of DSW2 , and adjust
VR by turning it counterclockwise.
When No. 8 of DSW2 is turned on
Adjust VR by turning it counterclockwise.
Table (17)-②
3－81
L2E-BW1444
③ 「h」→ Adjust VR14 so that 6% ≧ h ≧ -6% (See the following table)
OPR value
6%≧h≧-6%
VR14 adjustment
No adjustment is necessary
When No. 5 of DSW2 is turned off
Adjust VR by turning it counterclockwise.
Adjust VR by turning it clockwise. If adjustment
-6%＞h
cannot be done even when turning VR fully
When No. 5 of DSW2 is turned on
clockwise, turn off No.5 of DSW2, and adjust VR
by turning it counterclockwise.
Adjust VR by turning it clockwise. If adjustment
h＞6%
cannot be done even when turning VR fully
When No. 5 of DSW2 is turned off
clockwise, turn off No.5 of DSW2, and adjust VR
by turning it counterclockwise.
When No. 5 of DSW2 is turned on
Adjust VR by turning it counterclockwise.
Table (17)-③
④ 「i」→Adjust VR15 so that 6% ≧ i ≧ -6%. (See the following table)
OPR value
6%≧i≧-6%
VR15 adjustment
No adjustment is necessary
When No. 7 of DSW2 is turned off
Adjust VR by turning it counterclockwise.
Adjust VR by turning it clockwise. If adjustment
-6%＞i
When No. 7 of DSW2 is turned on
cannot be done even when turning VR fully
clockwise, turn off No.5 of DSW2, and adjust VR
by turning it counterclockwise.
Adjust VR by turning it clockwise. If adjustment
i＞6%
When No. 7 of DSW2 is turned off
cannot be done even when turning VR fully
clockwise, turn off No.5 of DSW2, and adjust VR
by turning it counterclockwise.
When No. 7 of DSW2 is turned on
Adjust VR by turning it counterclockwise.
Table (17)-④
Perform scan in (16) again when VR12 ~ VR15 was adjusted, and make sure that the values in f ~ i are
within a range where no adjustment is necessary.
(18) Make sure that SW10 of RXCPU PCB is turned on again (LED26 (FSD_ON) lights).
3－82
L2E-BW1444
3.13 Detector side collimator (Post Patient Collimator - PPC) position adjustment
The positioning method of the detector side collimator (Post Patient Collimator hereafter referred to as PPC) used
for sub-milli slice measurement is described below.
Execute this item without fail in the following cases
・ When the collimator was removed in special disassembly, etc., before delivering the system ;
・ When the PPC was mounted again after removing it once and mounting the detector in case of
the system where the detector was removed in special disassembly, etc. before delivering the
system
Before starting this work, it is necessary that PPC has been mounted in 1.6.2 and especially,
coarse adjustment of PPC has been done in 1.6.2 (5).
(1) Set the scan conditions on the maintenance scan conditions setting panel as shown below and then, press
Confirm
switch.
Items
Set values
1
75
120
3
0.75mm
2i
STAY
0
Any
Auto
Any
2
Manual
First
Any
Any
OFF
Any
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
3
0
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
No. of scans
Tube current (mA)
Tube voltage (kV)
Scan time (s)
Image slice thickness (mm)
Image mode
Direction
Table index (mm)
F.O.V. (mm)
Inter-scan time (s)
Inter-sequence delay (s)
No. of images
Start mode
Reconstruction mode
Upper WW / WL
Lower WW / WL
Stationary scan
Filter/image filter
B.H.C.
B.G.C.
Phantom correction
ADPP (measurement)
ADPP (reconfiguration)
Scattered ray correction
Variation code
Bias
CT number adjustment
Large attenuation correction
Image ring correction
P.P.C.
(Note) For the items indicated as [option], their set values at that time may be used as they are.
3－83
L2E-BW1444
(2) After the system has been set to be ready for measurement,
pressing
START
START
key flickers. Perform scanning by
key.
(3) Display the Raw Data scanned in (2) above by Raw Data analysis, and select OPR out of the analysis menu
(See the left figure shown below) Another window opens to indicate the OPR calculation results (See the
right figure shown below).
Set the OPR values (%) of channels 11 ~ 20 as OPR (11-20),
the OPR values (%) of channels 444 ~ 453 as OPR (444 ~ 453)
and the OPR values (%) of channels 877 ~ 886 as OPR (877 ~ 886)
(For the definition of OPR values, refer to 3.12 Focus shift detector (FSD) adjustment (7)).
(4) PPC position adjustment ends when each OPR value is as specified below
-5% ≦OPR (444 - 453) ≦+5%
and
｜OPR (11~ 20) - OPR ( 877 ~ 886)｜≦5%
3－84
L2E-BW1444
(5) Adjust the PPC position finely according to Table 3.13.1 and < Fine adjusting method of PPC position>.
OPR (444 - 453) changes about 5% when moving the stopper by 0.1mm in Fig.3.13.1.
Table 3.13.1 OPR value codes and stoppers to be adjusted
OPR value (%) codes
OPR(11-20)
OPR(444-453)
OPR(877-886)
Positive
Positive
Positive
Positive
Positive
Negative
Positive
Negative
Positive
Magnitude relation between
Stoppers to be adjusted and moving directions
|OPR (11-20)|and|OPR (877-886)|
(as viewed from the table side)
|OPR(11-20)| ≧ |OPR(877-886)|
Move the left stopper toward the table
|OPR(11-20)| ＜ |OPR(877-886)|
Move the right stopper toward the table
－
Move the left stopper toward the table
|OPR(11-20)| ≧ |OPR(877-886)|
Move the right stopper toward the rotary panel
|OPR(11-20)| ＜ |OPR(877-886)|
Move the left stopper toward the rotary panel
Positive
Negative
Negative
－
Move the right stopper toward the rotary panel
Negative
Positive
Positive
－
Move the right stopper toward the table
|OPR(11-20)| ≧ |OPR(877-886)|
Move the right stopper toward the table
Negative
Positive
Negative
|OPR(11-20)| ＜ |OPR(877-886)|
Move the left stopper toward the table
－
Move the left stopper toward the rotary panel
|OPR(11-20)| ≧ |OPR(877-886)|
Move the left stopper toward the rotary panel
|OPR(11-20)| ＜ |OPR(877-886)|
Move the right stopper toward the rotary panel
Negative
Negative
Positive
Negative
Negative
Negative
3－85
L2E-BW1444
＜Fine adjusting method of PPC position＞
(1) Make sure that the PPC is set to the rotary panel side (position just above the X-ray incident window of
detector). If the PPC is not positioned on the rotary panel side, move the PPC toward the rotary panel
electrically by scanning under the condition in step (1).
(2) Mount the dial gauge (attachment to scanner) by M6 x 14L sems screw. Set the dial gauge scale division
to zero. (See Fig.3.13.1)
(3) Adjust the collimator finely up to the aimed position according to the following procedure, while reading
the dial gauge.
1) Loosen bolts (*1) and nut (*2).
2) Position the collimator by moving the stopper while turning the bolt (*3) clockwise or counterclockwise.
For the relation between the turning direction of the bolt and the moving direction of the collimator, see
Table 3.13.2.
3) Fasten bolt (*1). Then, fasten nut (*2) to fix the collimator position.
4) Make sure that the dial gauge value indicates an aimed value. If deviated, repeat steps (1) ~ (3) again.
Dial gauge (attached to scanner)
(Mounted by M6 x 14L sems screw)
Rotary panel
Rotary panel direction
Table direction
M4 x 40L hexagon socket head bolt (*3)
Stopper
M4 nut (*2)
2-M4 x 12L hexagon socket head bolt (*1)
(spring, plain washer)
Fig. 3.13.1
Table 3.13.2
Moving direction of
collimator
1
Table direction
2
Rotary panel direction
（*3）
Turning direction of bolt
Rotating direction of pointer of dial gauge
Clockwise
Counterclockwise rotation (Decreasing direction of numeric value)
Counterclockwise
Clockwise rotation (Increasing direction of numeric value)
3－86
L2E-BW1444
(6) Set the scan conditions on the maintenance scan conditions setting panel as shown below and then, press
Confirm
switch.
Items
No. of scans
Tube current (mA)
Tube voltage (kV)
Scan time (s)
Image slice thickness (mm)
Image mode
Direction
Table index (mm)
F.O.V. (mm)
Inter-scan time (s)
Inter-sequence delay (s)
No. of images
Start mode
Reconstruction mode
Upper WW / WL
Lower WW / WL
Stationary scan
Filter/image filter
B.H.C.
B.G.C.
Phantom correction
ADPP (measurement)
ADPP (reconfiguration)
Scattered ray correction
Variation code
Bias
CT number adjustment
Large attenuation correction
Image ring correction
P.P.C.
Set values
1
75
120
3
0.75mm
2i
STAY
0
Any
Auto
Any
2
Manual
First
Any
Any
OFF
Any
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
3
0
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
(Note) For the items indicated as [option], their set values at that time may be used as they are.
(7) After the system has been set to be ready for measurement,
pressing
START
START
key flickers. Perform scanning by
key.
(8) Display the Raw Data scanned in (2) above by Raw Data analysis, and select OPR out of the analysis menu
(See the left figure).
(9) Make sure that each OPR value is as specified below
-5% ≦OPR (444 - 453) ≦+5%
and｜OPR (11~ 20) - OPR ( 877 ~ 886)｜≦5%
If the OPR value is not within the above range, return to step (5).
Be sure to remove the dial gauge mounted in step (5) after the end of this work.
3－87
L2E-BW1444
3.14 Phantom calibration
3.14.1
Procedure
Perform X-ray warm up (or air calibration) and phantom calibration measurement under
the mounted conditions of the scanner corn cover, lift cover, and X-ray transmission
window for executing calibration under the X-ray conditions during user’s use.
3－88
L2E-BW1444
3.14.2
Mounting method of phantom mounting bracket
(1) Mounting
(a) Turn the knob counterclockwise and loosen fixing plate L under the condition shown below.
Knob
Fixing plate
Fixing plate L
(b) Lift up the phantom mounting bracket and insert the phantom mounting in the
direction until the end bracket touches the tabletop end as illustrated below.
Tabletop
End bracket
3－89
L2E-BW1444
(c) Adjust the fixing plate R to the right edge of tabletop and clip the tabletop by sliding fixing plate L in the
direction.
Turn the knob to fix the phantom mounting bracket.
If the bracket is not fixed properly, the bracket may possibly fall down during the calibration
resulting in the damage of scanner cover.
Knob
Fixing plate
Fixing plate L
Table top
Fixing plate R
3－90
L2E-BW1444
(2) Mounting of phantom
Insert the hole portion of the phantom onto the shaft of the phantom mounting bracket.
Shaft
Phantom
Hole
(3) Adjustment of phantom position
Adjust the phantom position by moving the fine move mounting base. The fine move mounting base moves
toward D, U, L, or R when turning the DU adjusting dial or LR adjusting dial in the indicating directions on
the DU nameplate and LR nameplate.
Dial indication
Moving quantity
Between bold lines (between numeric values)
0.1mm
Between lines (minimum scale division)
0.02mm
DU nameplate
DU adjusting dial
Fine move mounting base
LR adjusting dial
U
L
R
D
LR nameplate
3－91
L2E-BW1444
(4) Phantom angle adjustment
(a) Adjust the phantom angle by turning the knob clockwise to tilt the phantom as illustrated below.
Knob
(b) Keep the phantom perpendicular to the scan face by tilting the phantom with the knob by a deflection
component of the table top as illustrated below.
Horizontal direction
Tabletop
Angle
adjustment
Deflection of table top
3－92
L2E-BW1444
(5) Removal
Loosen the knob to make the fixing plate L free to move, and slide the fixing plate L outward. Remove the
phantom mounting bracket from the tabletop.
Knob
Fixing plate L
Tabletop
Fixing plate L
For storing the phantom mounting bracket, store it after grounding the insertion part of the
phantom as illustrated below.
3－93
L2E-BW1444
3.14.3
X-ray detection system warming up
Table 3.14.1 shows the required time from turning the power supply for temperature controller of
Detector and preamplifier power supply to be ready for calibration. With a longer warm-up time,
better results may be expected. When it is necessary for any work to turn off the power supply, the off
time should be as short as possible.
Table 3.14.1 Required time from turning on the power supplies to be ready for calibration
Power supplies
Required time to be ready for calibration
Power supply for temperature controller of
Detector
Preamplifier power supply
3.14.4
Longer than 4 hours after power supply has been turned on.
(Keep power been fed normally.)
Longer than 2 hours after turning on the power supply.
X-ray tube warm up and air calibration
If it has passed longer than 2 hours after the latest X-ray exposure, perform continuous operation [(1)
described later] of X-ray tube warm up and air calibration before starting the other measurement. If
the phantom calibration is done within 2 hours after the latest X-ray exposure, observe the “caution” in
(1.5).
The X-ray tube warm up and air calibration can be operated systematically by
Warm up
in the
measurement main menu on the operation panel.
Since the air calibration is executed in protocol mode during continuous operation of warm
up and air calibration, the air calibration conforming to the [combinations of X-ray tube
voltage and slice thickness] being entered in the measurement protocol. If air calibration
is necessary under the other conditions, execute it in the calibration select mode ((2)
described later).
3－94
L2E-BW1444
(1) Continuous operation of X-ray tube warm up and air calibration.
(1.1) Make sure that none of tabletop, phantoms, etc. is present in the gantry aperture.
(1.2) If the maintenance scan is not displayed on the measurement main menu on the operation panel,
display it according to 5.1. and enter the patient newly.
Be careful since the maintenance warm up cannot be selected in (1.4) without this display.
(1.3) Select
Warm up
in the measurement main menu on the operation panel, and display the mode
selection menu.
(1.4) Select the maintenance warm up and click
Confirm
button.
Air calibration before phantom calibration must be executed under the stable condition
(normal condition) of the elongation of the anode axis of X-ray tube.
Maintenance
warm up is executed to realize the normal condition for executing air calibration. Keep
the anode accumulated heating quantity to be within a range of 43 ~ 75% after executing
the maintenance warm up until all necessary phantom calibration measurement ends.
(1.5) When the system is ready for measurement,
switch.
START
switch flickers. Press the
START
Now, the X-ray tube warm up and air calibration in protocol mode are executed
automatically.
If air calibration under the conditions other than protocol mode is necessary, perform necessary air
calibration in the calibration select mode.
If it has passed shorter than 2 hours after the latest X-ray exposure, execute the
following procedure.
(1) Carry out 120kV, 200mA, 2s, 1.25mm×4 slice thickness continuous scan until
anode accumulated heating quantity ≧90%.
(2) Continue scanning after (1) to continue the condition of anode accumulated heating
quantity ≧85% for longer than 12 minutes before executing (3).
(3) Start air calibration when the anode accumulated heating quantity has become
within a range of 43 ~ 58% after about 10 minutes pause.
Keep the anode accumulated heating quantity within a range of 43~ 75% hereafter until
all necessary phantom calibration ends.
3－95
L2E-BW1444
(2) Air calibration (select mode)
(2.1) Make sure that none of tabletop, phantoms, etc. is present in the gantry aperture.
(2.2) Select
Warm up
in the measurement main menu on the operation panel, and display the mode
selection menu.
(2.3) Select a desired tube voltage and slice thickness, and click
(2.4) After the system has become ready for measurement,
START
3.14.5
Confirm
START
button.
switch flickers. Press the
switch. Now, the air calibration is done under the selected conditions.
Phantom position adjustment and phantom calibration
Be sure to carry out the air calibration under the relevant conditions before starting the phantom
calibration.
Perform the air calibration after setting the X-ray tube to the normal condition according to
3.14.4 (1). Keep the tube rating to be within a range of 43 ~ 75% until all necessary
phantom calibration measurement ends.
(1) If [Adjust / Calib.] is not displayed in the measurement main menu, display [Adjust / Calib.] button
and newly enter the patient according to 5.1.
(2) Adjust the calibration phantom position.
(2.1) Click [Adjust / Calib.] button of the main menu to display the phantom calibration CT value
adjustment screen.
(2.2) Select [Phantom calibration] tab of the phantom calibration CT value adjustment screen,
and display the [phantom position adjustment] face.
3－96
L2E-BW1444
(2.3) Set the phantom to be measured to the center of the gantry opening (Use phantoms sequentially
starting with smaller ones). Set the projection line (for slice face) of the projector to be in parallel
with the phantom by the angle adjusting knob of the phantom mounting bracket. Four kinds of
phantoms are provided as shown in Table 3.14.1.
Table 3.14.2 Kinds of phantoms used for phantom calibration
Phantom
Measuring F.O.V of phantom position adjusting scan
(mm) (Not changeable)
φ230 polyethylene
250
φ260 polyethylene
300
φ350 polyethylene
420
φ410 polyethylene
420
(2.4) Select a phantom size to be measured out of the pull down list and click
(2.5) After the system has become ready for measurement,
START
START
Confirm
button.
switch flickers.
Press the
switch Now, the phantom position adjustment scan of the selected phantom is executed.
(2.6) When the phantom position adjustment scan is done, a phantom moving indicating value is displayed
in the moving quantity indicating column.
(2.7) Move the phantom by using the dial of the phantom mounting bracket according to the displayed
phantom moving indicating value.
(2.8) Repeat steps (2.4) ~ (2.7) until the phantom moving indicating value becomes less than 0.1mm in the
vertical and lateral directions. When this value becomes less than 0.1mm in the vertical and lateral
directions, the [Measurement] button is displayed as shown in the following figure, and “within a
specification” is displayed below the moving quantity indicating column.
3－97
L2E-BW1444
(3) Measure the phantom calibration.
(3.1) After the end of phantom position adjustment, click [Measurement] button to display the [phantom
calibration measurement] face as shown in the following figure.
(3.2) Select the measuring condition by clicking the cell of phantom calibration measurement executing
condition (combination of X-ray tube voltage and collimation), and click
Confirm
button. A
check mark is indicated in the clicked measuring condition cell.
(3.3) After the system has been ready for measurement,
START
switch flickers. Press
START
switch, and the phantom calibration is executed under the selected condition.
Perform the phantom calibration calculation after measuring the phantoms of all
diameters (See Table 3.14.2). Calculation cannot be executed every phantom.
3－98
L2E-BW1444
(4) Perform phantom calibration calculation.
(4.1) Display the following [phantom calibration calculation] by clicking [Calculation] button.
(4.2) Click the cell of executing conditions of calculation (combination of X-ray tube voltage and
collimation). A check mark is displayed in the clicked cell.
If a non-measurement condition is present, the calculation condition is displayed gray and conditions
are not selectable.
(4.3) Calculate the phantom calibration data by clicking [Calculate] button. If an error occurs halfway in
the course of calculation, the following window appears and the phantom calibration data calculation
is stopped.
An error display example
If an error occurs halfway in the course of calculation, measure the phantom calibration
under the relevant condition from the beginning, and calculate again.
For erasing the error display window, click
3－99
OK
button by the left key of mouse.
L2E-BW1444
(4.4) At the end of calculation, make sure that the data selected in (4.3) are displayed as “Calculated ”in the
[Remarks] column of the date and time information list, and terminate the measurement and
calculation of phantom calibration by clicking [Exam. End] button by the left click of mouse.
Date and time information list
The following contents are displayed in the remarks column of the day and time information list
depending upon the calculation date and time and measuring date and time.
“Un-measuring”
: Data not measured yet
“Calculation required” : Data measured but not calculated yet
“Calculated”
: Data whose calculation date and time are later than the measurement date
and time
“Completed”
: Calculated data
(5) Check phantom calibration data
(5.1) After clicking [System / Exit] button of the main menu, select [Maintenance] →[Services]→[Raw
Data Analysis] out of the displayed menu, and start Raw Data analysis.
3－100
L2E-BW1444
(5.2) Select [Open]→[Cal. Data] out of the [File] menu on the Raw Data analysis window, and display the
Cal. Data Selection dialog.
(5.3) Select Phantom Cal. Data of Cal. Data Selection dialog, select the X-ray tube voltage condition of
Cal. Data to be displayed, and display the PLP setting dialog by clicking [OK] button.
3－101
L2E-BW1444
(5.4) Select a desired display condition in PLP Setting screen, and click [OK] button. Selected phantom
calibration data are displayed in PLP window.
(5.5) After the selected data graph has been displayed on the PLP window, click
Max./Min.
of PLP
window by the left key of mouse to set the graph to the Max./Min. display condition.
A display example of phantom calibration data alpha
3－102
L2E-BW1444
A display example of phantom calibration data beta
(5.6) Make sure that no abnormal irregularity is detected in the calibration data graph. If any, repeat the
procedure starting with air calibration (3.14.4). If abnormality cannot be eliminated yet, check the
hardware.
An example of abnormal data
(5.7) Select [Exit] from [File] menu to close the Raw Data analysis window.
(6) Execute all necessary phantom calibration.
3－103
L2E-BW1444
3.15 CT number adjustment
3.15.1
Procedure
(1) Scan all water phantoms (See table 3.15.1) by using the CT number adjustment scan under the
combined conditions of X-ray tube voltage to be adjusted and the collimation.
(2) Calculate CT number adjusting parameter by inputting the combined conditions of X-ray tube
voltage measured in (1) and collimation in [Calculate] of CT number adjustment calculation
program.
(3) Check the CT number at the center of water phantoms by executing the image reconstruction in the
post reconstruction using Raw Data of the water phantoms measured in CT number adjustment
scan, and check the CT number at the water phantom center (Radius of measuring R.O.I is 75
pixels in X and Y). If the CT number is deviated from 0±4, repeat the procedure from the CT
number adjustment scan of the corresponding water phantom.
Start
Scan water phantom by
“CT number adjustment scan”
Calculate CT number adjustment parameter
by “CT number adjustment calculation”
Check CT number by
reconstruction
N.G.
O.K.
End
Fig.3.15.1
Execute CT number adjustment scan under the mounted condition of scanner cone cover,
lift cover, and X-ray transmission window for the purpose of adjusting the CT number
under the X-ray conditions during user’s use.
3－104
L2E-BW1444
3.15.2
CT number adjustment scan
(1) If [CT number adjustment scan] is not displayed in the measurement main menu on the operation
panel, display [CT number adjustment scan] according to 5.1 and newly enter the patient.
(2) Adjust the water phantom position.
(2.1) Click [Adjust / Calib.] button of the main menu to display the phantom calibration CT
number adjustment screen.
(2.2) Select [CT No. Adjust] tab of the phantom calibration / CT number adjustment screen, and
display the [phantom position adjustment] face.
(2.3) Set the phantom to be measured to the center of the gantry opening (Use phantoms
sequentially starting with smaller ones). Set the projection line (for slice face) of the
projector to be in parallel with the phantom by the angle adjusting knob of the phantom
mounting bracket. Four kinds of phantoms are provided as shown in Table 3.15.1.
Table 3.15.1 Kinds of phantoms used for phantom calibration
Phantom
Measuring F.O.V of phantom position adjusting scan
(mm) (Not changeable)
φ210 water
250
φ230 water (*1)
300
φ305 water
420
φ380 water (*2)
420
(*1) Used only for 0.75mm x 2 and 1.25mm x 4 collimation.
(*2) Not used for 0.75mm x 2 and 1.25mm x 4 collimation.
(2.4) Select a phantom size to be measured out of the pull down list and click Confirm button.
3－105
L2E-BW1444
(2.5) After the system has become ready for measurement,
the
START
START
switch flickers. Press
switch. Now, the phantom position adjustment scan of the selected
phantom is executed.
(2.6) When the phantom position adjustment scan is done, a phantom moving indicating value is
displayed in the moving quantity indicating column.
(2.7) Move the phantom by using the dial of the phantom mounting bracket according to the
displayed phantom moving indicating value.
(2.8) Repeat steps (2.4) ~ (2.7) until the phantom moving indicating value becomes less than
5mm in the vertical and lateral directions. When this value becomes less than 5mm in the
vertical and lateral directions, the [Measurement] button is displayed as shown in the
following figure and “within a specification” is displayed below the phantom moving
indicating column.
3－106
L2E-BW1444
(3) Perform CT number adjustment scan.
(3.1) After the end of phantom position adjustment, click [Measurement] button to display the [CT number
adjustment measurement] face as shown in the following figure.
(3.2) Select the measuring condition by clicking the cell of CT number adjusting scan executing condition
(combination of X-ray tube voltage and collimation), and click [Confirm] button. A check mark is
indicated in the clicked measuring condition cell. Non-required measuring conditions are displayed
light to be not selectable.
(3.3) After the system has been ready for measurement,
START
switch flickers. Press
START
switch, and the CT number adjustment scan is executed under the selected condition.
Perform the CT number adjustment calculation after calculating all necessary water
phantoms by CT number adjustment scan in the X-ray tube voltage and collimation to
which the execution of CT number adjustment is desired.
3－107
L2E-BW1444
3.15.3
Perform CT number adjustment calculation
(1) By clicking [Calculation], the following window is displayed for selecting the X-ray tube voltage
and collimation.
(2) Click the cell of executing conditions of calculation (combination of X-ray tube voltage and
collimation). A check mark is displayed in the clicked cell.
If a non-measurement phantom is present, the calculation condition is displayed gray to be not
selectable.
(3) Calculate the CT number adjusting parameter by clicking [Calculate] button.
If an error occurs halfway in the course of calculation, the following window appears and the CT
number adjusting parameter calculation is stopped.
An error display example
If an error occurs halfway in the course of calculation, measure the CT number
adjustment scan under the relevant condition from the beginning, and calculate again.
For erasing the error display window, click
3－108
OK
key by the left switch of the mouse.
L2E-BW1444
(4) At the end of calculation, make sure that the data selected in (3) are displayed as “Completed ”in the
[Remarks] column of the day and time information list, and terminate the CT number measurement
calculation by clicking [Exam. End] button by clicking the left key of mouse.
The following contents are displayed in the remarks column of the day and time information list depending
upon the calculation date and time and measuring date and time.
“Un-measuring”
: Data not measured yet
“Calculation required” : Data measured but not calculated yet
“Calculated”
: Data whose calculation date and time are later than the measurement date and time
“Completed”
: Calculated data
(5) Check the CT number. Check the water CT number after CT number adjustment calculation processing by
using Raw Data of the water phantom measured by CT number adjustment scan.
(5.1) Perform post reconstruction by using Raw Data (measured by CT number adjustment scan in 3.15.2)
of the water phantom requiring the water CT number check, and a CT number -adjusted water
phantom image is obtained. Set the post reconstruction conditions as specified below.
Items
Set values
FOV
Mag
FOV.X, FOV.Y
Filter
BGC, BHC
Recon. Type
See Table 3.15.1
1
0, 0
4 (Abdomen Standard)
OFF
Normal
3－109
L2E-BW1444
(5.2) Measure a mean CT number (MEAN) in ROI by setting the circular R.O.I of 75 pixels in radius to the
center of the post-reconstructed water phantom image, and make sure that the mean value is 0.0±4.0.
If this mean value does not enter the 0.0±4.0 range, repeat the above operation starting from 3.15.2
[CT number adjustment scan].
If the mean value does not enter the 0.0±4.0 range even if the operation is repeated from the CT
number adjustment scan, execute the air calibration under the relevant condition (combination of
X-ray tube voltage and collimation), and then, perform the CT number adjustment scan, CT number
adjustment calculation, and CT number check.
(6) Perform the CT number adjustment scan, CT number adjustment calculation, and CT number check about all
necessary conditions (combinations of X-ray tube voltage and collimation).
To make it possible to recover the system at an earlier time in case of software crash, be
sure to make service backup after phantom calibration or CT number adjustment.
3－110
L2E-BW1444
3.16 Interphone (intercommunication) check
(1) Operation room → scanner room
(1-1) Microphone volume adjustment
The sound in the operation room is sent to the scanner room by pressing
TALK
Adjust the sound
volume by “TALK” control knob on the operation panel of the interphone box or by “OC→
GANTRY” control knob on the rear panel, if “TALK” control knob is not mounted on the operation
panel.
(1-2) Auto voice volume adjustment
Adjust the auto volume by “A VOICE” control knob on the operation panel
or by “A.V OC→GANTRY” control knob on the rear panel, if “A. VOICE ” control knob is not
mounted on the operation panel. Adjust the control knob to an-easy-use position.
By pressing
TALK
, the sound from the scanner room is automatically reduced to a low
tone. .
(2) Scanner room → operation room
Adjust the sound volume by “AUDIO” or “VOL” control knob on the operation panel of the interphone box
Make sure that the sound volume is adjustable.
3－111
L2E-BW1444
3.17 Institution info. settings
Set the institution information according to the following procedure.
(1) A institution info. settings window is displayed by selecting [System / Exit] – [Settings / Registration] –
[Institution Info. Settings].
(2) Input the hospital name, department name, and station name, and then, click [Complete] button.
3－112
L2E-BW1444
3.18 Computer name change
If Presto system is connected to two or more LAN, change the computer name of the 2nd and subsequent
systems according to the following procedure.
Respective systems can be identified from each other by changing the computer name.
Settings including LAN card setting for DICOM transmission and filming, and LAN card setting
for remote service will not be restored.
Be sure to reconfigure them after renaming the computer name.
(1) Disconnect the LAN cable , if it is connected to the 28CN connector on the upper face of the computer.
(2) Turn on the system power supply.
(3) Switch the mode to the system maintenance mode. (See 5.11)
(4) Select [Computer name change] from the start menu.
(5) Select a desired computer name to be changed from the computer name selection area on the computer name
and security identifier change screen.
Be careful not to overlap the computer name with that of the other Presto system.
Computer name selection area
Present computer name
3－113
L2E-BW1444
(6) A confirmation screen is displayed. Click [Yes] button if you want to continue the computer name change
processing. By clicking [Yes], the computer name change is started automatically. It takes about 10
minutes to change the computer name.
(7) At the end of the computer name change, an information dialog is displayed Click [OK] button.
(8) Connect LAN cable to 28CN connector.
(9) Start the CT system. (Refer to 5.11 <Reference>)
3－114
L2E-BW1444
3.19 Communication setting
Perform the following entry and setting for executing DICOM transmission and filming.
3.19.1
LAN card setting
(1) Turn on the maintenance mode. (See 5.1)
(2) Restart the CT unit in the system maintenance mode. (See 5.11)
(3) Select [My Network Places] icon on the screen, and right-click the icon. Then, click [Properties] of
pop-up menu.
(4) A network connection screen is displayed. Select local area connection n(*) (device name “corega
Fether PCI-TXS...” , “corega Gether PCI-T32....” or “CG-LAPCIGT2…” , right-click the
connection, and click [Properties] of pop-up menu.
(5) A local area connection n (*) property screen is displayed. Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) of the
General tab.
(6) Click [Properties] button on the property screen.
(7) An Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) property screen is displayed. Select “Next IP address is used (S)”,
and set the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway.
*
For these values, ask the network administrator of this facility.
*
Do not use “172.18.1.*” for the IP address, which is already used between the image
processor and scanner.
*
Don’t change any setting of DNS, WIND, DHCP routing.
(8) Click [OK] button to close the property window of Internet Protocol (TCP/IP).
(9) Click [Close] button to close the property window of the local area connection n(*).
(10) Click [Start] button to select [Start the CT system] from the Start menu, and restart the CT unit.
*
‘n’ denotes numerical value. This value varies, depending on the LAN card which is built in the
CT unit.
3.19.2
Deletion of DICOM transmission software
This operation is not required when no entry of DICOM transmission software exists.
(1) Set the DICOM transmission software CD-ROM in the CD drive.
(2) Click [Image list] button of the main menu and start the image explorer.
(3) Select [Tools] [Option Register…] from the menu of image explorer to display the option entry
dialog box.
(4) Input “e:＼Setup” to the name column of option entry dialog box, and click [OK] button while
pressing Ctrl key.
3－115
L2E-BW1444
(5) A dialog box appears, asking to exit the image explorer. Click [Yes] button.
(6) When the image explorer ends, a DICOM transmission software entry screen is displayed. Click
[Next] button.
(7) A file deletion check dialog screen is displayed. Click [OK] button.
3.19.3
Entry of DICOM transmission software
(1) Set the DICOM transmission software CD-ROM in the CD drive.
(2) Click [Image list] button of the main menu and start the image explorer.
(3) Select [Tools] [Option Register…] from the menu of image explorer to display the option entry
dialog box.
(4) Input “e: ＼Setup” to the name column of option entry dialog box, and click [OK] button while
pressing Ctrl key.
3－116
L2E-BW1444
(5) A dialog box appears, asking to exit the image explorer. Click [Yes] button.
(6) When the image explorer ends, a DICOM transmission software entry screen is displayed. Click
[Next] button.
(7) After the entry of DICOM transmission software has been entered, click [Finish] button.
(8) Start the image explorer by clicking [Image list] button of the main menu, and make sure that the
[DICOM Trans.] icon is displayed.
3－117
L2E-BW1444
3.19.4
Setting of DICOM transmission software
(1) Select an optional patient in the image explorer.
(2) Display the DICOM transmission screen by clicking [DICOM Trans.] icon on the image explorer
or by selecting [File] [Send], and [DICOM Trans.] from the menu.
(3) Click [Settings] button to display the DICOM transmission setting screen.
(4) Click [Destination] tab.
(5) Click [Add] button in the transmission destination setting column.
(6) After setting the following items, click [OK] button, and the transmission destination name is
added to the transmission destination list as illustrated below.
Item names
Dest. Name
AE Title
IP Address
Port No.
Description
Set the transmission destination name.
This set value is either the destination host name or optional name.
Set an AE title of the transmission destination.
For this set value, ask the network administrator of the facilities.
Set the IP address of the transmission destination.
For this set value, ask the network administrator of the facilities.
Set a port number of the transmission destination application.
For this set value, ask the person in charge of the transmission destination
application maker.
(7) Set the following item in local machine setting.
Item names
AE Title
Description
Set the AE title of CT unit Presto or Hyper Quick Net.
For this set value, ask the network administrator of the facilities.
(8) Click [OK] button.
*
Answer “104” if the transmission destination maker asks you the transmission source (CT unit
side) application port number.
In practice, however, OS assigns an optional port number.
3－118
L2E-BW1444
3.19.5
Setting of storage commitment software
The following shows the steps required to execute storage commitment (function to ensure that images
transferred by DICOM transmission are stored normally at the destination)
(1) Choose any one of the patients on the image explorer.
(2) Choose a menu, [File], [Send], and [Storage Commit] on the image explorer. Or choose [File],
[Send], and [Storage Commit] to display storage commitment screen.
(3) Click [Settings] to display storage commitment setting screen.
(4) Click [Destination] tab.
(5) Click [Add] button in the destination setting column.
(6) Set the following items, and click [OK] button.
Item names
Dest. Name
AE Title
IP Address
Port No.
Description
Set the AE title of the destination.
This set value is either the host name, to which storage commitment is to be
transmitted, or optional name.
Set the IP address of the destination.
For this set value, ask the network administrator of the facilities.
Set the IP address of the destination.
For this set value, ask the network administrator of the facilities.
Set the port number of destination application.
For the set value, ask a person in charge of destination application maker.
(7) Set the following item in local machine setting.
Item names
AE Title
Port No.
Description
Set the AE title of CT unit Presto or Hyper Quick Net.
For this set value, ask the network administrator of the facilities.
Set the port number of CT unit Presto or Hyper Quick Net.
Set this value to 104.
(8) Click [OK] button.
This is the end of setting storage commitment.
3－119
L2E-BW1444
3.19.6
Setting of filming software
(1) Select any one of the patients in the image box.
(2) Display the image viewer by clicking [Image viewer] icon of the image explorer.
(3) Display the filming screen by clicking [Filming] button on the image viewer.
(4) In the menu on the filming screen, choose [Tools/Option] to display filming option screen.
(5) Click [Printer] tab.
(6) Click [Add] button in the printer setting column.
(7) After setting the following items, click [OK] button, and the print name is added to the printer list
as shown in the following figure.
Item names
Printer Name
AE Title
IP Address
Port No.
Description
Set a printer name.
This set value is either printer host name or optional name.
Set an AE title of the printer.
For this set value, ask the network administrator of the facilities.
Set the IP address of the printer.
For this set value, ask the network administrator of the facilities.
Set a port number of the printer application.
For this set value, ask the person in charge of the printer maker.
(8) Set the following item in local machine setting.
Item names
AE Title
Description
Set the AE title of CT unit Presto or Hyper Quick Net.
For this set value, ask the network administrator of the facilities.
(9) Click [OK] button.
3－120
L2E-BW1444
3.19.7
Entry of SMPTE pattern
(1) Set the application install disk/SMPTE pattern CD in the CD drive.
(2) Open the image explorer by clicking [Image list] button.
(3) Open the MO drive selection dialog by clicking [Tools | Select MO Drive] of the image explorer.
(4) After clicking the MO drive 2 text box, select “e:” drive from the drive selection box.
(5) Click [OK] button of the select MO drive dialog → “e:” is displayed on the image explorer.
(6) Select “e-image-SMPTE TEST PATTERN” from the image explorer.
(7) Click the right mouse button and select [Send | HD] from the pop up menu.
SMPTE TEST PATTERN image is sent to HD.
(8) Open the select MO drive dialog by clicking [Tools | Select MO Drive] of the image explorer.
(9) Blank the MO drive 2 text box, and click [OK] button.
→“e :”drive is deleted form the image explorer.
(10) Take the application install disk/SMPTE pattern CD out of the CD drive.
3－121
204
L2E-BW1444
Section 4
Reference data
4.1 Stationary scan
(1) If [Maintenance scan] is not displayed in the measurement main menu on the operation panel, display it
according to 5.1.1.
(2) Set 21SW mounted at the front right of the scanner unit to STATIONARY SCAN to set the scanner to be
stationary (See Fig.4.1.1).
Fig. 4.1.1 Stationary method of scanner
(3) Select maintenance scan from the main menu on the operation panel.
(4) After selecting a desired protocol on the operation panel, set the scan conditions to desired values, and click
Confirm
button. Turn on [Stationary scan] item.
No. of scans
Patient table
feed quantity
Gantry
angle
Stationary
scan
Delay
Start mode
Variation
code
Phantom
correction
Bias
Tube current
Tube voltage
Scan time
Slice
thickness
Inter-scan time
Reconfiguration
moment
Large
ADPP
ADPP
Scattered ray CT number
attenuation
(measurement) (reconfiguration) correction adjustment
correction
FOV
Filter
(5) After the system has been set to be ready for measurement,
B.H.C.
START
B.G.C.
switch flickers Press it.
(6) When the stationary scan is not necessary, reset 21SW changed in (2) to NORMAL. (See Fig.4.1.1)
(7) For deleting [Maintenance scan]] from the measurement main menu on the operation panel, observe 5.1.2.
[Maintenance scan] only cannot be deleted, but [phantom calibration], [maintenance scan], and [CT number
adjustment scan] belonging to the service scan are deleted collectively.
4－1
L2E-BW1444
4.2 Detector - preamplifier connectors correspondence table
Channel No.
1～8
Detector
Preamplifier PC board
Device block No.
PC board No.
PC board No.
1
1
1CN
Remarks
17 ~ 24 channels only are used
9～32
2
1
2CN
33～56
3
2
3CN
57～80
4
2
4CN
81～104
5
3
5CN
105～128
6
3
6CN
129～152
7
4
7CN
153～176
8
4
8CN
176～200
9
5
9CN
201～224
10
5
10CN
225～248
11
6
11CN
249～272
12
6
12CN
273～296
13
7
13CN
297～320
14
7
14CN
321～344
15
8
15CN
345～368
16
8
16CN
369～392
17
9
17CN
393～416
18
9
18CN
Left preamplifier termination
417～440
19
10
19CN
1st right preamplifier
441～464
20
10
20CN
448-449ch is the measuring data center
465～488
21
11
21CN
489～512
22
11
22CN
513～536
23
12
23CN
537～560
24
12
24CN
561～584
25
13
25CN
584～608
26
13
26CN
609～632
27
14
27CN
633～656
28
14
28CN
657～680
29
15
29CN
681～704
30
15
30CN
705～728
31
16
31CN
729～752
32
16
32CN
753～776
33
17
33CN
777～800
34
17
34CN
801～824
35
18
35CN
825～848
36
18
36CN
849～872
37
19
37CN
873～896
38
19
38CN
4－2
L2E-BW1444
Combinations of segment outputs and external take-out signals
Mode
Switching
signal
sel 1
sel 2
sel 3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
L
L
L
L
L
H
L
H
H
H
L
L
H
L
H
Use
1.25mm×4
2.5mm×4
3.75mm×4
5mm×4
For check
Seg. e'
Seg. d'
Seg. c'
Seg. b'
Seg. a'
Seg. a
Seg. b
Seg. c
Seg. d
Seg. e
A-GND
A-GND
A-GND
D slice
C slice
B slice
A slice
A-GND
A-GND
A-GND
A-GND
D slice
D slice
C slice
C slice
B slice
B slice
A slice
A slice
A-GND
L
H
L
Special
measurement
D slice
D slice
D slice
C slice
C slice
B slice
B slice
A slice
A slice
A slice
D slice
D slice
C slice
C slice
C slice
B slice
B slice
B slice
A slice
A slice
D slice
C slice
C slice
C slice
C slice
B slice
B slice
B slice
B slice
A slice
C slice
C slice
C slice
C slice
C slice
B slice
B slice
B slice
B slice
B slice
H
H
L
Special
measurement
A-GND
A-GND
D slice
D slice
C slice
B slice
A slice
A slice
A-GND
A-GND
H
H
H
Special
measurement
D slice
D slice
D slice
D slice
C slice
B slice
A slice
A slice
A slice
A slice
Output signal connector pins assignment
Pin No.
Output signal
Pin No.
Output signal
Pin No.
Output signal
Pin No.
Output signal
a1
A-GND
a26
12ch-D
b1
A-GND
b26
12ch-B
a2
24ch-D
a27
12ch-C
b2
24ch-B
b27
12ch-A
a3
24ch-C
a28
11ch-D
b3
24ch-A
b28
11ch-B
a4
23ch-D
a29
11ch-C
b4
23ch-B
b29
11ch-A
a5
23ch-C
a30
10ch-D
b5
23ch-A
b30
10ch-B
a6
22ch-D
a31
10ch-C
b6
22ch-B
b31
10ch-A
a7
22ch-C
a32
9ch-D
b7
22ch-A
b32
9ch-B
a8
21ch-D
a33
9ch-C
b8
21ch-B
b33
9ch-A
a9
21ch-C
a34
8ch-D
b9
21ch-A
b34
8ch-B
a10
20ch-D
a35
8ch-C
b10
20ch-B
b35
8ch-A
a11
20ch-C
a36
7ch-D
b11
20ch-A
b36
7ch-B
a12
19ch-D
a37
7ch-C
b12
19ch-B
b37
7ch-A
a13
19ch-C
a38
6ch-D
b13
19ch-A
b38
6ch-B
a14
18ch-D
a39
6ch-C
b14
18ch-B
b39
6ch-A
a15
18ch-C
a40
5ch-D
b15
18ch-A
b40
5ch-B
a16
17ch-D
a41
5ch-C
b16
17ch-B
b41
5ch-A
a17
17ch-C
a42
4ch-D
b17
17ch-A
b42
4ch-B
a18
16ch-D
a43
4ch-C
b18
16ch-B
b43
4ch-A
a19
16ch-C
a44
3ch-D
b19
16ch-A
b44
3ch-B
a20
15ch-D
a45
3ch-C
b20
15ch-B
b45
3ch-A
a21
15ch-C
a46
2ch-D
b21
15ch-A
b46
2ch-B
a22
14ch-D
a47
2ch-C
b22
14ch-B
b47
2ch-A
a23
14ch-C
a48
1ch-D
b23
14ch-A
b48
1ch-B
a24
13ch-D
a49
1ch-C
b24
13ch-B
b49
1ch-A
a25
13ch-C
a50
A-GND
b25
13ch-A
b50
A-GND
4－3
L2E-BW1444
Device block
(Top View)
Measurement at each slice thickness
1.25mm×4
2.5mm×4
3.75mm×4*
5.0mm×4
D slice
C slice
B slice
1CH
A slice
24CH
Sel 1
Switch selection signal
(Common to the right and left)
D-GND
Sel 1
Sel 2
Sel 3
Vcc
Switch selection signal
connector
(Surface mounting)
b1
b2
b3
b4
Sel 3
D slice
SW’
Outputs are
connected collectively
by 4 segments
C slice
Seg. e'
Seg. d'
a1
a2
a3 a4
Seg. c'
Output signal
connector
(Mounted on the
rear panel)
Output signal
connector
(Surface mounting)
Sel 2
Pin No.
Pin No.
Seg. b'
Seg. a'
Seg. a
Seg. b
Seg. c
Seg. d
Seg. e
b47
b48
b49
b50
a47a48
a49
a50
Outputs are
connected collectively
by 4 segments
B slice
SW
A slice
Sel 1
Sel 2
Sel 3
Segment divisions in channels and external take-out signals
* With the X-ray beam collimation combined,
A,D slices of 3.75mm×4 slice measurement
execute 3.75mm measurement by collecting
the outputs of inner 2 segments out of Seg. e
and Seg. d.
4－4
L2E-BW1444
4.3 Details of service information
The following table shows the service information being displayed on the image taken by Presto.
Items
BG
：Bowel Gas Correction
BH
：Beam Hardening Correction
CA
：Phantom Cal. No
AC
：Air calibration elapsed time
RC
：Reference Covering Correction
PI
：Part Info. (PGA Gain)
OD
：Over Dose
LA
：Large Att. Correction (ADNR)
IC
：Image Ring Correction
AM
：Adaptive-mA
Contents
Indicates bowel gas correction ON/OFF of an image.
0: Bowel gas correction is turned off
1: Bowel gas correction is turned on.
Indicates beam hardening correction ON-OFF of an image.
0: Beam hardening correction is turned off
1: Beam hardening correction is turned on
Indicates the phantom calibration data employed when preparing raw data.
0: Phantom calibration data are not used
1: 230mm phantom calibration data are used
2: 260mm phantom calibration data are used
3: 350mm phantom calibration data are used
4: 410mm phantom calibration data are used
Indicates the elapsed time of air calibration data employed when preparing
raw data.
0: Shorter than 30 minutes
1: Longer than 30 minutes but shorter than 1 hour
2: Longer than 1 hour but shorter than 1 hour and 30 minutes
3: Longer than 1 hour and 30 minutes but shorter than 2 hours
4: Longer than 2 hours but shorter than 2 hours and 30 minutes
5: Longer than 2 hours and 30 minutes but shorter than 3 hours
6: Longer than 3 hours but shorter than 3 hours and 30 minutes
7: Longer than 3 hours and 30 minutes but shorter than 4 hours
8: Longer than 4 hours but shorter than 4 hours and 30 minutes
9: Longer than 4 hours and 30 minutes or air calibration is not executed
E: Air calibration data are abnormal
The elapsed time is calculated every conditions (kV, collimation).
For an image taken at 120kV, 2.5mm x 4 slices , the elapsed time of
120kV, 2.5mm x 4 slice air calibration data is displayed.。
Indicates whether the reference covering correction is executed or not.
0: Reference covering correction is not executed
1: Reference covering correction is executed
Not used in Presto
Indicates whether over X-ray dose was detected or not when preparing raw
data.
0: Over dose X-rays were not detected
1: Over dose X-ays were detected
Indicates whether large attenuation correction (ANDR) was executed or
not when preparing raw data.
0: Large attenuation correction (ADNR) was not executed
1: Large attenuation correction (ADNR) was executed
ON/OFF state of the image ring correction:
0: Image ring correction is OFF.
1: Image ring correction is ON.
ON/OFF state of Adaptive-mA
0: Adaptive-mA is OFF.
1: Adaptive-mA is ON.
4－5
L2E-BW1444
Appendix
How to remove the side cover (Remove 3 screws)
The upper part of the cover is inserted. Draw out the cover downward while pulling the lower part
this side. (This also applies to the opposite side)
Side cover
4－6
210
L2E-BW1444
Section 5
Maintenance software
5.1 Maintenance mode ON/OFF
5.1.1
Maintenance mode ON
(1) Click [System/Exit] button of main menu, and select [Maintenance] - [Maintenance Mode
ON/OFF] from the displayed menu.
(2) A confirmation message is displayed as shown in the following figure. Click [Yes] button.
(3) When the maintenance mode is turned on, [Mainte. Scan] button and [Adjust / Calib.] button are
displayed in the main menu. Also, [Settings] and [Services] are displayed in the sub-menu of
[Maintenance].
5.1.2
Maintenance mode OFF
After clicking [System / Exit] button of the main menu, select [Maintenance] - [Maintenance Mode
ON/OFF] from the displayed menu.
5－1
L2E-BW1444
5.2 Maintenance settings
[Settings] is displayed as a sub-menu of [System / Exit]-[Maintenance] when the maintenance mode is turned on.
From [Settings] menu, the date / time setting, study number setting and system configuration settings can be
started.
5.3 Date / time setting
A date and time change may affect the HU value.
Change it after making sure that the HU is set to 0%.
If a time zone is changed, HU may keep 100% more than in 10 hours.
In that case, initialize HU to 0% (see Appendix 2).
(1) A date and time property window is displayed by selecting [System / Exit] - [Maintenance] - [Settings] [Date / Time Setting].
(2) Set the Date & Time and Time Zone, and click [OK] button.
5.4 Study number setting
(1) A study number setting screen is displayed by selecting [System / Exit] - [Maintenance] - [Settings] - [Study
No. Setting].
(2) Input a study number and click [Save & Exit] button.
5－2
L2E-BW1444
5.5 System configuration settings
REFERENCE
When service backup data is returned to the system, system configuration setting data which was
set during service backup is automatically selected. “Service Backup” is also added to System Type.
When “Presto” is selected, default data of Presto is selected; when “Service Backup” is selected,
system configuration setting data which was set during service backup is selected. When closing
the screen after executing [Apply], “Service Backup” is removed from the menu.
(1) A system configuration settings window is displayed by selecting [System / Exit] - [Maintenance] [Settings] - [System configuration Settings]. Present set data are displayed with a green check mark on the
window.
(2) For setting items, see Appendix 1. Items of System Configuration Setting.
(3) A setting execution check message is displayed by clicking [Apply] button.
(4) Setting is executed by clicking [Yes] button on the setting execution check message, and a green check mark
showing the present set condition is displayed to the set data.
(5) Click [Close] button.
(6) When setting is executed, a message “Please shut the system down, and then restart.” is displayed. Click
[OK] button and then, start the system again.
5－3
L2E-BW1444
5.6 Maintenance service
When the maintenance mode is turned on, [Service] is displayed as a sub-menu of [System / Exit] [Maintenance]. From the [Service] menu, Raw Data Analysis, check, error list display, service backup, and
system maintenance mode can be started.
5.7 Raw Data Analysis
5.7.1
Introduction
Raw Data Analysis function is provided to analysis raw data picked up by the CT unit and execute the
adjustment and maintenance of the CT unit. Raw Data Analysis comprises the following analytical
items.
(1) PTD
Displays data value at an optional point designated on the displayed raw data.
(2) PLD
Displays numerically the data corresponding to an optional projection designated on the displayed
raw data.
(3) CHD
Displays numerically the data corresponding to an optional channel designated on the displayed
raw data.
(4) PLP
Displays profile data corresponding to an optional projection designated on the displayed raw data.
(5) CHP
Displays profile data corresponding to an optional channel designated on the displayed raw data.
(6) PLC
Calculates and displays the maximum value, minimum value, (maximum value - minimum value),
mean value, variance, and standard deviation every projection (data of all channels) over a range
of all projections of displayed raw data.
(7) CHC
Calculates and displays the maximum value, minimum value, (maximum value - minimum value),
mean value, variance, and standard deviation every channel (displayed all projection data)) over a
range of an optional channel of displayed raw data.
(8) CLB
This is used for centering of the collimator. It indicates a lateral deviation of the collimator as an
output difference between the first half channels and the latter half channels.
5－4
L2E-BW1444
(9) VCK
Calculates the maximum value- minimum value and standard deviation every all channels (all
measuring projection channels) after setting threshold values about maximum value - minimum
value and standard deviation, and displays channel numbers and calculation results if these
calculated values exceed preset threshold values. This is normally used for vibration check.
(10) FCE
Enters and deletes defective channels.
(11) OPR
Indicates a deviation in the slice direction of beams by an output difference of AB slices and CD
slices. This is used for beam adjustment.
(12) ADP
Displays profile of tube current value of Raw data.
(13) CACK
Starts this processing after indicating raw data obtained by measuring the attached adjusting rod of
the system. This is used for adjusting the X-ray tube position.
5.7.2
Raw Data Analysis start
A Raw Data Analysis screen is displayed by selecting [System / Exit] - [Maintenance] - [Services] [RawData Analysis].
5.7.3
5.7.3.1
Opening data
Raw data
(1) A raw data selection screen is displayed by selecting [File｜Open｜Raw Data] from the menu. A
patient information list is displayed at the upper part, while a raw data list of the patient is
displayed at the lower part.
(2) By clicking [OK] button after selecting desired raw data to be displayed, the selected raw data are
displayed.
5－5
L2E-BW1444
5.7.3.2
Air calibration data
(1) By selecting [File｜Open｜Cal. Data] from the menu, a Cal. Data Selection screen is displayed.
(2) Selected air calibration data are displayed by clicking [OK] button after selecting the air
calibration data and tube voltage of air calibration data to be displayed on the Cal. Data Selection
screen.
5.7.3.3
Phantom profile
(1) A Cal .Data Selection screen is displayed by selecting [File｜Open｜Cal. Data] from the menu.
(2) A PLP setting screen is displayed by clicking [OK] button after selecting the phantom profile and
the tube voltage of the phantom profile to be displayed on the Cal. Data Selection screen.
5－6
L2E-BW1444
(3) By clicking [OK] button after selecting the collimation and phantom size on the PLP setting screen,
a red line is displayed on the selected phantom profile and a profile in the view direction is
displayed on the PLP screen.
5.7.3.4
Phantom calibration data
(1) A Cal. Data Selection screen is displayed by selecting [File｜Open｜Cal. Data] from the menu.
(2) A PLP setting screen is displayed by clicking [OK] button after selecting phantom profiles and
phantom calibration data to be displayed on the Cal. Data Selection screen.
5－7
L2E-BW1444
(3) By clicking [OK] button after selecting the collimation, alpha/beta, and phantom size on the PLP
Setting screen, a red line is displayed to the selected phantom calibration data and a profile in the
view direction is displayed on the PLP screen.
5.7.4
Closing data
The present displayed Raw Data / Cal. Data are closed by selecting [File｜Close] from the menu.
5－8
L2E-BW1444
5.7.5
Raw Data Analysis end
The Raw Data analysis screen is closed by selecting [File｜Exit] from the menu.
5.7.6
Raw Data Analysis screen function
5.7.6.1
A change of window width and window level
5.7.6.2
For changing the window width and window level, input values to W/W, W/L text box.
Slice data selection
5.7.7
For selecting slice data, click a radio switch of a desired slice (A,B,C, or D) to be displayed.
Analysis menu
Selected analysis can be done when selecting [Analysis] from the menu and displaying a check mark by
clicking the sub-menu after displaying raw data or calibration data. Analysis ends when deleting the
check mark by clicking the sub-menu again.
*
For CACK, refer to 5.8.8.
(1) PTD
By selecting PTD, a task bar is displayed at the lower part of the Raw Data Analysis screen. By
clicking at an optional position, a red cross caret flickers at the clicked position and coordinates
(channel, view) and data value are displayed in the status bar.
5－9
L2E-BW1444
(2) PLD
A PLD screen is displayed by selecting PLD. By clicking an optional position on the Raw Data
Analysis screen, a red line is displayed on the selected view and data in the channel direction to the
selected view are displayed.
(3) CHD
A CHD screen is displayed by selecting CHD. By clicking an optional position on the Raw Data
Analysis screen, a red line is displayed in the selected channel and data in the view direction to the
selected channel are displayed.
5－10
L2E-BW1444
(4) PLP
A PLP screen is displayed by selecting PLP.
By clicking an optional position on the Raw Data Analysis screen, a red line is displayed on the
selected view and a profile in the view direction is displayed on the PLP screen.
By pressing the left button of the mouse on the desired data to be observed on the PLP screen, a
red line is displayed on the selected channel, and channel number and data are displayed in the
status bar.
5－11
L2E-BW1444
(5) CHP
A CHP screen is displayed by selecting CHP.
By clicking an optional position on the Raw Data Analysis screen, a red line is displayed in the
selected channel, and data in the channel direction are displayed on the CHP screen.
By pressing the left button of the mouse on the desired data to be observed on the CHP screen, a
red line is displayed on the selected view, and view and data are displayed in the status bar.
(6) PLC
By selecting PLC, the maximum value, minimum value, (maximum value - minimum value), mean
value, variance, and standard deviation every projection of displayed raw data are displayed on the
PLC screen.
5－12
L2E-BW1444
(7) CHC
By selecting CHC, the maximum value, minimum value, (maximum value - minimum value), mean
value, variance, and standard deviation of the displayed raw data are displayed on the CHC screen.
(8) CLB
By selecting CLB, a profile obtained by averaging all views of displayed raw data is displayed on
the CLB screen.
Averages of 11 channels at the right side region and 10 channels at the center region and errors of
the left side region and right side region are displayed on the Compensator Balance screen. The
Compensator Balance screen is closed by clicking [Close] button.
5－13
L2E-BW1444
(9) VCK
By selecting VCK, a list of the maximum value- minimum value profile (Diff. profile) and
standard deviation profile (SD profile) of all channels of displayed raw data, and the maximum
value, minimum value, (maximum value - minimum value), mean value, variance, and standard
deviation of the channel number exceeding the default set threshold value are displayed on the
VCK screen. A set threshold value is displayed to respective profiles by a dotted line. By
clicking [Diff. Profile], [SD Profile], or [Error List] button, whether Diff. Profile, SD Profile, and
Error List are displayed or not can be clicked.
A dotted line showing a threshold value on the error list and profiles is updated by clicking
[Check] button after inputting a desired threshold value to be changed to the Diff or SD text box
and then, selecting the slice (A, B, C, or D) radio button.
By clicking [All Check] button. all slices are checked to update the error list. Also, whether an
error exists in each slice or not is displayed in the Vibration Influence screen.
5－14
L2E-BW1444
(10) FCE
By selecting FCE, entered defective channels are displayed on the FCE screen. For entering a
defective channel, input the channel number to be entered into the text box, select the slice (A, B,
C, D or All) radio button, and then, click [Entry] button. The number of entry-enable defective
channels is max. 8 channels in the total of A~ D slices and maximum 8 channels in all slices.
For deleting a defective channel, input the channel number to be deleted to the text box, select the
slice (A, B, C, D or All) radio button, and click [Delete] button.
When clicking [Close] button while the defective channel is entered, the following message is
displayed, asking to turn off Adaptive-mA function in system configuration setting.
If FCE registration is made in the range from 17CH to 88CH, Adaptive-mA control
may not normally be carried out. In this case, turn OFF Adaptive-mA in the system
configuration setting. Please be requested to repair it immediately.
In case of defective preamplifier, you may temporarily replace the relevant pc board
with the both edge. However, special care should be paid to Ref. CH,
(11) OPR
By selecting OPR, a difference between a mean output of AB slices of individual 10 channels in
the left region, right region, and center region and a mean output of CD slices and a mean output
of each slice are displayed in the OPR screen.
5－15
L2E-BW1444
(12) ADP
By selecting ADP, tube current values of each view are displayed on ADP screen. When
left-clicking on the data you wish to observe on the ADP screen, a red line is displayed on the
selected view, and the view and data are displayed on the status bar.
(13) [Dfault], [Max./Min.], [Key Input], and [Redisplay] button.
[Dfault], [Max./Min.], [Key Input], and [Redisplay] button are displayed on the profile display
screen.
Each switch functions as follows.
*
Default
Sets the data display range to -32768 ~ 32767.
*
Max./Min.
Sets the data display range to the minimum value and maximum value in the displayed
profile.
*
Key Input
Sets the data display range optionally. By clicking [Key Input] button, the minimum
/maximum value input dialog opens. After inputting a numeric value, click [OK] button, and
the set value is reflected.
*
Redisplay
Redisplays a profile by adjusting the scale of the abscissa to meet the lateral length of the
window when changing the profile screen size.
5－16
L2E-BW1444
5.7.8
CACK
(1) By selecting [Analysis | CACK] from the menu after setting by displacing the attached adjusting
rod of the system within the slice face from the 20 ~ 25 scanner center, a raw data selection screen
is displayed. (CACK cannot be selected when raw data are open.)
5－17
L2E-BW1444
(2) By clicking [Set as Small Focus Data] button after selecting small focus raw data, selected data are
set to small focus data. By clicking [Clear] button, the set data are deleted.
(3) By clicking [Set as Large Focus Data] button after selecting large focus raw data, selected data are
set to large focus data. By clicking [Clear] button, the set data are deleted.
(4) By clicking [OK] button, a trajectory trace of the adjusting rod is displayed. The moving
direction and moving distance of the X-ray tube are also displayed on the Center Alignment screen.
Adjust the X-ray tube position according to these direction and distance.
It is not always necessary to set both small focus and large focus raw data in (2) and
(3). By setting either small focus data or large focus data, the moving direction and
moving distance of X-ray tube can be calculated.
5－18
L2E-BW1444
5.8 Check program
Start the check program by selecting in the order of [System], [Maintenance], [Service], and [Check].
5.8.1
Basic window structure
④ Looping object mark (*)
① Kind of check
③ Check box
② Check menu
⑤ Threshold value
⑥Single unit check start button
⑧Check mark clear button
⑦Looping check start button
⑨End button
① Kind of check
Indicates the kind of check menu.
② Check menu
Indicates the contents of check menu.
③ Check box
Checked menu becomes an object of processing.
④ Looping object mark
Indicates a menu to be able to execute looping check that repeats checking until an error occurs.
⑤ Threshold value
Indicates a threshold value of offset data check. By double- clicking the offset data check menu
column by the mouse, a threshold value setting window is displayed to be ready for setting a
threshold value.
5－19
L2E-BW1444
Threshold value setting screen
⑥
Single unit check start button
Checks the menu being checked to the check box sequentially once from the upper part. A check
progress window is displayed during check.
⑩ Next check start button
⑪ All check end button
Check progress window
When the check ends, a result display window is displayed.
When plural check are selected to execute checking, the present check menu is terminated to start
the next check by ⑩ next check start button. By pressing all check end button ⑪, the present
executing check ends and a result display window is displayed.
⑦
Looping check start button
This button is used to check the menu being checked to the check box sequentially from the upper
part until an error occurs. The check progress window is displayed during check. This button is
the same as in the single unit check basically. However, this switch is not effective if a menu
having no looping object mark ④ is not selected. The result display window indicates the result
to only the check where an error occurs.
⑧
Check mark clear button
Removes check marks in all the check boxes.
⑨
End button
Terminates the check program.
5－20
L2E-BW1444
5.8.2
Preamplifier check
(1) Bus-line data check
Check the test pattern data are read from ROM in preamplifier and the data transfer route to see if
it functions normally.
<Checking method>
Check the check box of [Execute Bus-Line data check] item.
Click single unit check start button ⑥. The check progress window is displayed. A result is
displayed on the check result window at the end of check.
(2) Offset data check
Check if the leak current from the detector and the offset voltage of the integrator in the
preamplifier are within a fixed value, respectively.
<Checking method>
Check [Execute Offset data check] check box. For changing a threshold value, double-click the
[Execute Offset data check] column.
A threshold value setting window is displayed. Input a threshold value and click OK button.
Click single unit check start button ⑥.
After the end of check, a result is displayed in the check result window.
5－21
L2E-BW1444
5.8.3
5.8.3.1
Scanner check
Scanner system check
(1) Communication check
Perform communication check between the scanner and the table as well as between the scanner
and X-ray control unit.
<Checking method>
Check the check box of [Execute Scanner subsystem communication check] item. Click single unit
check start button ⑥.
The check progress window is displayed. After the end of check, a result is displayed in the
check result window.
(2) Timing pulse generation
Generate and stop the timing pulse
<Checking method>
Check the check box of [Execute Scanner timing pulse generation check] item. Click single unit
check start button ⑥.
The check progress window is displayed. A view trigger signal and other control signals are
generated. This check is not terminated automatically. Terminate it by pressing all check end
button ⑩.
After the end of check, a result is displayed in the check result window.
(3) Scanner rotation time check
Rotate the scanner clockwise at the designated scan time and measure the required time.
<Checking method>
Check the check box of [Execute Scanner rotation time (*.*s) check box. Click single unit check
start button ⑥.
The check progress window is displayed. After the end of check, a result is displayed in the
check result window.
5－22
L2E-BW1444
5.8.3.2
Table system check
(1) LED check
Light LED on the scanner operation panel sequentially.
<Checking method>
Check the check box of [Execute Scanner LED lighting check] item.
Click single unit check start button ⑥.
The check progress window is displayed. Switches and LED on the scanner operation panel
lights sequentially. Switches or LED light every 400 mm sec. in the following sequence (800 mm
sec during home →lifting switch lighting). After upper and lower [200] light, this operation
returns to PAT lighting.
→PAT→PRESET→HOME→Lifting.→Lowering→Forward move→Backward move→Forward
tilting（TILT＋）→Backward tilting（TILT－）→
（TILT）+00.0→+01.1→+02.2→+03.3→+04.4→+05.5→+06.6→+07.7→+08.8→+09.9→+10.0
→+20.0→-20.0→（longitudinal）+001.1→+002.2→+003.3→+004.4→+005.5→+006.6→+007.7
→+008.8→+009.9→+110.0→+220.0→+330.0→+440.0→+550.0→+660.0→+770.0→+880.0→
+990.0→+1000.0→‐1000.0→（height）011→022→033→044→055→066→077→088→099
→100→200→･･･
This check is not terminated automatically.
Terminate it by pressing all check end button ⑩.
After the end of check, a result is displayed in the check result window.
(2) Scanner and table operation switch check
Read the scanner operation panel switches and indicate the switch numbers on the operation panel.
<Checking method>
Check the check box of [Execute Scanner and table switch read check ] item. Click single unit
check start button ⑥.
The check progress window is displayed.
A switch number is displayed on the scanner operation panel, each time an operation switch is
pressed once.
Respective switch numbers are as specified below.
1.
1.
PAT
8.
Forward move
2.
RESET
9.
High speed
3.
PRESET
10. Backward move
4.
HOME
11. Forward tilting (Tilt + )
5.
Projector
12. Backward tilting (Tilt - )
6.
Lifting.
13. MOVE (OC side)
7.
Lowering
14. START (OC side)
If two or more switches are pressed at the same time, a smaller value switch
takes preference of the other.
2.
Don’t operate EMERGENCY switch. If operated by mistake, terminate the table
operation switch check, and restart the system after releasing the emergency
once.
5－23
L2E-BW1444
This check is not terminated automatically. Terminate it by pressing all check end button ⑩. After the
end of check, a result is displayed in the check result window.
(3) Table moving speed check
Measure the time required by moving the table.
<Checking method>
Check the check box of [Execute Table moving speed check] item.
Click single unit check start button ⑥.
The check progress window is displayed.
Perform the following table move check.
For table move check, operate the table on the gantry side as follows.
Press RESET switch several times to indicate “6” in HEIGHT and “5.0” in TILT. Press the table backward
move switch or table forward move switch and high-speed move switch together to move the table forward
or backward. Speed measurement is started 1.5 seconds after starting the move until the speed is stabilized.
Actual moving speed is displayed in POSITION.
When this value is within the range of the following table, it is normal.
If it is out of the range, judge it as an error and adjust the table.
Check 3 kinds of speed shown in the table by the above procedure.
Operating speed
Height display
Tilt display
Tolerance
5.0mm/s
6
5.0
5.0±1.0mm/s
20.0mm/s
12
20.0
20.0±1.0mm/s
60.0mm/s
13
60.0
60.0±3.0mm/s
This check is not terminated automatically. Terminate it by pressing all check end button ⑩. After the
end of check, a result is displayed in the check result window.
5－24
L2E-BW1444
5.8.3.3
X-ray control system check
(1) X-ray main circuit rectification operation check
Operate the rectification circuit only at a DC output voltage of 200V.
<Checking method>
Check the check box of [Execute rectifier operation check] item. Click single unit check start
button ⑥.
The check progress window is displayed.
Only the rectification circuit operates for 20 seconds under such condition as the rectification
circuit output becomes 215Vdc.
After the end of check, a result is displayed in the check result window.
5.8.3.4
PreAmplifier signal ReTransmission system check
(1) Scanner restransmission circuit error display
Indicate an error information detected by the resend circuit of the scanner.
<Checking method>
Check the check box of [Display preamplifier signal retransmission circuit] item. Click single
unit check start button ⑥.
The check progress window is displayed.
After the end of check, a result is displayed in the check result window.
(2) Scanner restransmission circuit error counter clear
Clear the error information detected by the resend circuit of the scanner and error frequency
<Checking method>
Check the check box of [Clear preamplifier signal retransmission circuit] item. Click single unit
check start button ⑥.
The check progress window is displayed.
After the end of check, a result is displayed in the check result window.
5－25
L2E-BW1444
5.8.3.5
DSP system check
(1) Ideal reconstruction check
Displayed image data are checked by executing the reconstruction using exclusive raw data
Whether B.G.C is executed or not can be selected.
<Checking method>
When B.G.C is executed, check the check box of [Execute ideal reconstruction check (BHC ON)].
When B.G.C is not executed, check the check box of [Execute ideal reconstruction check (BHC
OFF)].
If the number of reconstruction image is changed, double-click the check marked column, and
the number of reconstruction image setting window is displayed. Input a number of
reconstruction image, and click OK button.
Click unit check start button ⑥.
A checking window is displayed. A reconstructed image is displayed together with the image
display window. When the check ends, results are displayed in the check results window.
<Number> indicates a slice number in the ideal reconstruction check program. It shows that what
number of image an error occurred.
After the end of check, close the image display window by clicking [×] button at the upper right
of the window.
(2) Scan DSP check
Check the external memory (scan side) on the board by using DSP of DSP board.
Either full mode or easy mode can be selected.
In the full mode, the external memory is checked by using 6 kinds of test patterns.
In the easy mode, the external memory is checked by using 2 kinds of test patterns.
<Checking method>
In case of the full mode, check the check box of [Execute Scan DSP check (Full Mode)].
In case of the easy mode, check the check box of [Execute Scan DSP check (Easy Mode)].
Click unit check start button ⑥.
A checking window is displayed.
The progressive condition is displayed by a progress bar on the checking window.
After the end of check, results are displayed in the check results window.
<Number> indicates a DSP number referring to the memory in error in the DSP check program.
For the correspondence of the DSP number, refer to the following inter-DSP board connection
diagram.
5－26
L2E-BW1444
(3) Reconstruction DSP check
Check the external memory ( reconstruction side) on the board by using DSP of DSP board.
Either full mode or easy mode can be selected.
In the full mode, the external memory is checked by using 6 kinds of test patterns.
In the easy mode, the external memory is checked by using 2 kinds of test patterns.
<Checking method>
In case of the full mode, check the check box of [Execute ReconDSP check (Full Mode)].
In case of the easy mode, check the check box of [Execute ReconDSP check (Easy Mode)].
Click unit check start button ⑥.
A checking window is displayed.
The progressive condition is displayed by a progress bar on the checking window.
After the end of check, results are displayed in the check results window.
<Number > indicates a DSP number referring to the memory in error in the DSP check program.
For the correspondence of the DSP number, refer to the following inter-DSP board connection
diagram.
CPU1
CPU0
Slot 10
HR-BP-V8
Slot 2
A
Raw Data HR-PCI
1
2
S
14
I
Slot 9
C
Image HR-PCI
13
15
Slot 4
Slot 12
3
5
7
9
11
4
6
8
10
12
Scan HR-DSP
Recon HR-DSP
Scan DSP check side
Reconstruction DSP check side
Inter-DSP board connection diagram
5－27
L2E-BW1444
5.9 Control Error List
5.9.1
Control error list start/end
(1) An error list window is displayed by selecting [System / Exit] - [Maintenance] - [Services] [Error List Display].
(2) The error list window is closed by clicking [Exit] button.
5.9.2
Setting of the order of date and time
(1) Click [Date / Time] of the list view or select [Settings (S) ｜[Date / Time (D)] from the menu, and
a displayed items settings dialog is displayed.
(2) Select the order (descending / ascending) of date and time from the sort order combo box.
(3) For displaying time down to milli-second unit, click “ Display to milliseconds” and put a check
mark.
(4) Click [OK] button.
5－28
L2E-BW1444
5.9.3
Display of a specified process only
(1) Click [Process] of the list view or select [Settings (S)｜Process (P)] from the menu, and a
displayed items settings dialog is displayed.
(2) Select a desired process to be displayed to the list from the displayed items combo box and click
[OK] button.
5.9.4
Display of a specified message only
(1) Click [Message] of the list view or select [Settings (S)｜Message (M)] from the menu, and a
displayed items settings dialog is displayed.
(2) Select a desired message to be displayed to the list from the displayed items combo box and click
[OK] button.
5.9.5
Setting of the error log information Directory
(1) Click [Tools (T)｜Error Log Info. Settings (S)] from the menu, and an setting for error log
information dialog is displayed.
5－29
L2E-BW1444
(2) Check the check box of the information to be changed and change the aimed contents.
<CRT side information>
*
Error Log File Directory : Set a folder for saving an error log file by the absolute path.
*
Max. Size of Error Log File (bytes) : Set the maximum size of error log file in units of byte.
*
Touch Panel Side Error Log File Directory Viewed from CRT Side : Set the error log file to
be saved to the CPU side by the path when referring from the CPU side.
<Touch panel side information>
*
Error Log File Directory : Set a folder for saving an error log file by the absolute path.
*
Error log time max. size (bytes) : Set the maximum size of error log file in units of byte.
(3) Click [OK]
The error log file is controlled in units of processing name and if a file size of a certain
processing name exceeds this size, the present file is saved as a file before 1
generation and the present file is initialized.
A file before 2 generations is not saved. If an error occurs frequently or it is desired
to save old error information, increase this size.
If initial value 16384 (bytes) is set, about 300 items information can be saved in the
present file plus file before 1 generation in total.
5－30
L2E-BW1444
5.9.6
Saving of the error log information to MO
(1) An error log information order dialog is displayed by clicking [Tools (T)｜Error Log Info. Order
(O)] from the menu.
(2) Insert an MO into the MO drive, select an order method, and click [Start (S)] button.
“Clear error log” becomes selectable when an error log is copied to an MO.
(3) Click [Close (C)]
REFERENCE
Error log information can also be saved into an MO by using service backup (See
5.10).
5－31
L2E-BW1444
5.10 Service backup
This processing serves to save or read the setting data of various options on the magnetic disk, such as the CT
number adjustment data, phantom calibration data, date/time calculated phantom data, system serial number,
latest study number/patient ID/accession number, series number management file, system configuration status,
faulty channel, filming and DICOM transmission destinations settings, and MWM option setting, to or from an
MO cartridge, and to enter them into a magnetic disk. Data can be saved more than once so far as the MO
capacity permits.
During service backup, special care must be ensured in the following operation.
(1) Do not read out service data or user data to a different system than the system in which they
were saved.
(2) Do not read out service data or user data to a system while an entry of a patient is registered.
(3) After the CT value adjustment data and phantom calibration data were read out to the system,
be sure to restart the system before making scanning (including CT value adjustment and
phantom calibration).
5.10.1
Start / end
(1) Click [System/Exit] of the main menu and select [Maintenance], [Service], and [Service Backup]
from the displayed menu.
(2) A Backup/Restore window is displayed.
(3) Click [Close] button to exit.
5－32
L2E-BW1444
5.10.2
Initialization of saving MO
To save service data into an MO, initialize the MO for service data.
(1) Set an MO to the drive
Set an MO to the drive. if it is not initialized for service data, the following message is displayed.
Click [Yes] button, and a format window is displayed.
(2) Click [Start] button. (File system is fixed to FAT32. Format time can be shortened by checking the
quick format.) A message warning the deletion of data is displayed.
(3) After confirming the contents of the message, click [OK] button. Formatting is started. After
the end of formatting, a message is displayed to inform of the end.
(4) Click [Close] button. Now, the service backup MO has been formatted.
5－33
L2E-BW1444
5.10.3
Saving
(1) To save service data, set an MO initialized for service data into the drive after the Backup/Restore
dialog is displayed.
(2) If the service data saving MO has already been formatted, [Save…] button can be clicked. Click
[Save…] button.
(3) A backup dialog is displayed. An item checked in the selection column is saved. (A check
mark is attached to all default items) Save all data.
(4) Click [Save] button. Service data saving is started. After the end of saving, the display returns
to the Backup / Restore window.
5－34
L2E-BW1444
5.10.4
Loading
(1) For loading service data, set the MO saving service data.
To load service data, set the MO saving service data after the Backup/Restore dialog is displayed.
The service data being saved in the MO are displayed on the list. Select data to be loaded by
clicking the selection column. By selecting data set, clicking [Load…] button is enabled. A
Restore dialog is displayed by clicking [Load…] button.
(2) Data being checked in the selection column are loaded (A check mark is attached to all default
items). Load all data.
(3) Click [Load] button. Service data loading is started. After the end of loading, the display
returns to the Backup/Restore window.
5－35
L2E-BW1444
5.10.5
Deletion
Unnecessary service data can be deleted.
(1) For deleting service data, set the MO saving service data after Backup / Restore window has been
displayed. The service data being saved into the MO are displayed in a list. Select data to be
deleted by clicking the selection column. By selecting data set, [Delete] button can be clicked.
A confirmation dialog is displayed by clicking [Delete] button.
(2) Click [Yes], and service data are deleted.
5－36
L2E-BW1444
5.10.6
Other data
In service backup, user data and log as well as service data can be saved in the same MO. Log and data
base are saved as compressed by using a freeware, UNLHA32.DLL, the use of which is permitted by
the owner of the copyright, Mr Micco.
(1) User data saving
Select “User Data” from the data type list of Backup / Restore window.
Saving, loading, and deletion methods of user data are the same as in starting the [Save User Data]
from [System/Exit].
(2) Log saving
Select “Log” from the data type list of Backup/Restore window.
A log can be saved or deleted, but it cannot be loaded.
(3) Database saving
Select “Database” from the data type list of Backup/Restore dialog. Database can only be saved
and deleted, but cannot be loaded. Database is provided for images and RawData, and saving
database is enabled for the purpose of investigating causes of troubles.
5－37
L2E-BW1444
5.11 System maintenance mode
The system maintenance mode is provided to execute application installation and other system settings after
switching to normal Windows environment where the application software is not started.
5.11.1
System maintenance mode / release mode selection
(1) Select [Maintenance], [Service], and [System Maintenance mode] from the displayed menu after
clicking [System/Exit] button of the main menu.
(2) A password input window is displayed. Input rs0471314185 (initial value) and click [OK].
(3) A system maintenance mode switching confirmation dialog is displayed. Click [Yes]. The
system is restarted and switched to the system maintenance mode (Windows environment where
the application is not started).
REFERENCE
For returning from the system maintenance mode to normal application start mode
(release mode), double-click the “Start the CT system” short cut at the left of the
screen, and the system is restarted and the application is started.
5－38
L2E-BW1444
5.12 Error codes list
5.12.1
Control error codes list
Error codes
Error list messages
SE08
"Invalid Message Command "
"Invalid Message Command :
CheckPro"
"Invalid Message Command :
MScanDriV"
"Invalid Message Command :
DSPDriV"
"Invalid Message Command :
SysMoni"
SE09
"Invalid Message SCode "
"Invalid Message Scode:Cmd
***"
SE0A
SE0B
SE0C
SE10
SE18
SE20
SE26
SE27
Dialog messages
A communication error has
occurred in the scan control
process.
Please retry.
Error contents
Communication header command
error
① An undefined instruction was
received from MC Server
② Commands received by MC
Server from respective tasks
were undefined
Communication header send source
name error
Sender name of received message is
not MC Server
"Invalid Message DCode "
Communication header send
"Invalid Message Dcode:
destination name error
Cmd ***"
Receiver name of received message
is in error
Communication header parameter
"Invalid Message Length "
A communication error has
length error
"Invalid Message Length:
occurred in the scan control
Length of a received message is in
Cmd ***"
process.
error
Please retry.
Socket error during communication
"Invalid Socket：Cmd **"
A communication error has
An attempt was made to transfer the
occurred in the scan control
communication command by TCP
process.
socket, but a transfer error occurs
Please retry.
"Parameter Error "
A parameter error was detected.
Parameter error
"Illegal Scan Data Type : **" Change parameters, and then retry. Contents of communication
parameter unit are not correct
① Scan processing command
parameter is undefined
② Check processing command
parameter is undefined
③ Table/gantry processing
command parameter is
undefined
The system is busy.
Exclusive error
Please retry.
Other processing is being executed
Initialization error
The scan control process startup
"Config Setting Error "
Task start error
failed.
"DSP Boot Error "
Please shut the system down, and ① Definition file setting error
"Event Initialize Error"
② DSP boot error
then restart.
"Process Boot Error"
③ Communication event
initialization error
④ Process initialization error
"File Open Error "
An error has occurred in the scan File open error
control process.
Please retry.
"File Close Error "
An error has occurred in the scan File close error
control process.
Please retry.
A communication error has
occurred in the scan control
process.
Please retry.
A communication error has
occurred in the scan control
process.
5－39
L2E-BW1444
Error codes
Error list messages
SE28
"File Read Error "
SE29
"File Write Error "
SE2A
"DataBase Access Error"
"RawDisk DataBase Error"
"DataBase Create Error"
"DataBase Parameter Error"
"Memory Error "
SE2B
SE2C
SE2D
"Communication Error "
"Invalid Socket"
"Internal Communication
Error "
"Process Timeout "
SE2E
"DICOM Format Error "
SE40
"DSP Driver Error "
SE41
"DSP reported Error "
"DSP Busy"
"DSP Start Process Error "
SE44
"Insufficient Disk Space"
SE45
"Recon Timeout"
"PostRecon Timeout"
SE48
"RawData Read Error "
SE49
"RawData Write Error "
SE50
"Offset Scan error"
SE51
"Windows API Error"
Dialog messages
An error has occurred in the scan
control process.
Please retry.
An error has occurred in the scan
control process.
Please retry.
An error has occurred in the scan
control process.
Please retry.
Error contents
File read error
An error has occurred in the scan
control process.
Please retry.
A communication error has
occurred in the scan control
process.
Please retry.
Memory error
An error occurred during memory
access
Communication error
An error occurred during inter
-control task communication
An error has occurred in the scan
control process.
Please shut the system down, and
then restart.
An error has occurred in the scan
control process.
Please retry.
An error has occurred in the scan
control process.
Please shut the system down, and
then restart.
An error has occurred in the scan
control process.
Please shut the system down, and
then restart.
The disk has insufficient free space.
Delete images or RawData, and then
retry.
An error has occurred in the scan
control process.
Please shut the system down, and
then restart.
An error has occurred in the scan
control process.
Please retry.
An error has occurred in the scan
control process.
Please retry.
An error has occurred in the scan
control process.
Please retry.
An error has occurred in the scan
control process.
Please retry.
Processing time out
5－40
File write error
Data base access error
An error occurred during data base
access
Image format error.
An error occurred during DICOM
image format conversion.
DSP driver error
DSP error
Shortage of file space
Reconstruction time over
Reconstruction was started, but an
image is not completed
Raw Data read error
Raw Data write error
Offset error
Shortage of offset number
Windows API error
L2E-BW1444
Error codes
Error list messages
SE60
"Release File Space Error"
SE61
"Viewer Error"
SE62
"Warning:DSP Flag ON at
Start"
"Warning:Abnormal DSP
PCode"
"Warning:Faulty CH Out of
Range"
"Warning:Requested DSP not
found"
"Unexpect Error"
SE73
SE74
SE75
"Internal communication
error"
"Event Communication
Error"
"Unexpect Error"
OE 02
S 04
"Shutter Scan is in progress"
S 09
"Stationary Switch is ON"
S 10
"Scanner is not Ready"
S 11
"Scanner is not Ready"
Dialog messages
An error has occurred in the scan
control process.
Please retry.
An error has occurred in the scan
control process.
Please retry.
An error has occurred in the scan
control process.
Please retry.
Error contents
File space reserve cancel error
An error occurred when canceling
the file space reserve
Viewer error
① An error occurred when starting
the viewer
② An error occurred when sending
a message to the viewer
DSP warning error
An error has occurred in the scan
control process.
Please retry.
An error has occurred in the scan
control process.
Please retry.
Unexpected error
Program internal error
Images were not stored nor
displayed within predetermined
time.
For safety, please suspend the
guideShot, and try again after
restarting application.
The table height is too low.
Please raise the table above zero.
Image file writing timeout error
Internal communication error
Internal communication error of
task
Table height is not higher than 0
① Table height is not higher than 0
during scanogram
② Table height is not higher than 0
when checking the table moving
speed
An abnormality has occurred in the An error during shutter scan
scanner.
Please retry.
The scanner is in an abnormal
Stationary switch (21SW) turns on
condition.
during normal scan
Please contact your service
representative.
The scanner is in an abnormal
Scanner not ready
condition.
① Scanner is not set to be ready
Please retry.
② Stationary switch (21SW) is
turned off during stationary scan
The scanner is in an abnormal
Scanner not ready
condition.
① Scanner is not set to be ready
Please retry.
② Stationary switch (21SW) is
turned off during stationary scan
5－41
L2E-BW1444
Error codes
Error list messages
S 12
"Scanner is not Ready :
timeout"
S 15
"Relay OFF of inverter"
S16
"Relay OFF of inverter"
S 17
"FFB OFF for Tilt"
S 18
"FFB OFF for inverter"
S 19
"Stationary Switch is ON"
S 1C
"L-Tilt Over Heat"
S 1D
"R-Tilt Over Heat"
S 1E
"Manual Switch is ON"
S 1F
"Emergency Switch is ON"
S 20
"Brake Release is ON"
S 27
"Tape Switch is ON"
S 28
"Scanner Error"
Dialog messages
The scanner is in an abnormal
condition.
Please retry.
An abnormality has occurred in the
scanner.
Please shut the system down, and
then restart.
An abnormality has occurred in the
scanner.
Please retry.
The scanner is in an abnormal
condition.
Please contact your service
representative.
The scanner is in an abnormal
condition.
Please contact your service
representative.
The scanner is in an abnormal
condition.
Please contact your service
representative.
An abnormality has occurred in the
scanner.
Leave the system power on and
allow to cool.
An abnormality has occurred in the
scanner.
Leave the system power on and
allow to cool.
The scanner is in an abnormal
condition.
Please contact your service
representative.
The system has stopped due to an
Emergency Switch being activated.
Confirm safety, and then click
[OK] button to release the
Emergency status.
The scanner is in an abnormal
condition.
Please contact your service
representative.
The touch sensor has activated.
Please confirm safety, and then
click [OK] button to release the
stop status.
The touch sensor has activated.
Please confirm safety, and then
click [OK] button to release the
stop status.
5－42
Error contents
Scanner not ready
Scanner is not set to be ready
Inverter power control relay off
Inverter unit power control relay off
Tilt power supply FFB (22FFB)
turns off
Scanner rotation inverter control
power supply FFB (21FFB) off
Stationary switch (21SW) turns on
during normal scan
Tilt hydraulic pump is overheated
(left side)
Tilt hydraulic pump is overheated
(right side)
Selector switch (3SW) is set to
MANUAL during normal scan
Emergency switch was pressed
Brake release switch (22SW) is
turned on
Touch sensor turns on
Scanner error
L2E-BW1444
Error codes
Error list messages
S 28(08)
"Miss Sense"
S 28(1D)
S 28(1E)
S 28(43)
S 28(44)
S 28(45)
S 28(54)
S 28(57)
S 28(58)
Dialog messages
An abnormality has occurred in the
scanner.
Please retry.
"Over Speed Error"
An abnormality has occurred in the
scanner.
Please retry.
"Under Speed Error"
An abnormality has occurred in the
scanner.
Please retry.
"Inverter Thermal Relay ON" An abnormality has occurred in the
scanner.
Leave the system power on and
allow to cool.
"Inverter Trip"
An abnormality has occurred in the
scanner.
Please shut the system down, and
then restart.
"Front Cover is Open"
The front cover of the scanner is
open.
Please contact your service
representative.
"DPRAM Commu. Init Error" An error has occurred in the
scanner.
Please shut the system down, and
then restart.
"Scan Seq. Timeout"
An error has occurred in the
scanner.
Please retry.
"Asynchronized Timer
An error has occurred in the
Counter"
scanner.
Please retry.
S 28(5A)
"Rotation Encoder Error"
S 28(71)
"Communication Error to
IPU"
S 28(72)
"Illegal Command"
S 28(73)
"Measurement seq.
Abnormal"
S 28(74)
"Measurement Parameter
Error"
S 28(76)
"X-Ray Abort"
An error has occurred in the
scanner control.
Please shut the system down, and
then restart.
An error has occurred in the
scanner.
Please shut the system down, and
then restart.
An error has occurred in the
scanner.
Please retry.
An error has occurred in the
scanner.
Please retry.
An error has occurred in the
scanner.
Please retry.
[SUSPEND] button was pressed.
5－43
Error contents
Upper side sensor of X-ray tube
does not turn on at the specified
position
Rotation over speed (+12%)
Rotation under speed (-12%)
General-purpose inverter thermal
relay turns on
Inverter trips
(Wrong operation of old motor)
Front cover of scanner is open
DPRAM communication
initialization error
Measurement end signal time out
Timer 0 and 4 counters are not
synchronized with each other
during stable rotation speed of
scanner
Abnormal pulse from the rotary
encoder of the scanner
Communication cannot be done
between main CPU and image
processing
Command receive under improper
condition
Scanner sequence number change is
abnormal
A parameter other than ready
command (81H) parameter was
received
X-ray abort instruction was
received
L2E-BW1444
Error codes
Error list messages
S 28(77)
"1 Scan Timeout"
S 28(78)
"Table motion Time out"
S 28(79)
"Parameter Error from IPU"
S 30
"Command Error to Scanner
CPU"
S 50
"Scanner Check Seq. Now"
S 60
"Communication Error
MCPU & SCPU"
X 05
"Arcing Recovery is
activated"
X 11
"Rotor is not ready"
X 14
"Initialization error at WB"
X 17
"Door Open"
X 1A
"Tube Over Heat"
X 1F
"WB is emergency "
X 20
"Arcing Recovery counts
Over"
Dialog messages
An error has occurred in the
scanner.
Please retry.
An error has occurred in the
scanner.
Please shut the system down, and
then restart.
An error has occurred in the
scanner.
Please shut the system down, and
then restart.
An error has occurred in the
scanner.
Please shut the system down, and
then restart.
An error has occurred in the
scanner.
Performing check sequence.
Please do not perform other
operations.
An error has occurred in the
scanner.
Please shut the system down, and
then restart.
Error contents
1-scan time out
Table does not move for 3 seconds
after table move instruction
An invalid parameter was received
from image processing
Communication command error
Communication can be done
between main CPU and scanner
CPU, but a code is abnormal
Check sequence in progress
A communication error between
MCPU and SCPU
Communication is impossible
between main CPU and scanner
CPU
Arcing occurred
Arcing recovery was executed
An arcing has occurred at the
X-ray tube in scan.
When an image is created, artifact
may have occurred.
The rotor of the X-ray tube startup Rotor stop condition
failed.
(during standby operation)
① Rotor stop
Please retry.
② Abort
An error has occurred in the X-ray X-ray unit initialization error
control system.
Please shut the system down, and
then restart.
The door of the CT room is ajar.
Scanner room door is open
Close the door.
The X-ray tube has overheated.
Overheat
① Oil temperature rises in X-ray
Leave the system power on and
tube housing
allow to cool.
② Cooling pump stops operating
The X-ray control system is in an Emergency switch was pressed
emergency condition.
Please contact your service
representative.
The number of arcing recoveries
Arcing recovery counts over
has been exceeded.
Please retry.
5－44
L2E-BW1444
Error codes
Error list messages
X 21
"Rotor Error "
X 22
X 23
X 24
X 25
X 26
X 27
X 28
X 29
X 2A
X 2B
X 2C
X 2D
X 2E
X 30
Dialog messages
An abnormality has occurred at the
rotor of the X-ray tube.
Please retry.
"Primary Error or Secondary An abnormality has occurred in the
Abnormal （WB）"
X-ray generator main circuit
system.
Please retry.
"Focus Error Miss Selection" The X-ray tube focus switch failed.
Please retry.
"Breaker OFF Control
A breaker tripped in the X-ray
Circuit"
control unit.
Please contact your service
representative.
"CPU Memory Error (WB)" An abnormality has occurred in the
X-ray control unit.
Please shut the system down, and
then restart.
"Arcing Error"
Arcing has occurred during
calibration.
Please retry.
"Filament Power is OFF"
The power of the filament drive
circuit is OFF.
Please contact your service
representative.
"HV Tank Over Heat"
The high voltage transformer has
overheated.
Leave the system power on and
allow to cool.
"Abunormal KV & MA
An abnormality has occurred in
(WB)"
tube voltage and tube current.
Please retry.
"Tube Voltage Error
An abnormality has occurred in
（WB）"
tube voltage.
Please retry.
"Filament Cut"
The filament or the heating circuit
is in an abnormal condition.
Please contact your service
representative.
"Backup Timer Error (WB)" A backup timer error has occurred.
(WB)
Please retry.
"A/D Converter Error
An abnormality has occurred in the
(WB)"
X-ray control unit.
Please retry.
"Miss Radiation （WB）"
An abnormality has occurred in the
X-ray control unit.
Please retry.
"Command Error unresolved An error has occurred in the X-ray
（WB）"
control unit.
Please retry.
5－45
Error contents
Rotor stop (during exposure)
Rectification circuit or inverter is
abnormal
Focus selection error
Control circuit power supply is
turned off
Memory error
Arcing occurred during calibration
Filament power off
HV transformer bellows switch
turns on
Center section current is abnormal
KV error
Filament or heating circuit error
Exposure time over
ADC error
X-ray is generated at timing other
than specified
Communication system error (An
unacceptable command was
received)
L2E-BW1444
Error codes
Error list messages
X 32
"Command Error （WB）"
X 3C
X 3D
X 3E
X 40
X 41
X 42
X 43
X 44
X 45
X 46
X 47
X 48
X 49
X 4A
X 4B
Dialog messages
An error has occurred in the X-ray
control unit.
Please retry.
"Collimator Error"
An error has occurred during
movement of the collimator.
Please retry.
"A/D Converter Error
An abnormality has occurred in the
(Filament)"
filament control.
Please retry.
"MA Reference Setting
An error has occurred in the
Error"
filament control.
Please retry.
"+KV Over voltage"
An abnormality has occurred in
tube voltage.
Please retry.
"-KV Over voltage"
An abnormality has occurred in
tube voltage.
Please retry.
"KV Unbalance"
An abnormality has occurred in
tube voltage.
Please retry.
"KV Over Voltage"
An abnormality has occurred in
tube voltage.
Please retry.
"Anode over current"
An abnormality has occurred in
tube current.
Please retry.
"Cathode over current"
An abnormality has occurred in
tube current.
Please retry.
"Center section over current" An abnormality has occurred in
tube current.
Please retry.
"Filament Over Voltage"
An abnormality has occurred in the
filament.
Please retry.
"Filament Over Current"
An abnormality has occurred in the
filament.
Please retry.
"CPU WatchDog Timer
An error has occurred in the
Error"
filament control.
Please shut the system down, and
then restart.
"Filament Preheat Error "
An abnormality has occurred in the
filament.
Please retry.
"Backup Timer Error （Turn A backup timer error has occurred.
Plate）"
(Turn Plate)
Please retry.
5－46
Error contents
Communication system error
Collimator error
ADC error
Setting error of tube current
reference value
Tube voltage (+) overvoltage error
Tube voltage (-) overvoltage error
Unbalance of tube voltage (+) and
tube voltage (-)
Tube voltage overvoltage error
Anode overcurrent error
Cathode overcurrent error
Center section overcurrent error
Filament overvoltage error
Filament overcurrent error
Watch dog error of tube current
control CPU
Auxiliary heating error
Backup time over (Tube current
control circuit detection)
L2E-BW1444
Error codes
Error list messages
X 4C
"Filament Preheat FeedBack
Error"
X 60
X 61
X 62
X 70
T 00
T 02
T 03
T 04
T 0A
T 0B
T 0E
T 0F
T 10
Dialog messages
An abnormality has occurred in the
filament.
Please retry.
"Communication error to
A communication error has
Turn plate"
occurred in the turn plate board.
Please retry.
"Communication error to
A communication error has
WB"
occurred in the X-ray control
system.
Please shut the system down, and
then restart.
"Communication error to
A communication error occurred in
ATMA"
the Adaptive mA control circuit.
Please shut the system down, and
then restart.
"Retry Over (Turn Plate)"
A error has occurred in the data
communications of a preamplifier
signal.
Please retry.
"Mismatch Status:Table
[RESET] button on the gantry side
Ready"
may have been pressed.
Please retry.
"Mismatch Status:Index
An error has occurred in the table.
Move Now"
Please retry.
"Mismatch Status:Gantry Tilt An error has occurred in the table.
Now"
Please retry.
"Mismatch Status:Scan Seq. An error has occurred in the table.
Now"
Please retry.
"Table Limit Inward"
"Table Limit Outward"
"Table Error :Inhibit"
Table limit. (Inward)
Table limit. (Outward)
The table is in an
operation-prohibited condition.
Please retry.
"Mismatch Status:Fluoro is in An error has occurred in the table.
Progress"
Please retry.
"Irregular OP"
Manually operating at the gantry.
Please retry after checking that the
operations at the gantry have been
completed.
T 14
"Manual OP done in
Scanning"
T 1F
"Emergency"
T 20
"Table Speed Error"
Error contents
Auxiliary heating feedback voltage
is not within the reference value
range
Communication error (Turn plate)
Communication error (WB)
Communication error between
adaptive mA control circuit and
tube current control
Data retransmission count over
Table ready condition
Table moving (Index)
Gantry tilting
Scan measurement in progress
① Scangram in progress
② Volume scan in progress
Table position in direction limit
Table position out direction limit
Operation is disabled during
measurement
Fluoroscopic measurement in
progress
Manual operation in progress
① Manual operation in progress
② PAT operation in progress
③ Table height is lower than 0mm
Waiting for the end of scanogram
The table is operating at reduced
speed.
Please retry.
The system has stopped due to an Emergency switch was pressed
Emergency switch being activated.
Confirm safety, and then click
[OK] button to release the
Emergency status.
An error has occurred in the table. Table speed error
Please retry.
5－47
L2E-BW1444
Error codes
Error list messages
T 21
"Servo Ready Timeout"
T 22
T 23
T 24
T 25
T 26
T 27
T 40
T 60
T 70
SD00
SD01
SD05
SD06
Dialog messages
The servo driver did not become
ready within the standard time.
Please shut the system down, and
then restart.
"Servo Alarm Error"
An error has occurred in the servo
driver.
Please shut the system down, and
then restart.
"Servo-motor Stop Timeout" The servo motor did not stop
within the standard time.
Please shut the system down, and
then restart.
"DeadMan Relay OFF
The deadman relay was not
Timeout"
released within the stipulated time.
Please shut the system down, and
then restart.
"A/D Convert Timeout"
The A/D conversion did not finish
within the standard time.
Please shut the system down, and
then restart.
"S,Pulse Cycle Error(5%)"
The S.Pulse Signal exceeded the
stipulated cycles
Please shut the system down, and
then restart.
"Tape Switch is ON"
The touch sensor has activated.
Please confirm safety, and then
click [OK] button to release the
stop status.
"Table Over Run"
The table is located outside the
operational range.
Move the table manually to the
operational range.
"Table Error not
A communication error has
Cummunicate(Main1)"
occurred in the table.
Please retry.
"CT mode Error"
The angio system is not position of
the CT mode.
Move the angio system to position
of the CT mode.
"Scanner Error"
An error has occurred in the
scanner control.
"Scanner Driver Open Error" An error has occurred in the
scanner control.
Please retry.
"Status Read Timeout"
An error has occurred in the
scanner control.
Please retry.
"Status(Table) Read
An error has occurred in the
Timeout"
scanner control.
Please retry.
5－48
Error contents
Time out during servo preparation
Servo alarm error
Servo motor stop time out
Deadman relay off time out
A/D conversion end time out
S pulse cycle error (±5%)
Touch sensor ON
Table run over
Communication error
CT mode error
Scanner driver open error
Shared communication memory to
scanner cannot open
Scanner status read time out
Scanner status read (table area)
time out
L2E-BW1444
Error codes
Error list messages
SD07
"Scanner Driver Init Error"
Dialog messages
An error has occurred in the
scanner control.
Please retry.
"Scanner Driver Close Error" An error has occurred in the
scanner control.
Please retry.
"Scanner Abnomal"
An error has occurred in the
scanner control.
Please retry.
"Check Sum Error"
An error has occurred in the
scanner control.
Please retry.
"Scanner Invalid Code"
An error has occurred in the
scanner control.
Please retry.
Error contents
Scanner driver cannot be initialized
SD39
"In Scanner Wakeup"
Scanner control process is starting
up.
Please wait...
SD42
"Set LED Error"
An error has occurred in the
scanner control.
Please retry.
After scanner power supply has
been turned on during scanner
starting, the scanner is not standing
by
Set LED cannot be controlled
(lighting and extinction)
SD08
SD0A
SD30
SD31
SD32
SD34
SD35
SD36
SD37
SD38
Scanner driver cannot be closed
Scanner abnormal answer
(Status is normal)
Check sum error when receiving a
command from scanner
① No scanner answer in 97H
・ Scan execution time (except
scanogram)
・ Status read time
・ Check program
② Improper code as a result of
scanner communication check
“Gantry power is OFF”
Gantry power supply is OFF.
Gantry power off
・ When sending a command to
Press [GANTRY] button.
scanner
・ When receiving a command
from scanner
"Abnormal Table Position"
An error has occurred in the
Table position error
scanner control.
① After clearing the table position,
table position is not zero
Please retry.
② After resetting the table
position, the table position is
different from its set value
"Table Pos. is not expected" Table did not move to the specified Table position does not conform to
position.
the set value after moving the table
Please retry.
"Gantry Ang. is not expected" Gantry did not tilt to the specified After gantry tilting, the gantry angle
angle.
is different from the set value
Please retry.
"Table not Move"
An error has occurred in the
Table does not move
scanner control.
Please retry.
TapeSW ON Error"
An error has occurred in the
After sending touch sensor off
scanner control.
command, touch sensor does not
turn off
Please retry.
5－49
L2E-BW1444
Error codes
Error list messages
SD44
"Start LED Error"
Dialog messages
An error has occurred in the
scanner control.
Please retry.
An error has occurred in the
scanner control.
Please retry.
SD46
"DeadMan Set Error"
SD47
"DeadMan Unset Error"
An error has occurred in the
scanner control.
Please retry.
SD48
"X-Ray Soft Switch On
Error"
An error has occurred in the
scanner control.
Please retry.
SD49
"X-Ray Soft Switch Off
Error"
An error has occurred in the
scanner control.
Please retry.
SD4A
"LED Flick Error"
SD4C
"CPU Ready On Error"
SD4D
"CPU Ready Off Error"
SD4E
"Scanner ResetOn Error"
SD4F
"Scanner ResetOff Error"
SD61
"Send Command Parameter
Error"
SD62
"Send Command Device
Erro"
An error has occurred in the
scanner control.
Please retry.
An error has occurred in the
scanner control.
Please retry.
An error has occurred in the
scanner control.
Please retry.
An error has occurred in the
scanner control.
Please retry.
An error has occurred in the
scanner control.
Please retry.
An error has occurred in the
scanner control.
Please retry.
An error has occurred in the
scanner control.
Please retry.
5－50
Error contents
Start LED cannot be controlled
(lighting and extinction)
Deadman cannot be to manual
mode
・ During scanner initialization
・ During table move
・ During gantry control
・ During scan
・ During table speed check
Deadman cannot be to auto mode
・ During table move
・ During gantry control
・ During scan
・ During table speed check
Soft switch cannot be turned on
・ During view trigger signal
check
・ During preamplifier check
・ During scan start
Soft switch cannot be turned off
・ During scanner initialization
・ During view trigger signal
check
・ During preamplifier check
・ Just before starting the
preamplifier check
・ At the end of scan
LED cannot flicker
CPU ready does not turn on
(when starting the scanner)
CPU ready does not turn off
(when starting the scanner)
Scanner reset cannot be turned on
Scanner reset cannot be turned off
Transmitting command parameter
error
Transmitting command error
①Error during transmission
②Ring buffer full
L2E-BW1444
Error codes
Error list messages
SD63
"Send Command Scanner
Ready Error"
SD64
SD65
SD66
SD67
SD68
SD69
SD6A
SD6B
SD6C
SD6D
OT02
OT03
Dialog messages
An error has occurred in the
scanner control.
Please retry.
"Send Command Other Error" An error has occurred in the
scanner control.
Please retry.
"Recv Command Device
An error has occurred in the
Error"
scanner control.
Please retry.
"Recv Command NoData"
An error has occurred in the
scanner control.
Please retry.
"Recv Command Other
An error has occurred in the
Error"
scanner control.
Please retry.
"Recv Command Open Event An error has occurred in the
Error"
scanner control.
Please retry.
"Recv Command Clear Event An error has occurred in the
Error"
scanner control.
Please retry.
"Recv Command WaitObject An error has occurred in the
Timeout"
scanner control.
Please retry.
"Send Command Timeout
An error has occurred in the
Error"
scanner control.
Please retry.
"Invalid TableData Code"
An error has occurred in the
scanner control.
Please retry.
"Invalid TableData Data"
An error has occurred in the
scanner control.
Please retry.
"Offset Scan Timeout"
An error has occurred in images
and RawData acquisition system.
Please retry.
"Scan Start Timeout"
An error has occurred in images
and RawData acquisition system.
Please retry.
5－51
Error contents
Transmitting command acceptance
disable error
Receiving is impossible against
send-to-request
Transmitting command error
Receiving command error
①Error during receiving
②Ring buffer full
Receiving command error
Error occurs when no information
is given to receiving data
Receiving command error
Receiving command open error
Receiving clear processing error
Receiving time out from scanner
Transmitting command cannot be
sent to cause a time out error
Transmitting command parameter
error
Command error in table area
Transmitting command parameter
error
Data error in table area
Offset time out
Offset measurement end
information does not come from
DSP
・Scanogram (3sec)
・Normal scan (4sec)
Scan start time out
Scan start information does not
come from DSP
・Scanogram (4sec)
・Volume scan (3sec)
L2E-BW1444
Error codes
Error list messages
OT04
"Fast Scan end wait
timeout:Sc"
"Scan End Timeout:Sc"
Dialog messages
An error has occurred in images
and RawData acquisition system.
Please retry.
OT05
"HU Exceeded"
An error has occurred in the
scanner control.
Please retry.
An error has occurred in the
scanner control.
Please retry.
An error has occurred in the
scanner control.
Please retry.
OT07
"HU calc Error"
OT08
"Scanner Commu. Check
Timeout"
OT09
"Scanner Rot. Time Check
(CW) Timeout"
An error has occurred in the
scanner control.
Please retry.
OT0B
"Table Moving Speed Check
Timeout"
An error has occurred in the
scanner control.
Please retry.
OT0C
"Status Read Timeout"
An error has occurred in the
scanner control.
Please retry.
5－52
Error contents
Scan end time out
① Table status does not change
from 04 to 14 even if waiting for
2 seconds from the
predetermined scanogram end
time
② Answer ( 97H) does not come
from scanner even if waiting for
2 seconds during normal scan
③ Answer (97H) does not come
from the scanner even if waiting
for 1 second after all data
collection end during volume
scan
④ Next data collection end
information does not come even
if waiting for one rotation time
+1sec from the last data
collection end during volume
scan
⑤ Answer (97H) does not come
from the scanner even if waiting
for 112% + 3seconds of all scan
time during volume scan
HU excess condition was input in
HU estimate calculation
HU estimate calculation error
Check processing time out
Answer (97H) does not come from
scanner even if waiting for 10
seconds during scanner
communication check
Check processing time out
Answer (97H) does not come from
scanner even if waiting for 20
seconds during scanner rotation
time check
Check processing time out
Answer (97H) does not come from
scanner even if waiting for 2
seconds at the table moving speed
check end
Status read time out
Answer (97H) does not come from
scanner even if waiting for 5
seconds during status read
L2E-BW1444
Error codes
Error list messages
OT0D
"Move Table Timeout"
Dialog messages
An error has occurred in the
scanner control.
Please retry.
OT0E
"Tilt Gantry Timeout"
An error has occurred in the
scanner control.
Please retry.
OT0F
"Emergency Release
Timeout"
An error has occurred in the
scanner control.
Please retry.
OT10
"Tube Return Timeout"
An error has occurred in the
scanner control.
Please retry.
OT11
"Standby Timeout"
An error has occurred in the
scanner control.
Please retry.
OT12
"Fast Scan end wait
An error has occurred in the
timeout:DSP"
scanner control.
"Scan end wait timeout:DSP" Please retry.
OT13
"Image Recon Timeout"
An error has occurred in the
scanner control.
Please retry.
OT14
"RotStop Timeout"
An error has occurred in the
scanner control.
Please retry.
OT15
"SeqStart Timeout：DSP"
An error has occurred in the
scanner control.
Please retry.
OT60
”FileRead Error”
OT70
"Pause Interval TimeOut"
A file read error has occurred.
Please retry.
The pause limit time has been
exceeded.
The scan has ended.
5－53
Error contents
Table move time out
Table move does not end (OEH)
even if waiting for 30 seconds
during table move
Gantry tilting time out
Tilting does not end (OEH) even if
waiting for 30 seconds during
gantry tilting
Emergency processing time out
Reset does not end (other than
1FH) even if waiting for 80 seconds
during emergency reset processing
Tube recovery processing time out
Tube does not return upward even
if waiting for 20 seconds during
tube recovery processing
Measurement preparation time out
・Scanogram (40 seconds)
・Normal scan (40 seconds)
Raw Data waiting time out
Last Raw Data end information
does not come from DSP even if
waiting for 1 second during Raw
Data waiting time out scan
Image reconstruction time out end
information does not come from
DSP even if waiting for 3 seconds
during normal scan
Scanner rotation stop processing
time out
Scanner does not does not stop
rotating even if waiting for 40
seconds
Sequence start answer waiting time
out
DSP ready information does not
come from DSP even if waiting for
2 seconds after standby
Temporary stop time out
Time setting file cannot be read
Time out from pause to restart
Scanner stopped running due to a
long time from pause to restart in
normal scan
L2E-BW1444
Error codes
Error list messages
Dialog messages
Error contents
OT20
"Av Pattern DB Open Error " Could not open the auto voice data AV DB open error
file.
① Auto voice generation pattern
table is not present or it is
broken
② Auto voice generation pattern
table is being used at the present
application
③ Auto voice generation pattern
table cannot open
OT26
"AvData DB Open Error "
Could not open the auto voice data AV DB open error
file.
① Voice data table is not present or
it is broken
② Voice data table is being used at
the present application
③ Voice data table cannot open
OT29
"Av Pattern No. Not Existed" An error has occurred in the auto
AV pattern No. error
voice data.
Designated auto voice No. does not
exist in the generation pattern table
OT30
"AvPh No. Error"
An audio data file access error has AV standby phrase error
occurred.
Designated phrase No. does not
exist in the voice data table
An audio data file access error has AV standby phrase error
OT32
"AvPh not Exist"
occurred.
Designated phrase file (*** wav)
does not exist
An audio data file access error has AV standby phrase error
OT33
"AvPh Open Error"
occurred.
AV phrase cannot open
Please shut the system down, and
then restart.
An audio data file access error has AV standby phase error
OT34
"AvPh Play Error"
occurred.
AV phrase cannot play
Please shut the system down, and
then restart.
An audio data file access error has AV standby phrase error
OT35
"AvPh Close Error"
occurred.
AV phrase cannot be closed
Please shut the system down, and
then restart.
An audio data file access error has AV standby phrase error
OT36
"AvPh Wait Timeout"
occurred.
AV phrase end information does
Please shut the system down, and not come
then restart.
TX01
"VN Error (TXR)"
View No. non-conformity error
An error occurred in preamplifier
signal data transfer system and data
was sent again
TX02
"LRC Error (TXR)"
Horizontal parity check error
An error occurred in preamplifier
signal data transfer system and data
was sent again
TX03
"Start/End Bit Error (TXR)"
Start end bit error
An error occurred in preamplifier
signal data transfer system and data
was sent again
5－54
L2E-BW1444
Error codes
Error list messages
TX04
"Data Number Error (TXR)"
TX05
TX06
TX07
TX08
TX09
Dialog messages
Error contents
Data number error
An error occurred in preamplifier
signal data transfer system and data
was sent again
An error has occurred in the signal DAS view non-conformity error
"DAS VN Error (TXS)"
from the DAS.
Please shut the system down, and
then restart.
"DAS Data Clk Error (TXS)" An error has occurred in the signal DAS data lock out
from the DAS.
Please shut the system down, and
then restart.
An error has occurred in the data
"Retry Over (TXS)"
Retry over
transmission of a preamplifier
signal.
Please contact your service
representative.
"Data Retransmit (TXS)"
Preamplifier signal resend
"Reply Signal Error(TXS)"
Reply signal error
5－55
L2E-BW1444
5.12.2
Error codes
System error log codes table
Application names
80000000
80000001
80000002
80000003
80000004
80000005
80000006
80000007
80000008
80000009
80000020
80000021
Main Menu
Main Menu
Main Menu
Main Menu
Main Menu
Main Menu
Main Menu
Main Menu
Main Menu
Main Menu
Main Menu
Main Menu
80000022
80000030
Main Menu
Main Menu
80000031
Main Menu
80000032
Main Menu
80000033
Main Menu
80000034
Main Menu
80000035
Main Menu
80000036
Main Menu
80000037
Main Menu
80000050
80000051
Main Menu
Main Menu
80000052
80000053
Main Menu
Main Menu
80000060
80000070
Main Menu
Main Menu
80000071
Main Menu
80000072
Main Menu
Dialog messages
The Patient Reservation startup failed.
The Patient Registration startup failed.
The Scanogram startup failed.
The Scan startup failed.
The Recon. Status startup failed.
The Scan Viewer startup failed.
The Table Move Setting startup failed.
The Warm-up startup failed.
One of the system task startup failed.
The Image Explorer startup failed.
Loading of the patient information file (Pt_data.df) failed.
Loading of the scanning operation preference settings file
(UserCustom.df) failed.
Loading of the table information file (tblmove.dat) failed.
Could not establish communication with the System Monitor.
Please shut the system down, and then restart.
Failed to transmit the patient information because of communication error
with the System Monitor.
Failed to transmit the hard button information because of communication
error with the System Monitor.
Failed to transmit the table information because of communication error
with the System Monitor.
Failed to transmit the post recon. queue information because of
communication error with the System Monitor.
Failed to transmit the date/time information because of communication
error with the System Monitor.
Failed to transmit the number of remaining images that can be stored
because of communication error with the System Monitor.
Failed to transmit the online recon. information because of
communication error with the System Monitor.
Perform short Warm-up.
Short Warm-up is required.
Do you want to do it, now?
Perform Warm-up.
Warm-up is required.
Do you want to do it, now?
Do you want to shut the system down?
Are you sure you want to enter Maintenance Mode?
Keep in mind if you change any parameter in the Maintenance Mode, it
may affect the system.
Change to the System Maintenance Mode.
Are you sure you want to reboot the system to change the mode?
The following conditions are required to run the check program:
-Examination has finished.
-Post recon. is not running.
-Image Explorer is closed.
Do you want to start the check program?
5－56
L2E-BW1444
Error codes
Application names
80000073
Main Menu
8000007A
Main Menu
80000080
80000090
Main Menu
Main Menu
80000100
Main Menu
80000101
Main Menu
80000102
Main Menu
80000103
Main Menu
80000110
Main Menu
80000111
Main Menu
82000001
82000002
82000003
82000004
82000005
82000006
83000000
Table Move Settings
Table Move Settings
Table Move Settings
Table Move Settings
Table Move Settings
Table Move Settings
Post Recon.
Queue Management
Post Recon.
Queue Management
Post Recon.
Queue Management
RawData Post Recon.
Registration Task
83000001
83000002
84007000
84007001
84007002
84007003
84007004
84007005
84007006
RawData Post Recon.
Registration Task
RawData Post Recon.
Registration Task
RawData Post Recon.
Registration Task
RawData Post Recon.
Registration Task
RawData Post Recon.
Registration Task
RawData Post Recon.
Registration Task
Dialog messages
The password is incorrect.
Passwords are case sensitive.
It is necessary to close the Image Explorer in order to start up the Image
Table Reset.
Are you sure you want to close it?
(If the Recon. Status window is displayed, it will be closed.)
Do you want to exit from current patient examination?
Releasing the system lock...
Please wait...
RawData that does not correspond to Keep RawData exists.
Are you sure you want to delete now?
Deleting RawData...
Please wait...
System was shut down abnormally.
An error check will be performed.
Checking if there is any error...
Please wait...
Suspending the recon...
Please wait...
Stopping transfer...
Please wait...
There is an error in the INI file settings.
There is no configuration file.
There is no image file.
There is an error in the input data.
An unexpected error has occurred.
Input the value of *****.
There is a recon. queue in process.
Are you sure you want to stop the recon.?
All of information for recon. queue is deleted because
the previous shutdown was done abnormally.
All of information for recon. queue will be deleted.
Are you sure you want to continue?
Could not acquire the RawData information.
Click the list item again after completing processes such as scanning and
post recon.
Could not acquire the RawData information.
Perform the Image Table Reset.
The image storage capacity is insufficient.
Could not acquire the RawData patient information.
Perform the Image Table Reset.
Could not acquire the RawData series information.
Perform the Image Table Reset.
Could not acquire the RawData slice information.
Perform the Image Table Reset.
A communication time out error has occurred.
Please shut the system down, and then restart.
5－57
L2E-BW1444
Error codes
84009007
84005008
84007009
84007010
Application names
RawData Post Recon.
Registration Task
RawData Post Recon.
Registration Task
RawData Post Recon.
Registration Task
RawData Post Recon.
Registration Task
84007011
RawData Post Recon.
Registration Task
85000000
90001011
Auto-Transfer
Queue Management
Auto-Transfer
Queue Management
System Monitor
90001015
System Monitor
90001016
System Monitor
90002001
System Monitor
90002002
System Monitor
90002003
System Monitor
90002004
System Monitor
90002005
System Monitor
90002006
System Monitor
90002007
System Monitor
90002008
System Monitor
85000001
Dialog messages
The registration to the post recon. queue was completed.
Do you want to run the registered queue?
Could not run the post recon. queue.
Open the Recon. Status window and try to run the post recon. queue.
RawData of the following slice numbers does not exist.
*****
Please do not include the displayed slice number in the image
reconstruction range.
Since RawData of the following slice numbers do not exist,
it could not register them to the post recon. queue.
*****
Please do not include the displayed slice number in the image
reconstruction range.
Transfer is being performed.
Are you sure you want to stop transfer?
Stopping *****...
Please wait...
A communication error between applications has occurred.
Please shut the system down, and then restart.
An error has occurred while checking the Raw Data management file.
There is a problem with the Raw Data disk.
Please contact your service representative.
An error has occurred while recreating the Raw Data management file.
The Raw Data disk has some problems.
Please contact your service representative.
RawData could not be acquired.
Either there is no RawData, or there is a problem with the RawData disk.
Please contact your service representative.
RawData could not be written.
There is a problem with the RawData disk.
Please contact your service representative.
RawData could not be deleted.
Either there is no RawData, or there is a problem with the RawData disk.
Please contact your service representative.
RawData disk could not be initialized.
Please contact your service representative.
Could not acquire the RawData information.
Either there is no RawData, or there is a problem with the RawData disk.
Please contact your service representative.
Could not protect the RawData.
Either there is no RawData, or there is a problem with the RawData disk.
Please contact your service representative.
Could not unprotect the RawData.
Either there is no RawData, or there is a problem with the RawData disk.
Please contact your service representative.
Could not sort the RawData.
Please contact your service representative.
5－58
L2E-BW1444
Error codes
Application names
90002009
System Monitor
90002010
System Monitor
90002011
System Monitor
90002012
System Monitor
90002013
System Monitor
90008012
System Monitor
90008013
System Monitor
90008014
System Monitor
91000001
CPU0 Startup Process
91000002
CPU0 Startup Process
A0000001
A0000002
A0000003
A0000004
A0000005
A0000006
Patient Reservation
Patient Reservation
Patient Reservation
Patient Reservation
Patient Reservation
Patient Reservation
A0000007
Patient Reservation
A0000010
A0000011
A0000012
A0000013
Patient Reservation
Patient Reservation
Patient Reservation
Patient Reservation
A0000014
A0000016
A0000017
A1000001
A1000002
A1000003
A1000004
A1000005
Patient Reservation
Patient Reservation
Patient Reservation
Patient Registration
Patient Registration
Patient Registration
Patient Registration
Patient Registration
A1000006
Patient Registration
Dialog messages
Could not acquire the RawData information.
Please contact your service representative.
Could not acquire the RawData information.
Please contact your service representative.
Could not acquire the RawData information.
Please contact your service representative.
Could not acquire the RawData information.
Please contact your service representative.
Could not acquire the RawData information.
Please contact your service representative.
The system has stopped because of Emergency switch activation.
After checking for safety, click [OK] button to release the Emergency
status.
The system has stopped because of the touch sensor activation.
After checking for safety, click [OK] button to release the stop status.
The system has stopped because of the occurrence of a backup timer
error.
Click [OK] button to release the stop status.
Could not connect with the CRT side computer.
Please shut the system down, and then restart.
The startup procedure failed.
Please contact your service representative.
There is an error in the INI file settings.
There is no preference settings file.
There is no image file.
There is no applicable table.
There is no Japanese era file.
The patient name must be entered.
Input the patient name.
The following characters are not available in the patient ID.
\/:*? <>|.
Input a different character.
***** is not a numerical value.
There is an error in the input data for *****.
An unexpected error has occurred.
Are you sure you want to delete the reserved data whose patient name is
*****?
There is no *****.
Set the scan protocol.
Do you want to register the input information?
There is an error in the INI file settings.
There is no preference settings file (*****).
There is no image file.
There is no applicable table.
The patient ID must be entered.
Input the patient ID.
The following characters cannot be used in the patient ID.
\/:*? <>|.
Input a different character.
5－59
L2E-BW1444
Error codes
Application names
A1000009
A1000010
Patient Registration
Patient Registration
A1000011
Patient Registration
A1000012
A1000014
Patient Registration
Patient Registration
A1000015
A1000017
A1000018
A1000019
A1000020
A1000021
Patient Registration
Patient Registration
Patient Registration
Patient Registration
Patient Registration
Patient Registration
A1000030
A1000031
Patient Registration
Patient Registration
A1000032
Patient Registration
A1000033
Patient Registration
A1000034
Patient Registration
A1000035
Patient Registration
A2000000
A2000001
A2000002
A2000003
A2000004
A3000000
A3000001
A3000002
A3000003
A3000004
B0001000
Work List
Work List
Work List
Work List
Work List
MPPS
MPPS
MPPS
MPPS
MPPS
SCServer
B0001001
SCServer
B0001002
SCServer
B0007003
SCServer
B0007004
SCServer
B0002005
SCServer
Dialog messages
***** is not a numerical value.
The patient name has not been input.
Do you want to set \None\" to the patient name and proceed to scanning?"
There is an error in the input data for *****.
An unexpected error has occurred.
Data with different information already exists for the same patient ID.
*****
There is no patient registration file (*****).
Input the name of the contrast media.
Input a value from ***** to ***** for the Rate.
There is no *****.
Set scan protocol.
Since patient information was updated as the same patient registration,
another folder will be created.
The current scan plan will be invalid.
Are you sure you want to continue?
*****
There is no work list message file.
Are you sure you want to proceed to scanning with these settings?
Feet First is set with ***** protocol.
Are you sure you want to proceed to scanning with these settings?
An orientation that differs from the scan protocol orientation has been set.
Are you sure you want to proceed to scanning with these settings?
Data with the same patient information exist in the Reservation List.
Are you sure you want to overwrite the input patient information?
Pat. Info. was not saved because data with different information already
exists for the same patient ID.
*****
*****
*****
*****
There is no work list message file.
*****
*****
*****
*****
*****
A communication error has occurred with the CPU0.
Please shut the system down, and then restart..
Failed to initialize SCServer.
Please shut the system down, and then restart.
Failed to access memory.
Please shut the system down, and then restart.
Failed to load the following file.
*****
Failed to write the following file.
*****
An unknown error has been received.
5－60
L2E-BW1444
Error codes
Application names
B0012000
B0012001
B0012002
B0022000
SCServer
SCServer
SCServer
SCServer
B0025001
SCServer
B0044000
SCServer
B0045001
SCServer
B0042002
B0042003
B0042004
SCServer
SCServer
SCServer
B0043005
B0043006
SCServer
SCServer
B0043007
SCServer
B0043008
SCServer
B0043009
SCServer
B004200A
SCServer
B004200B
SCServer
B004200C
SCServer
B004200D
SCServer
B004200E
SCServer
B004200F
SCServer
B0047010
SCServer
B0047011
SCServer
B0047012
SCServer
B0047013
SCServer
Dialog messages
An error occurred while correcting the table position.
An error occurred while correcting the scan timing.
An error occurred during the image disk access procedure.
HU will exceed the limit for scan with current parameters.
Correct the scan parameters.
HU wait has occurred. ***** seconds remaining until start.
Do you want to continue scanning?
The following parameters were out of the limits, and have therefore been
changed automatically.
*****
The sequence will be deleted.
Are you sure you want to continue?
The image storage capacity is insufficient.
The RawData storage capacity is insufficient.
The scanner is busy with another process.
Please wait...
The maximum number of sequences has been reached.
The protocol for air calibration (Protocol Mode) has not been registered.
Set the scan protocol.
Cannot add a sequence because it will be over the maximum number of
sequences.
Delete the unscanned sequence, and then click [Re-use. Seq.] button
again.
The number of scans / rotations exceed the limit.
Set the No. of Scans / Rotations less than or equal to *****.
Multiple scans will be run at the same position.
Are you sure you want to continue?
Generator overload.
Correct the scan parameters.
Delay error.
Correct the scan parameters.
Scanning range has been exceeded.
Correct the scan parameters.
The maximum number of images exceed for one sequence.
Correct the scan parameters.
The maximum number of scans / rotations exceed for one examination.
Correct the scan parameters.
Due to a large number of images, the reconstruction process will not be
completed before the next scan begins.
Correct the scan parameters.
Moving the table or gantry...
Please wait...
Scan in progress...
Please wait...
Check program in progress...
Please wait...
Locking the system...
Please wait...
5－61
L2E-BW1444
Error codes
Application names
B0047014
SCServer
B0047015
SCServer
B0048016
SCServer
B0045017
SCServer
B0048018
B0047019
SCServer
SCServer
B004701A
SCServer
B004701B
B004701C
SCServer
SCServer
B004501D
SCServer
B004501E
SCServer
B004501F
SCServer
B0064000
SCServer
B0064001
SCServer
B0064002
SCServer
B0064003
SCServer
Dialog messages
Gantry power supply is OFF.
Press [GANTRY] button.
Starting up the gantry...
Please wait...
The number of scans / rotations exceed the limit.
Register as same Patient again.
The current table height differs from the table height of the last
scanogram.
Height of Scano.: ***** mm
Current Height : ***** mm
Do you want to continue?
The multi recon. parameter was changed for ***** change.
There is an error in the multi recon. process.
Perform a post recon. using the Image Explorer.
The maximum number of images exceeded for multi recon.
Correct the scan parameters.
Add this scanning sequence.
Because no reference image exists, Predict Scan cannot be performed.
Change to other than Predict protocol, scan a reference image, and then
perform Predict Scan.
Air Calibration for these scan parameters (Tube Voltage, Collimation)
cannot be performed with Warm-up / Air Calibration normally used.
Select this Tube Voltage and Collimation in Air Calibration (Select) of
Warm-up, and then perform Air Calibration.
(This message will also be displayed after the Air Calibration has been
performed.)
Did you perform Air Calibration?
Yes >> Perform scanning.
No >> Return to preparation for scanning, and then perform Air
Calibration according to the above method.
The orientation for the selected protocol is different from the orientation
set in the Patient Registration.
If the protocol is changed, check the scanning direction.
Are you sure you want to make changes?
Monitoring may not be performed correctly on the set ROI position
because the gantry angle of the reference image is different from that of
the actual predict scan.
Move the ROI position on the monitoring image as necessary.
ReScan cannot be performed because there is no
normal scan image.
The scan including the selected image has already been registered.
Included in the scan of Series No.*****, Image No.*****.
The Multi-recon. image was selected.
Registers the main recon. image of this image. (Series No.*****, Image
No.*****)
Multi-recon. processing is not complete.Imcomplete multi-recon.
conditions cannot be registered for ReScan.
If the multi-recon. image is needed, clear the registration and register it
again when multi-recon. processing is complete.
5－62
L2E-BW1444
Error codes
Application names
B0064004
SCServer
B0074000
B00A5000
SCServer
SCServer
B00A4001
B00A4002
SCServer
SCServer
C0000000
IViewer
C0000001
IViewer
D0001000
Check Program
D0001001
Check Program
D1000001
D1000002
Error List Display
Error List Display
D1000003
Error List Display
D1000004
Error List Display
D1000005
D1000007
Error List Display
Error List Display
D1000008
D1000009
D100000A
Error List Display
Error List Display
Error List Display
D2000001
E0000001
Phantom Calibration
/CT Number Adjustment
Phantom Calibration
/CT Number Adjustment
Phantom Calibration
/CT Number Adjustment
Auto Voice Settings
E0000002
Auto Voice Settings
E0000003
Auto Voice Settings
E0000004
E0000005
Auto Voice Settings
Auto Voice Settings
D2000002
D2000003
Dialog messages
Images other than normal scan exist.
Images other than normal scan are not targeted for ReScan, and not
displayed during the ReScan process.
Auto Zoom cannot be performed because there is no target image.
If the protocol is deleted once, it will not be retrieved.
Are you sure you want to delete *****?
There is no previous scan protocol.
There is no region for the last scan protocol.
The region for the selected protocol is set.
Another process caused the timeout.
Please shut the system down, and then restart.
Image Layout operation is not complete.
Complete Image Layout.
There is no response from the CPU0.
Check Program is terminated.
Please shut the system down, and then restart.
The communication with the CPU0 was disconnected.
Check Program is terminated.
Please shut the system down, and then restart.
***** drive is disabled.
There is no MO disk in the drive.
Insert a MO disk into drive *****:.
The MO disk in drive *****: is write protected.
Unlock its write protection and try to copy again.
The MO disk in drive *****: is not formatted correctly.
Check the MO disk, and then format it if necessary.
I/O error (*****)
Failed to copy the error log.
File Name: *****
Failed to clear the error log.
***** was set to *****.
The error log could not be copied due to insufficient space on the MO
disk.
Insert another MO disk and try to copy again.
A data error has occurred. Calculations after ***** are canceled. (*****)
Perform a scan again.
There is insufficient memory.
Please shut the system down, and then restart.
Could not acquire the phantom image.
Set an appropriate phantom and scan again.
Are you sure you want to delete the '*****' pattern?
Pattern name '*****' already exists.
Set other pattern name.
The pattern name is blank.
The pattern name should be entered.
Are you sure you want to delete the '*****' phrase?
Phrase comment '*****' already exists.
Add a different phrase comment.
5－63
L2E-BW1444
Error codes
Application names
Dialog messages
E0000006
Auto Voice Settings
E0000007
Auto Voice Settings
E0000008
Auto Voice Settings
E0000009
Auto Voice Settings
E0000010
Auto Voice Settings
E0000011
Auto Voice Settings
E1000001
E1000002
E1000003
E1000004
E1000005
E1000006
E1000007
E1000008
E1000009
E1000010
E1000011
E1000012
E2000001
E2000002
E2000003
E2000004
E2000005
E2000006
E2000007
E2000008
E2000009
E2000010
E2000011
E2000012
Series Comment Registration
Series Comment Registration
Series Comment Registration
Series Comment Registration
Series Comment Registration
Series Comment Registration
Series Comment Registration
Series Comment Registration
Series Comment Registration
Series Comment Registration
Series Comment Registration
Series Comment Registration
Protocol Group Registration
Protocol Group Registration
Protocol Group Registration
Protocol Group Registration
Protocol Group Registration
Protocol Group Registration
Protocol Group Registration
Protocol Group Registration
Protocol Group Registration
Protocol Group Registration
Protocol Group Registration
Protocol Group Registration
E2000013
E2000014
E3000001
Protocol Group Registration
Protocol Group Registration
Patient/Study
Comment Registration
Patient/Study
Failed to back up the table.
Comment Registration
Patient/Study
Failed to update the table.
Comment Registration
Patient/Study
Failed to delete the backup file.
Comment Registration
E3000002
E3000003
E3000004
The phrase comment is blank.
The phrase comment should be input.
A recording/playback error has occurred.
Check if recording or playback is in progress.
The Auto Voice Settings cannot be started.
Please contact your service representative.
The Auto Voice Settings startup failed.
If you want to perform the Auto Voice Settings, shut the system down,
and then restart.
The Auto Voice Settings caused an error.
If you want to perform the Auto Voice Settings again, shut the system
down, and then restart.
Register some phrases.
If any phrase is not registered, auto voice pattern is not ready to set.
There is an error in the INI file settings.
Failed to back up the table.
Failed to update the table.
Failed to delete the backup file.
A DB exception error has occurred.
Input a comment.
The same comment has already been registered.
There is no applicable table.
An unexpected error has occurred.
Are you sure you want to delete *****?
There is no preference settings file.
Do you want to register this comment?
There is an error in the INI file settings.
Failed to delete the backup file.
Failed to update the table.
Failed to delete the backup file.
A DB exception error has occurred.
Input the protocol group name.
The same name is already registered.
There is no applicable table.
The basic group has not been registered.
The maximum number of the protocol group is 5.
An unexpected error has occurred.
Are you sure you want to delete all scanogram and scan protocols
classified in the ***** group?
There is no preference settings file.
Do you want to register this protocol group?
There is an error in the INI file settings.
5－64
L2E-BW1444
Error codes
E3000005
E3000006
E3000007
E3000008
E3000009
E3000010
E3000011
E3000012
E4000001
E4000002
E4000003
E4000004
E4000005
E4000006
E4000007
E4000008
E4000009
E4000010
E4000011
E4000012
E4000013
E5000001
E5000002
E5000003
E5000004
E5000005
E5000006
E5000007
Application names
Patient/Study
Comment Registration
Patient/Study
Comment Registration
Patient/Study
Comment Registration
Patient/Study
Comment Registration
Patient/Study
Comment Registration
Patient/Study
Comment Registration
Patient/Study
Comment Registration
Patient/Study
Comment Registration
Physician/Operator Name
Registration
Physician/Operator Name
Registration
Physician/Operator Name
Registration
Physician/Operator Name
Registration
Physician/Operator Name
Registration
Physician/Operator Name
Registration
Physician/Operator Name
Registration
Physician/Operator Name
Registration
Physician/Operator Name
Registration
Physician/Operator Name
Registration
Physician/Operator Name
Registration
Physician/Operator Name
Registration
Physician/Operator Name
Registration
Contrast Media Settings
Contrast Media Settings
Contrast Media Settings
Contrast Media Settings
Contrast Media Settings
Contrast Media Settings
Contrast Media Settings
Dialog messages
A DB exception error has occurred.
Input a comment.
The same comment has already been registered.
There is no applicable table.
An unexpected error has occurred.
Are you sure you want to delete *****?
There is no preference settings file.
Do you want to register this comment?
There is an error in the INI file settings.
Failed to back up the table.
Failed to update the table.
Failed to delete the backup file.
A DB exception error has occurred.
Input a name.
The same name has already been registered.
There is no applicable table.
An unexpected error has occurred.
Are you sure you want to delete *****?
There is an error in the character code for *****.
There is no preference settings file.
Do you want to register this *****?
There is an error in the INI file settings.
Failed to back up the table.
Failed to update the table.
Failed to delete the backup file.
A DB exception error has occurred.
Input a contrast media name.
The same information has already been registered.
5－65
L2E-BW1444
Error codes
E5000008
E5000009
E5000010
E5000011
E5000012
E5000013
E5000014
E7000001
Application names
E8000001
E8000002
Contrast Media Settings
Contrast Media Settings
Contrast Media Settings
Contrast Media Settings
Contrast Media Settings
Contrast Media Settings
Contrast Media Settings
Institution Information
Settings
Institution Information
Settings
Study Number Setting
Study Number Setting
E8000003
E8000004
E8000005
EA000001
EA000002
EA000003
EA000004
EA000005
EA000006
EA000007
EA000008
EA000009
EA000010
EB000001
Study Number Setting
Study Number Setting
Study Number Setting
Accord Mode Settings
Accord Mode Settings
Accord Mode Settings
Accord Mode Settings
Accord Mode Settings
Accord Mode Settings
Accord Mode Settings
Accord Mode Settings
Accord Mode Settings
Accord Mode Settings
Preference Settings
EB000002
Preference Settings
EB000003
Preference Settings
EB000004
Preference Settings
EB000005
Preference Settings
EB000007
Preference Settings
EB000008
Preference Settings
EB000009
Preference Settings
EB000010
Preference Settings
E7000003
Dialog messages
There is no applicable table.
There is an error in the input data.
An unexpected error has occurred.
Are you sure you want to delete *****?
Input a value from ***** to ***** for the injection rate.
There is no environment settings file.
Do you want to register this contrast media information?
Input the data.
An unexpected error has occurred.
There is an error in the INI file settings.
The Study No. Setting cannot be started.
Register the patient, and then start up the Study No. Setting again.
An unexpected error has occurred.
Input the data.
The input data is not a numerical value.
There is an error in the INI file settings.
Failed to back up the table.
Failed to update the table.
Failed to delete the backup file.
A DB exception error has occurred.
An unexpected error has occurred.
There is no configuration file.
The accord mode has not been registered.
There is no applicable table.
Input a value from *****.
The Preference Settings cannot be started, because there is no region data
file.
The Preference Settings cannot be started, because the region data file
cannot be accessed.
Failed to write the preference data.
These data cannot be saved.
Preference Settings will exit.
Failed to write the region data.
These data cannot be saved.
Environment Settings will exit.
The following characters are invalid for fixed.
/:*?"<>|.
Input the valid characters.
Input the number of days/studies that RawData is to be kept.
Input a value from 1 to ***** for the number of days that RawData is to
be kept.
Input a value from 1 to ***** for the number of studies of RawData to be
kept.
The Preference Settings cannot be started, because there is no protocol
group data file.
5－66
L2E-BW1444
Error codes
Application names
EB000011
Preference Settings
EB000012
EB000013
EC000001
Preference Settings
Preference Settings
Region Registration
EC000002
EC000003
EC000004
EC000005
EC000006
EC000007
EC000008
EC000009
EC000010
EC000011
EC000012
EC000013
EC000014
EC000015
EC000016
EC000017
Region Registration
Region Registration
Region Registration
Region Registration
Region Registration
Region Registration
Region Registration
Region Registration
Region Registration
Region Registration
Region Registration
Region Registration
Region Registration
Region Registration
Region Registration
Region Registration
EC000018
Region Registration
F0000001
Calculator
F1000001
CPU1 Startup Process
F1000002
CPU1 Startup Process
F2000001
Image Table Reset
F2000002
Image Table Reset
F2000003
Image Table Reset
F2000004
Image Table Reset
F2000005
Image Table Reset
F2000006
Image Table Reset
Dialog messages
The Preference Settings cannot be started, because the protocol group
data file cannot be accessed.
Enter No. of Fixed Digits.
Enter a value from ***** to ***** for No. of Fixed Digits.
Since another region is already registered on the same position, it cannot
be updated.
Input the region name.
Are you sure you want to delete the region name *****?
A communication error has occurred.
A data error has occurred.
Set the DICOM region name.
There is an error in the INI file settings.
Failed to back up the table.
Failed to update the table.
Failed to delete the backup file.
There is no applicable table.
There is no image file.
An unexpected error has occurred.
Do you want to register this region information?
The original DICOM region cannot be changed or deleted.
Cannot connect to the database.
Are you sure you want to delete the DICOM region
information of *****?
The region information cannot be changed because
***** is write-protected.
The calculator cannot be started.
Please contact your service representative.
Could not connect with the submonitor side computer.
Please shut the system down, and then restart.
The startup procedure failed.
Please contact your service representative.
If the Image Table Reset is cancelled, images and RawData may not be
displayed in the image list, and the post recon. may not be executed.
Are you sure you want to cancel?
Initial process failed.
Please contact your service representative.
Not all lock files could be deleted.
Please shut the system down, and then restart. And try the Image Table
Reset again.
Not all database could be deleted.
Please shut the system down, and then restart. And try the Image Table
Reset again.
Failed to re-create the image table.
Please shut the system down, and then restart. And try the Image Table
Reset again.
Failed to acquire the number of images.
Please shut the system down, and then restart. And try the Image Table
Reset again.
5－67
L2E-BW1444
Error codes
Application names
F2000007
Image Table Reset
F2000008
F2000009
Image Table Reset
Image Table Reset
F200000A
F200000B
Image Table Reset
Image Table Reset
F3000001
Image Table Reset
F3000002
Image Table Reset
F3000003
F3000004
Image Table Reset
Image Table Reset
F3000005
Image Table Reset
F3000006
Image Table Reset
F3000007
Image Table Reset
F3000008
Image Table Reset
F3000009
Image Table Reset
F300000A
Image Table Reset
F300000B
Image Table Reset
F4000000
Image Table Reset
F4000001
Save User Data /
Service Backup
Save User Data /
Service Backup
Save User Data /
Service Backup
Save User Data /
Service Backup
Save User Data /
Service Backup
F4000002
F4000003
F4000004
F4000005
Dialog messages
Failed to acquire the number of Raw Data.
Please shut the system down, and then restart. And try the Image Table
Reset again.
***** image files cannot be re-created. These files may be damaged.
***** RawData files cannot be re-created. These files may be damaged.
Are you sure you want to delete these files?
***** image files could not be re-created. These files may be damaged.
Failed to acquire the last patient's information.
'The Last patient' is not available for the Image Table Reset.
Select one of 'All', 'Image', or 'RawData', and perform Image Table Reset.
***** has been changed.
Do you want to save this image?
***** already exists.
Do you want to overwrite this image?
Input a file name.
The directory name is invalid.
The following symbols cannot be used for directory name.
/:*?"<>|
Also \ can be used only as a directory separator.
The file name is invalid.
The following characters are invalid for a file name.
/ : * ? "< > |
There is no MO disk in the drive.
Insert a MO disk into drive *****.
The MO disk in drive *****: is write protected.
Unlock its write protection and try to save again.
The MO disk in drive *****: is not formatted correctly.
Check the MO disk, and then format it if necessary.
The image could not be saved because the disk in the destination drive is
full.
Insert another disk to continue.
An error has occurred.
Error Code: *****
Failed to paste the image.
Select [Edit - Paste] from the main menu to paste the image.
The disk in drive ***** has not been initialized to save data.
Are you sure you want to initialize now?
Warning: Initializing the disk will erase all data on the MO disk.
Are you sure you want to delete selected items?
The startup process failed.
Could not create the folder.
The disk is write protected.
Check the write protection setting.
Could not complete the processing.
5－68
L2E-BW1444
Error codes
F4000006
F4000007
F4000008
F4000009
F400000A
F400000B
F5000001
F5000002
F5000003
F5000004
F5000005
F5000006
F5000007
F5000008
F5000009
F5000010
F5000011
F5000012
Application names
Save User Data /
Service Backup
Save User Data /
Service Backup
Save User Data /
Service Backup
Save User Data /
Service Backup
Save User Data /
Service Backup
Save User Data /
Service Backup
System Configuration
Settings
System Configuration
Settings
System Configuration
Settings
System Configuration
Settings
System Configuration
Settings
System Configuration
Settings
System Configuration
Settings
System Configuration
Settings
System Configuration
Settings
System Configuration
Settings
System Configuration
Settings
System Configuration
Settings
Dialog messages
The disk in drive ***** is insufficient.
Insert another disk.
Cannot create a temporary file.
The disk in drive ***** has been initialized for service data.
It cannot be initialized for saving data.
Could not format the disk.
Formatting disk was cancelled.
Error formatting the disk.
Cannot find the system configuration type file.
Cannot execute the system configuration setting.
Cannot find the system configuration file.
Cannot execute the setting.
Cannot find the copy source file.
Cannot execute the setting.
Cannot find the edit destination file.
Cannot execute the setting.
The edit destination file is for reading only.
Cannot execute the setting.
A file access error has occurred.
Cannot execute the setting.
Cannot find the copy source folder.
Cannot execute the setting.
The copy destination file name is incorrect.
Cannot execute the setting.
The copy destination file is for reading only.
Cannot execute the setting.
Do you want to apply the settings?
The setting has not been applied.
Do you want to exit without change?
Please shut the system down, and then restart.
5－69
L2E-BW1444
5.12.3
Details of DSP error codes
Error codes
Contents
Remarks
0x00000000
Normal end
0x00000001
Suspended end (Suspension command from application program)
Set by scan DSP
0x00000002
Suspended end (EOS from scanner)
Set by scan DSP
0x00010001
Parameter status (parameter start) error
0x00010002
Parameter read error
0x00010003
Parameter transfer error to scan DSP
0x00010004
Calibration data transfer error (including the waiting for parameter transfer end)
0x00010010
Scan DSP start (demand transfer) error
0x0002****
Parameter error (Lower significant 4 digits show an error
Set by scan DSP
parameter address)
0x0003*1*2*3*4 Measure buffer data error (See the following figure)
*1
*2
# # # #
# # 0 0
Set by scan DSP
*3
*4
bit15
bit0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
View header error
Measure buffer overflow
Link port error
Channel number error
Data higher-significant 16 bits error
View number error
Details of major buffer data errors
0x00050000
Inter-DSP communication error (Scan DSP answer time-out, etc.)
5－70
L2E-BW1444
5.13 Event viewer
5.13.1
Introduction
The event viewer is a system event monitoring program assembled in Windows Xp Embedded as
standard program. By using the event viewer, detailed information such as system start and error, etc.
occurred during Presto system operation can be known.
5.13.2
Method of use
(1) Start the system in system maintenance mode. (See 5.11)
(2) An event viewer window is displayed by clicking [Start] button and selecting [Programs] [Administrative Tools] - [Event Viewer] from the start menu.
5－71
L2E-BW1444
(3) An event properties window is displayed by double-clicking a desired detailed information event.
The event properties window is closed by clicking [OK] or [Cancel] button.
(4) The event viewer is closed by selecting [File｜Exit] from the event viewer screen menu.
5－72
L2E-BW1444
5.14 Touch panel calibration
When the touch panel is replaced with another or the coordinates on the touch panel is out of alignment, make
calibration of the touch panel. In this system, more than one touch panels are used. Locate the devices being
connected and make calibration of an appropriate device.
5.14.1
Locating touch panels
Touch panels available can be located by corresponding device drivers installed.
If “Fujitsu Takamisawa Touch Panel driver (Windows2000/XP)” device is registered, it is considered to
be touch panel 2 (see 5.14.3). If not, it is regarded as touch panel 1 (see 5.14.2).
Click Device Manager on the Computer Management window, and click “Mice and other pointing
devices” on the right side window to determine whether “Fujitsu Takamisawa Touch Panel driver
(Windows2000/XP)” device is registered.
To display Computer Management, click [Start] button, choose [Programs], [Administrative Tools], and
[Computer Management] in this order, and click “Device Manager” on the left side window.
5－73
L2E-BW1444
5.14.2
Calibration of touch panel 1
(1) Start the system in system maintenance mode (see 5.11).
(2) Replace the keyboard cable from CPU1 cable connector (83CN) to CPU0 cable connector
(63CN).
(3) Press
to display Start menu. Using ↑ ↓ ← or →, choose [Programs], [Fujitsu Touch
Panel], and [Touch Panel Calibration] in this order, and then press
Enter
key.
(4) Keep depressing the ‘+’ mark on the upper left corner with a fingertip for five seconds, and release it.
The ‘+’ will move to the next. Repeat this for nine points, upper left, upper center, upper right, middle
left, center, lower left, lower center, and lower right, respectively, then press
Enter
.
(5) At the bottom of screen, the following message appears. Press [Enter] to apply the calibration.
(6) After replacing the keyboard cable from CPU0 cable connector (63CN) to CPU1 cable connector
(83CN), choose [Start] and [Start the CT System] to start CT system.
5－74
L2E-BW1444
5.14.3
Calibration of touch panel 2
(1) Start the system in system maintenance mode (see 5.11).
(2) Replace the keyboard cable from CPU1 cable connector (83CN) to CPU0 cable connector
(63CN).
(3) Press
to display Start menu. Using ↑ ↓ ← or →, choose [Programs], [Fujitsu Touch
Panel], and [Touch Panel Calibration] in this order, and then press
Enter
key.
(4) Choose [Calibration].
5－75
L2E-BW1444
(5) Click [Calibration Now] button.
(6) Keep depressing the ‘+’ mark on the upper left corner with a fingertip for five seconds, and release it. The
‘+’ will move to the next. Repeat this for nine points, upper left, upper center, upper right, middle left, center,
lower left, lower center, and lower right, respectively, then press
5－76
Enter
.
L2E-BW1444
(7) At the top of screen, the following message appears. Press [Update] to apply the calibration.
(8) After replacing the keyboard cable from CPU0 cable connector (63CN) to CPU1 cable connector
(83CN), choose [Start] and [Start the CT System] to start CT system.
5.15 Cache off setting of MO drive
When replacing the MO drive with another, set the write cache setting to OFF.
REFERENCE
Cache off setting is reflected after the CT system is restarted.
(1) Switch the mode to system maintenance mode (see 5.11).
(2) Set the application installation disk (V1.32 or later) in the CD drive.
(3) On the Windows Explorer, open E: drive and double-click “DisableMOWriteCache.exe”.
(4) When Confirm dialog box appears, click [Yes] button.
(5)
Choose [Start] and [Start the CT System] to start the CT system.
5－77
L2E-BW1444
5.16 Tube current graph
Tube current value graph is a function which chronologically displays tube current values recorded in the Raw
data that was taken by the CT unit.
5.16.1
Start/Exit
(1) Click [System/Exit] button on the main menu, and select [Maintenance], [Services], and [Tube
Current Graph] on the menu displayed.
(2) Tube Current Graph dialog is displayed.
(3) Click ‘x’ button on the upper right, or click [Exit] of [File] menu to exit the dialog.
5－78
L2E-BW1444
5.16.2
Opening Raw data
(1) Click [Open] from [File] menu.
(2) The Open RawData dialog is displayed.
The Open RawData dialog is the one that lists patient information and series information tables
vertically. When clicking any one line on the patient information table, series information just
below the line is switched to the information of the selected patient.
By clicking the series you wish to view on the series table and then clinking [OK] button, tube
current values recorded in the Raw data of the selected series are displayed.
Click [Cancel] button to close the dialog box without doing anything.
Note: The dialog illustrated above is an example, which may differ from that actually displayed.
(3) Press [OK] to display Reading Data dialog.
While reading RawData, reading progress can be seen on the dialog. This dialog is displayed until
[Cancel] button is clicked to abort reading RawData, and disappears automatically when the
processing is completed.
5－79
L2E-BW1444
(4) Graph of tube current values is displayed.
In addition to the graph, user-set tube current value, and maximum, minimum, and average tube
current values are displayed at the bottom of the screen.
Note: The dialog illustrated above is an example, which may differ from that actually displayed.
5.16.3
Viewing chart
Immediately after reading RawData, allowable length of the horizontal axis on the screen is up to ten
seconds. Where entire scanning time of the series selected exceeds ten seconds, entire graph can be
displayed by using the scroll bar located at the bottom of the graph to scroll the time axis sideward.
(1) Scaling along time axis
To take a closer look of the graph, time axis can be scaled up or down by using up/down buttons of the
time axis scaling list box. In the list box, length of time axis is displayed on the left hand side of the
buttons.
Pressing the up arrow button will scale down the graph; while pressing the down arrow button will scale
up the graph. The minimum width of the time axis is 0.1 seconds, and the maximum 100 seconds.
Note: If total scanning time of the series which was read is below 100 seconds, length of time axis
may not set to 100 seconds.
5－80
L2E-BW1444
(2) Scaling along tube current value axis
To take a closer look of the graph, tube current axis can be scaled up or down by using up/down buttons
of the tube current axis scaling list box. In the list box, length of tube axis is displayed on the left hand
side of the buttons.
Pressing the up arrow button will scale down the graph; while pressing the down arrow button will scale
up the graph. The minimum width of the tube curent axis is 1 mA, and the maximum 500 mA.
Note: If the maximum tube current value of the series which was read is below 500 mA, length of tube
current value axis may not set to 500 mA.
5－81
291 L2E-BW1444
Section 6
Software installation
6.1 Summary of software installation
Software installation comprises [system installation] and [application installation].
In [system installation], CPU0 and CPU1 systems are installed on DOS base. This applies to Windows Xp
Embedded system and system environment of various drivers, etc. In the application installation, software is
installed to CPU0 system and CPU1 system after system installation. This applies to the development
application and various short cuts.
The install flow of software is shown below.
(1) Perform service backup ( saving of user data and service data) without fail before installing
software. *1
(2) After installing software, restore the data that have been saved in (1), and restart the system.
Set the system configuration. *2
(3) Perform both CPU0 and CPU1 without fail when installing the system.
(4) Data base of image/raw data must be reconstructed when the system installation mode is
SYSTEM INSTALL (See chapter 6.2) (when image/raw data are not initialized). Perform the
image table resetting after installing the application. *3
(5) If the application installation only was done in the system where DICOM transmission software
is installed, delete the DICOM transmission software. *4
6－1
L2E-BW1444
START
*1
User data and service data saving (Chapter 5.10)
Not executed
System installation
Executed
CPU1 installation (Chapter 6.2.1)
CPU0 installation (Chapter 6.2.2)
Computer name change (3.18 )
Application installation (Chapter 6.3)
Not installed
Whether system is installed or not
*4 Deletion of DICOM transmission software (3.19.2)
Installed
Setting of system serial number (Chapter 6.4)
Setting of LAN card (Chapter 3.19.1)
Entry of DICOM transmission software (Chapter 3.19.3)
*2
Restore of user data and service data (Chapter 5.10)
and system configuration setting (Chapter 5.5)
*3
Is the system installation mode
“SYSTEM INSTALL” ?
NO
YES
Image table reset
( [System / Exit] - [Image Table Resetting] )
END
6－2
L2E-BW1444
6.2 System installation
The system install work flow differs according to whether HD is replaced or not and whether data ( images/Raw
Data ) being saved in HD are initialized or not as shown below.
START
Not replaced
Whether CPU1 side HD is
replaced or not
Replaced
RAID disk initialization (Chapter 7.1)
Not initialized
Whether Images are
initialized or not
Initialized
CPU1 system installation in DISK
INITIALIZE AND SYSTEM INSTALL mode
CPU1 system installation in
SYSTEM INSTALL mode
Not replaced
Whether CPU0 side HD is
replaced or not
Replaced
Initialized
Whether raw data are
initialized or not
Not initialized
CPU0 system installation in DISK INITIALIZE
AND SYSTEM INSTALL mode
CPU0 system installation in
system install mode
END
<Important:Difference of install modes (DISK INITIALIZE AND SYSTEM INSTALL and SYSTEM INSTALL>
* DISK INITIALIZE AND SYSTEM INSTALL
Prepare disk partition and install the system. Select this mode when a unused disk or image/raw data is
initialized or when the disk partition is broken.
* SYSTEM INSTALL
Leave the disk partition other than basic partition as it is, and perform the system installation only. Select
this mode when the disk partition is free of trouble and image/raw data are not initialized.
* It is not necessary to equalize the install mode on CPU0 side and CPU1 side.
6－3
L2E-BW1444
6.2.1
CPU1 system installation
When CPU1 side disk has been replaced, initialize RAID disk (Chapter 7.1) before starting the
system installation.
(1) Insert a NO BOOT FD into the FD drive.
(2) Turn on the OC side power supply, and soon, insert a “CPU1 SYSTEM INSTALL DISK” into the CD
drive.
(3) After CD has been booted and the install menu of CPU1 system has been displayed, perform Step 1 of
install menu Input ‘1’ ( when the disk has been replaced or images are deleted) or ‘2’ ( when images are
left undeleted), and press
Enter
key. If CD is not booted, press CTRL+ALT and DEL keys to restart
the system.
*** CPU1 Install Menu ***
** Step1 **
1. DISK INITIALIZE AND SYSTEM INSTALL
2. SYSTEM INSTALL
*** Step2 ***
3. TEMP PARTITION INSTALL
*** Other ***
4. QUIT
Enter your choice (1, 2, 3 or 4)=
(4) After installing CPU1 system, restart the system by pressing CTRL + ALT+ DEL keys.
(5) After CD has been booted and the install menu of CPU1 system has been displayed, perform Step 2 of
install menu. Input ‘3’ and press
Enter
key.
REFERENCE
The following error may be displayed in Step 2. In such a case, press
Enter
key and
continue processing.
Error
＃1822
Error：No patitions selected.
OK
6－4
L2E-BW1444
(6) After the end of installation, take out the installed CD. Restart the system by pressing CTRL + ALT +
DEL keys and make sure that CPU1 side is started normally.
REFERENCE
1. Detection wizard of new hardware
The following dialog to install the software necessary for the hardware may be displayed by
restarting the system.
These message may be displayed in certain instances a few minutes after the system
startup.
In the event that a message is displayed after starting the CPU0 installation, be sure to
install the driver after the CPU0 is installed.
(1) In the case of Ethernet Controller:
In this case, set the supplied “CG-LAPCIGT2 Gigabit Ethernet PCI Adapter” CD. The
hardware data is read from the CD and installation is started.
The dialog indicating completion of the installation is displayed. Click the [Finish] button
and take out the CD.
(2)
In the case of Multi-media audio controller:
In this case, press
Enter
key.
6－5
L2E-BW1444
Then, the following dialog is displayed. press
Enter
key.
2. System setting change dialog
The following figure may be displayed when restarting the system. In such a case, focus
[Yes] button by ← → keys and press
Enter
The system is restarted automatically. If
key.
Enter
key was pressed when [No] button is
focused, the system does not restart automatically. After shutting down the power supply,
turn it on again.
6.2.2
CPU0 system installation
(1) After installing CPU1 system, insert the CPU0 SYSTEM INSTALLATION DISK into the CD
drive.
(2) After taking out NO BOOT FD, insert boot FD “DISK INITIALIZE AND SYSTEM INSTALL
BOOT FD” (when an unused disk and raw data are deleted) or “SYSTEM INSTALL BOOT
FD”( when raw data are left undeleted).
(3) By pressing the CPU0 side reset switch (3SW) mounted on the left side of the hard disk, the
installation is started automatically after booting.
(4) After the installation, take out the boot FD and install CD, and restart the system by pressing the
CPU0 side reset switch.
REFERENCE
The following dialog may be displayed when restarting the system. In such a case, touch
[Yes] button.
The system is restarted automatically. If [NO] button was touched , turn on
the power supply again after shutting it down once.
6－6
L2E-BW1444
6.3 Application installation
(1) Turn on the maintenance mode (See Chapter 5.1) and restart the CT unit in the system maintenance mode
(See Chapter 5.11). (After the system installation, the system is already set to the system maintenance
mode.)
(2) By clicking the [Start] button and selecting [Application Installation] from the start menu, a confirmation
message dialog is displayed.
(3) Insert “Application Install Disk” into the CD drive, and select [Yes]. The application installation is started.
(4) After the installation a confirmation dialog is displayed. Then take out the application install disk.
(5) When the application installation only was done, select [Yes] to start the CT system. When the system
installation was done, select [No] to proceed to the setting of system serial number (Chapter 6.4).
6－7
L2E-BW1444
6.4 Setting of System Serial No. (only when the system has been installed)
(1) By clicking [Start] button and selecting [System Serial No. Setting] from the start menu, the machine serial
number setting window is displayed.
(2) Input the serial number (4 digit numeric numbers) described in the nameplate on the OC rear panel or the
scanner rear cover, and click [Complate] button.
6－8
299
L2E-BW1444
Section 7
RAID disk
7.1 Decision of RAID disk
Either High Point RAID utility or Promise RAID utility composes the array disk as a BIOS setting utility.
Judge which utility is assembled according to the following procedure.
(1) Insert NO BOOT FD into the FD drive.
(2) By turning on the OC side power supply , the following message is displayed in the course of start-up.
Judge which is assembled. If the display could not be read out due to its switching, restart the system by
pressing
Ctrl
+
Alt
+
Delete
keys.
In case of High Point RAID
HighPoint Technologies, Inc. HPT370/372 BIOS Setting Utility v2.31
(c) 2000-2002 HighPoint Technologies, Inc. All rights reserved.
Press <CTRL><H> to run BIOS Setting Utility
Scan Devices. Please Wait...
In case of Promise RAID
Fast Trak TX2000 (tm) BIOS Version 2.00.0.33
(c) 1995-2002 Promise Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
No Array is defined....................
Press <Ctrl-F> to enter FastBuild (tm) Utility or
Press <ESC> to continue booting ...
7－1
L2E-BW1444
7.2 High Point RAID
7.2.1
Initialization of RAID
When a hard disk has been replaced, create an array disk according to the following procedure before
installing software.
(1) Insert NO BOOT FD into FD drive.
(2) By turning on the OC side power supply, the following message is displayed in the course of start-up.
Press <Ctrl><H> to run BIOS Setting Utility
Scan Devices. Please wait ...
Display a BIOS setting screen by pressing
Ctrl
+
H
keys.
Help
Menu
Channel Status
(3) Proceed to (4) when the Main Menu has been displayed in the Menu area or proceed to (27) in other cases.
Main Menu
1. Create Array
2. Delete Array
3. Create/Delete Spare
4. Select Boot Disk
7－2
L2E-BW1444
(4) When “Channel Status” of the Channel Status area is BOOT in the disk, the Main Menu is displayed in the
Menu area. Select [4.Select Boot Disk] by ↑ ↓ keys and press
Enter
key.
Channel Status
Channel
Drive Name
Array Name Mode Size(GB)
Primary Master:
xxxxxxxxxx
ATA/133 xx.xx
BOOT
Primary Slave:
No Drive
ATA/133 xx.xx
HDD1 or Hidden
Secondary Master: xxxxxxxxxx
Secondary Slave:
Status
No Drive
(5) Make sure that “Status” of Channel Status of Channel Status area is displayed as shown below.
Channel Status
Channel
Drive Name
Array Name Mode Size(GB)
Primary Master:
xxxxxxxxxx
ATA/133 xx.xx
HDD0
Primary Slave:
No Drive
ATA/133 xx.xx
HDD1 or Hidden
Secondary Master: xxxxxxxxxx
Secondary Slave:
Status
No Drive
(6) Proceed to (7) when Array Name of Channel Status in Channel Status area has been set to either “Primary
Master” or “Secondary Master”. Proceed to (9), if not set.
Channel Status
Channel
Drive Name
Array Name Mode Size(GB)
Status
Primary Master:
xxxxxxxxxx
ATA/133 xx.xx
HDD0
Primary Slave:
No Drive
Secondary Master: xxxxxxxxxx
Secondary Slave:
RAID_1_0
ATA/133 xx.xx
HDD1 or Hidden
No Drive
(7) The Main Menu is displayed on the Menu area. Select [2. Delete Array] by ↑ ↓ keys and press Enter key.
Main Menu
1. Create Array
2. Delete Array
3. Create/Delete Spare
4. Select Boot Disk
(8) The following message is displayed.
Press
Y
key.
WARNING: All data on the Array will be deleted.
Continue? Press Y/N
7－3
L2E-BW1444
(9) Make sure that “Array Name” of Channel Status of Channel Status area has not been set and “Status” is
“HDD0” and “HDD1”.
Regarding “HDD0” and “HDD1”in “Status”, “Primary Master” may become
“HDD1” and “Secondary Master” may become “HDD0”.
Channel Status
Channel
Drive Name
Primary Master:
xxxxxxxxxx
Primary Slave:
No Drive
Array Name Mode Size(GB)
Secondary Master: xxxxxxxxxx
Secondary Slave:
Status
ATA/133 xx.xx
HDD0
ATA/133 xx.xx
HDD1
No Drive
(10) Select [1. Create Array] from the Main Menu of the Menu area by ↑ ↓ keys and press Enter key.
Main Menu
1. Create Array
2. Delete Array
3. Create/Delete Spare
4. Select Boot Disk
(11) Menu area changes to Create RAID menu. Select [1. Array Mode RAID 0 ( Stripping) ] by ↑ ↓ keys
and press
Enter
key.
Create RAID
1. Array Mode
RAID 0 (Striping)
2. Array Name
RAID_0_0
3. Select Disk Drives
4. Block Size
64K
5. Start Creation Process
(12) The following message is displayed.
and press
Enter
Select [ RAID 1 (Mirroring) for data protection] by ↑ ↓ keys
key.
RAID 0 (Striping) for performance
RAID 1 (Mirroring) for data protection
RAID 0/1 (Mirrored Striping)
JBOD(Volume)
(13) The following message is displayed. Select [Create only ] by ↑ ↓ keys and press
Enter
key.
Create only
Create and duplicate
7－4
L2E-BW1444
(14) Menu area changes to RAID 1 (Mirroring) menu. Select [2. Array Name RAID_1_0] by ↑ ↓ keys and
press
Enter
key.
RAID 1 (Mirroring)
1. Array Mode
RAID 1 (Mirroring)
2. Array Name
RAID_1_0
3. Select Disk Drives
4. Start Creation Process
(15) The following message is displayed. Default is set by pressing
Enter
key.
Please input the name of the array.
Name:
(16) Select [3. Select Disk Drives] by ↑ ↓ keys in RAID1 (Mirroring) menu, and press
Enter
key.
RAID 1 (Mirroring)
1. Array Mode
RAID 1 (Mirroring)
2. Array Name
RAID_1_0
3. Select Disk Drives
4. Start Creation Process
(17) Select [Primary Master] in Channel Status area and press
(18) Select [Secondary Master] in Channel Status area and press
(19) If the following message is displayed, press
Y
Enter
Enter
key.
key.
key.
WARNING: A valid partition is found at the
Primary Master disk you have selected.
Continue? Press Y/N
or
WARNING: A valid partition is found at the
Secondary Master disk you have selected.
Continue? Press Y/N
7－5
L2E-BW1444
(20) Select [4.Status Creation Process] by ↑ ↓ keys in RAID1 (Mirroring) menu in Menu area, and press
Enter
key.
RAID 1 (Mirroring)
1. Array Mode
RAID 1 (Mirroring)
2. Array Name
RAID_1_0
3. Select Disk Drives
4. Start Creation Process
(21) The following message is displayed.
Press
Y
key.
WARNING: All data on the selected disk will
be deleted. Continue? Press Y/N
(22) Select [4.Select Boot Disk] from Main Manu of Menu area by ↑ ↓ keys and press
Enter
key.
Main Menu
1. Create Array
2. Delete Array
3. Create/Delete Spare
4. Select Boot Disk
(23) Select [Primary Master] of Channel Status area by ↑ ↓ keys and press
Enter
key.
(24) Press [ESC] key after making sure that the following is displayed in Channel Status area.
Channel Status
Channel
Drive Name
Array Name Mode Size(GB)
Status
Primary Master:
xxxxxxxxxx
RAID_1_0
ATA/133 xx.xx
BOOT
Primary Slave:
No Drive
RAID_1_0
ATA/133 xx.xx
Hidden
Secondary Master: xxxxxxxxxx
Secondary Slave:
No Drive
(25) The following message is displayed.
Press
Y
key.
Are you sure you want to exit the BIOS utility? (Yes/No)
(26) Set CPU1 system install disk to the CD drive at once, and install the CPU1 system (See 6.2.1).
7－6
L2E-BW1444
(27) When Broken RAID 1 has been displayed in Menu area in starting the system after replacing the HD, select
[2. Destroy the Mirroring Relationship] by ↑ ↓ keys and press
displayed, repeat the procedure starting with (1) by press
Ctrl
+
Enter
Alt
+
key. If Critical RAID1 is
Delete
keys.
Broken RAID 1
1. Power off and replace the failed drive
2. Destroy the Mirroring Relationship
3. Choose replacement drive and rebuild
4. Continue to boot
Remaining members of the failed array
Channel
Drive Name
Array Name Mode Size(GB)
Primary Master:
xxxxxxxxxx
RAID_1_0
ATA/133 xx.xx
(28) Perform the procedure in and after (4) when Main Menu has been displayed in Menu area. Repeat the
procedure starting with (1), if not displayed.
Main Menu
1. Create Array
2. Delete Array
3. Create/Delete Spare
4. Select Boot Disk
7－7
L2E-BW1444
7.2.2
Remedial measures against the occurrence of troubles
If RAID disk is in trouble, Critical Menu or Broken Menu is displayed when turning on the OC side
power supply. The critical menu is displayed when non-conformance occurs between array disks,
while the broken menu is displayed when a hardware trouble occurs. If either critical or broken menu
has been displayed, replace CPU1 side disk according to the following procedure.
Critical status may be displayed due to a connection failure or a contact failure of IDE cable and
/ or power cable. Particularly be careful when replacing the disk.
7.2.2.1
In case of Critical Menu
(1) The following message is displayed. Select [2. Continue to boot] by ↑ ↓ keys and start up the
CT system by pressing
Enter
key.
Critical RAID 1
1. Duplicate now
2. Continue to boot
Array members
Channel
Drive Name
Array Name Mode Size(GB)
Primary Master:
xxxxxxxxxx
RAID_1_0
ATA/133 xx.xx
Secondary Master: xxxxxxxxxx
RAID_1_0
ATA/133 xx.xx
(2) Save user data and service data into MO by service backup (Section 5.10).
(3) Back up necessary images /raw data.
(4) Shut down the system.
(5) Replace two CPU1 side hard disks.
(6) After initializing the RAID disk (Section 7.2.1), install the software (Section 6 ).
7－8
L2E-BW1444
7.2.2.2
In case of Broken Menu
(1) The following message is displayed.
the CT system by pressing
Enter
Select [4. Continue to boot] by ↑ ↓ keys and start up
key.
Broken RAID 1
1. Power off and replace the failed drive
2. Destroy the Mirroring Relationship
3. Choose replacement drive and rebuild
4. Continue to boot
Remaining members of the failed array
Channel
Drive Name
Array Name Mode Size(GB)
Primary Master:
xxxxxxxxxx
RAID_1_0
ATA/133 xx.xx
(2) Save user data and service data into MO by service backup (Section 5.10).
(3) Back up necessary images /raw data.
(4) Shut down the system.
(5) Replace two CPU1 side hard disks.
(6) After initializing the RAID disk (Section 7.2.1), install the software (Section 6 ).
7－9
L2E-BW1444
7.3
Promise RAID
7.3.1
Initializing the RAID disk
When a hard disk has been replaced, create an array disk according to the following procedure before
installing software.
(1) Insert NO BOOT FD into FD drive.
(2) Proceed to (3) by pressing
Ctrl
+
F
keys when the following message is displayed by turning
on the OC side power supply in the course of start-up.
Fast Trak TX2000 (tm) BIOS Version 2.00.0.33
(c) 1995-2002 Promise Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
No Array is defined....................
Press <Ctrl-F> to enter FastBuild (tm) Utility or
Press <ESC> to continue booting ...
Proceed to (3) by pressing
Ctrl
+
F
keys when the following message is displayed.
Fast Trak TX2000 (tm) BIOS Version 2.00.0.33
(c) 1995-2002 Promise Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
ID MODE
1 * 1x2 Mirror
SIZE
xxxxxM
TRACK-MAPPING
xxxx/xxx/xx
STATUS
Functiona
Press <Ctrl-F> to enter FastBuild (tm) Utility …
Proceed to (5) by pressing
ID MODE
1 * 1x2 Mirror
Ctrl
+
SIZE
xxxxxM
F
keys when the following message is displayed.
TRACK-MAPPING
xxxx/xxx/xx
STATUS
Critical
Problem is detected with Array : 1
Critical Status:
A disk member of a mirrored array has failed or is not responding.
The array is still functional, but fault tolerance is disabled.
Before continuing, power off system and confirm that the drives and
cables are properly attached before replace the failed drive and
rebuilding the array.
1) Identify which drive has failed eith <3> Define Array menu option.
2) Power off the system, replace the failed drive.
3) Restart the system and enter the FastBuild (tm) setup menu.
4) Choose the <5> option to rebuild the array with replacement drive.
Press <Ctrl-F> to enter FastBuild (tm) Utility or
Press <ESC> to continue booting...
7－10
L2E-BW1444
(3) Main Menu is displayed. Select [Auto Setup] by
1
[ Main Menu ]
Auto Setup ...………...........
View Drive Assignments ....
Define Array .........………..
Delete Array ........…………
Rebuild Array ...........………
Controller Configuration …..
key.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[ Keys Available ]
Press 1..6 to Select Option
[ESC] Exit
(4) Proceed to (5) by pressing Space key when the following message is displayed or proceed to (11) if
not displayed.
No Available Disks!
Any Key to Continue …….
(5) Select [Delete Array] from the Main Menu by
4
key.
[ Main Menu ]
Auto Setup ...………...........
View Drive Assignments ....
Define Array .........………..
Delete Array ........…………
Rebuild Array ...........………
Controller Configuration …..
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[ Keys Available ]
Press 1..6 to Select Option
(6) Delete Array Menu is displayed.
Press
[ESC] Exit
Delete
key.
[ Delete Array Menu ]
Array No RAID Mode
Array 1
Array 2
Array 3
Array 4
Total Drv
Mirror
-------------
Capacity(MB)
2
-------------
40000
-------------------
Status
Functional
----------------
[ Keys Available ]
[↑] Up [↓] Down [ESC] Exit [Del] Delete
7－11
L2E-BW1444
(7) View Array Definition Menu and Drives Assignments are displayed.
When “Status” is “Functional”
[ View Array Definition Menu ]
Array No RAID Mode
Array 1
Total Drv
Capacity(MB)
2
40000
Mirror
Stripe Block : Not Available
Status
Functional
Gigabyte Boundary : ON
[ Drives Assignments ]
Channel : ID
Drive Model
1 : Mas WDC WD400EB-00CPF0
2 : Mas WDC WD400EB-00CPF0
Capacity(MB)
40020
40020
When “Status” is “Critical”
[ View Array Definition Menu ]
Array No RAID Mode
Array 1
Total Drv
Capacity(MB)
2
40000
Mirror
Stripe Block : Not Available
Status
Critical
Gigabyte Boundary : ON
[ Drives Assignments ]
Channel : ID
Drive Model
Capacity(MB)
1 : Mas WDC WD400EB-00CPF0
40020
? :?
failed or disconnected …
(8) The following message is displayed.
Press
Ctrl
+
Y
keys.
Are you sure you want to delete this array?
Press Ctrl-Y to Delete, or others to abort ..
(9) following message is displayed.
Press
Y
keys.
Would you like to clean the MBR and reserved sector?
Doing so will result in a total loss of all data.
< Press Y to continue or N to return to menu >
(10) The following message is displayed.
Press Space key.
Reserved sectors wiped ….
<Press Any Key to REBOOT>
The system reboot and then return to (2)
7－12
L2E-BW1444
(11) Auto Setup Options Menu is displayed. Press Space key repeatedly until “Mode” becomes
“Mirror”. Proceed to (12) after “Mirror” has been selected.
If “Mirror” cannot be selected, turn off the power supply and check the connecting condition of
the disk. Then, repeat the operation again starting with (2).
[ Auto Setup Options Menu ]
Optimize Array for:
Typical Application to use:
Security
Not Available
[ Array Setup Configuration ]
Mode .....................................……………..
Spare Drive ..........................……………....
Drive(s) Used in Array .................………...
Array Disk Capacity (Size in MB) ........…..
Mirror
0
2
40000
Please make sure if
the setting is conect.
[ Keys Available ]
[↑] Up [↓] Down [←,→,Space] Change Option [ESC] Exit [CTRL-Y]Save
(12) Press
Ctrl
+
Y
keys.
(13) The following message is displayed.
Press
N
key.
Warning: 64K of Disk Space is reserved at the end
of the Source Disk. If Source Disk is at or near full
capacity, Data Loss can occur! All data on Destination
Disk will be LOST!
Press the "Y" key to continue with
Duplication or "N" key to abort.
(14) The following message is displayed.
Press Space key.
Array has been created....
<Press Any Key to REBOOT>
(15) Set CPU1 system install disk into the CD drive at once and install the CPU1 system (See Section
6.2.1).
7－13
L2E-BW1444
7.3.2
Remedial measures against the occurrence of troubles
If RAID disk is in trouble, Critical Status is displayed when turning on the OC side power supply.
Critical Status is displayed when non-conformance occurs between array disks or a hardware trouble
occurs. If Critical Status has been displayed, replace CPU1 side disk according to the following
procedure.
Critical Status may be displayed due to a connection failure or a contact failure of IDE cable
and/or power cable. Particularly be careful when replacing the disk.
(1)
The following is displayed. Initialize the CT system by pressing [ESC] key.
ID MODE
1 * 1x2 Mirror
SIZE
xxxxxM
TRACK-MAPPING
xxxx/xxx/xx
STATUS
Critical
Problem is detected with Array : 1
Critical Status:
A disk member of a mirrored array has failed or is not responding.
The array is still functional, but fault tolerance is disabled.
Before continuing, power off system and confirm that the drives and
cables are properly attached before replace the failed drive and
rebuilding the array.
1) Identify which drive has failed eith <3> Define Array menu option.
2) Power off the system, replace the failed drive.
3) Restart the system and enter the FastBuild (tm) setup menu.
4) Choose the <5> option to rebuild the array with replacement drive.
Press <Ctrl-F> to enter FastBuild (tm) Utility or
Press <ESC> to continue booting...
(2)
Save user data and service data into MO by service backup (Section 5.10).
(3)
Back up necessary images /raw data.
(4)
Shut down the system.
(5)
Replace the two hard disks on CPU side.
(6)
After initializing RAID Disk , install software (Section 6).
7－14
313
L2E-BW1444
Section 8
1.
Scanner firmware version up method
VMCPU, VSCPU, VTCPU, VTCPU2, RXCPU, XCPU and VATCPU mean programs for
controls of the CT system.
2.
The following items are sent in case of version up.
(1) CD-ROM containing the firmware down load application and version up file
(2) RS-232C cable (straight)
8.1 Preparation for version up
1.
Prepare a PC where RS-232C port (USB serial conversion adapter is allowable) is
employable.
2.
If the PC is not provided with a CD-ROM drive, copy the contents of the distributed CD-ROM
into a folder of the PC.
8.1.1
Preparation for version up of VMCPU, VSCPU, and VTCPU/VTCPU2
(1) Open the small cover on the left side of the scanner as viewed from the front.
(2) Turn on the scanner power supply, and connect each connector of PC and SWBD PCB (See
Fig.8.1 ) by an RS-232C cable according to the version up firmware , referring to Table 8-1.
(3) Set the rotary switch (SW16) to the designated position, and press CPU RESET (SW17) of SWBD
PCB twice.
Make sure that a beep sounds at an interval of one second.
Table 8-1
Connector and rotary switch setting
Firmware
VMCPU
VSCPU
VTCPU/VTCPU2
Connector
CNSW2 MCPU
CNSW3 SCPU
CNSW4 TCPU
Switch position
D (13)
E (14)
F (15)
CPU RESET
（SW17）
CNSW2
MCPU
Rotary switch
（SW16）
CNSW3
SCPU
CNSW4
TCPU
Fig. 8-1
8－1
SWBD PCB
L2E-BW1444
8.1.2
Preparation for version up of RXCPU and VATCPU
(1) Open the front cover of the scanner.
(2) Turn on the scanner power supply, and connect PC and the connector of RXCPU PCB (See
Fig.8.2 ) by an RS-232C cable according to the version up firmware , referring to Table 8-2.
(3) Press CPU_LD (SW3) while pressing CPU_RST (SW2) of RXCPU PCB , and make sure that
CPUMODE (LD6) lights.
(4) Release CPU_LD (SW3)
(5) Release CPU_RST (SW2)
Table 8-2
Connector setting
Firmware
RXCPU
VATCPU
Connector
CN_RCPU
CN_ATMA
CN_RCPU
CN_ATMA
CPUMODE
（LD6）
CPU_LD
（SW3）
Fig. 8-2
8.1.3
CPU_RST
（SW2）
RXCPU PCB
Preparation for version up of XCPU.
(1) Open the left cover of X-ray control unit.
(2) Turn on the scanner power supply, and connect PC and CN_PCSUB connector of XCONT5 PCB
( Fig. 8-3) by an RS-232C cable.
(3) Press CPU_LOAD SW (SW2) while pressing RESET SW (SW1) of XCONT5 PCB, and make sure
that CPU_LOAD SW (SW2) flickers.
(4) Release CPU_LOAD SW (SW2)
(5) Release RESET SW (SW1)
8－2
L2E-BW1444
CN_PCSUB
CPU_LOAD
FPGA_READY
（LD13）
RESET SW
（SW1）
CPU_LOAD SW
（SW2）
Fig. 8-3
XCONT5 PCB
8.2. Down loading method
(1) Insert a CD-ROM containing the following contents into the PC.
・ MainteTool_V***.exe
(firmware down load application)
・ ***.mot
(firmware version up file)
・ Other DLL files
(2) Copy the contents of the distributed CD-ROM into a folder of the PC.
(3) Start MainteTool_V***.exe (hereinafter referred to as MainteTool) of folder.
Fig. 8-4
MainteTool start screen
8－3
L2E-BW1444
(4) Designate the communication port number being used at present in the Port No. column by clicking
[SERIAL PORT (O)] button of MainteTool (The port number can confirm in device manager of PC).
Fig. 8-5
Serial Port Setup screen
(5) Start PROGRAM LOADER tool by clicking [PROGRAM LOADER (P)] button of MainteTool.
Fig. 8-6
PROGRAM LOADER start screen
(6) Designate the firmware version up file ( ***mot) of folder by clicking [WRITE FILE(W)] button of
PROGRAM LODER tool.
Fig. 8-7
Version up file designation screen
8－4
L2E-BW1444
(7) [Please reset in loader mode] dialog box is displayed by clicking [START (S)] button of PROGRAM
LODER tool, and click [OK] button.
Fig. 8.8
Download start screen
When any error occurs before download is completed, reconfirm connection of the RS-232C
cable and retry step (4).
(8) After the end of down load, [Write finish] dialog is displayed. Click [OK] button.
Fig. 8.9
Download end screen
8.3. Version up end processing
8.3.1
Version up end processing of VMCPU, VSCPU, and VTCPU/VTCPU2
(1) Set the rotary switch (SW16) of SWBD PCB to [0].
(2) Press CPU RESET (SW17) of SWBD PCB.
8－5
L2E-BW1444
8.3.2
Version up end processing of RXCPU and VATCPU
(1) Press CPU_LD (SW3) while pressing CPU_RST (SW2) of RXCPU PCB, and make sure that
CPUMODE (LD6) goes out.
(2) Release CPU_LD (SW3).
(3) Release CPU_RST (SW2).
8.3.3
Version up end processing of XCPU
(1) Press CPU_LOAD SW (SW2) while pressing RESET switch (SW1) of XCONT5 PCB, and make
sure that FPGA_RADY (LD13) lights.
(2) Release CPU_LOAD switch (SW2).
(3) Release RESET switch (SW1).
8.4 Version check
(1)
Check if the version is indicated by setting the rotary switch of the PCB shown in Table 8-3 to the designated
position using the version up firmware. (except for XCPU)
Table 8-3
Firmware
VMCPU
VSCPU
VTCPU/VTCPU2
RXCPU
VATCPU
After check, set each switch to [0].
Rotary switch setting for version check
PCB
SWBD
SWBD
SWBD
RXCPU
RXCPU
Rotary switch
SW16
SW16
SW16
SW1
SW1
Switch position
D (13)
E (14)
F (15)
8 (8)
A (10)
*After version check, set each rotary switch to [0] without fail.
(2) After turning off the scanner power supply, disconnect the RS-232C cable, reset the cover as before, and
check the operation by executing the normal scan, scanogram, and volume scan.
If the Version-up program is completed unsuccessfully, retry the steps from “8.1 Preparation for
Version-up”.
8－6
319 L2E-BW1444
Section 9
Scanner FPGA version up method
9.1 RXCPU, XCPU version up method
The following items are sent in case of version up.
(1) CD-ROM containing the FPGA down load application and version up file
(2) RS-232C cable (straight)
1. Prepare a PC where RS-232C port (USB serial conversion adapter is applicable) is employable.
2. If the PC is not provided with a CD-ROM drive, copy the contents of the distributed CD-ROM
into a folder of the PC.
3. Prepare RS-232C cable (straight).
(1) Open the front cover of the scanner in case of RXCPU or the left cover of X-ray control unit in case of
XCPU.
(2) Turn on the scanner power supply.
(3) Connect PC and the connector of each PCB by an RS-232C cable according to the version up FPGA,
referring to Table 9-1.
Table 9-1 Connector setting
FPGA
PCB
Connector
RXCPU
RXCPU
CN_RCPU
XCPU
XCONT5
CN_PCSUB
CN_RCPU
CPU_RST
（SW2）
Fig. 9-1 RXCPU PCB Connector
9－1
L2E-BW1444
CN_PCSUB
RESET SW
（SW1）
CPU_LOAD SW
（SW2）
Fig. 9-2 XCONT5 PCB Connector
(4) Insert the CD-ROM containing the following contents.
*
MainteTool_V***.exe
(FPGA down load application)
*
***.hexout
(FPGA version up file)
*
Other DLL files
(5) Copy the contents of the distributed CD-ROM into a folder of the PC.
(6) Start the MainteTool_V***.exe (hereinafter referred to as MainteTool) of folder.
Fig. 9-3 MainteTool start screen
9－2
L2E-BW1444
(7) Select the communication port number of PC being used in [Port No] column at present by clicking
[SERIAL PORT (O)] of the MainteTool (The port number can confirm in device manager of PC).
Fig. 9-4 Serial port setup screen
(8) Start the FPGA LOADER TOOL by clicking [FPGA LOADER (F)] button of the MainteTool.
Fig. 9-5 FPGA LOADER start screen
(9) Designate the FPGA version up file ( ***.hexout) of folder by clicking [WRITE FILE (W)] button of the
FPGA LOADER tool.
Fig. 9-6 Version up designation screen
9－3
L2E-BW1444
(10) In case of RXCPU, release CPU RST (SW2) of RXCPU_PCB. In case of XCPU, press CPU_LOAD
switch (SW2) twice while pressing RESET SW (SW1) of XCONT_PCB, and then, release RESET SW
(SW1). Wait for longer than 40 seconds after leaving.
(11) Start down loading by clicking [START (S)] button of the FPGA LOADER tool.
Fig. 9-7 Download start screen
(12) After down loading, [Write finish!] dialog is displayed. Click [OK] button.
Fig. 9-8 Download end screen
When any error occurs before download is completed, never turn the power OFF.
Reconfirm connection of the RS-232C cable and retry from setp (9).
(13) Turn off the main power supply (1FFB) of the X-ray control unit (WB) after shut-down operation on the
operation panel, and disconnect RS-232C cable.
After download is completed normally, be sure to turn the power OFF.
(14) After starting the scanner power supply again, check the operation by executing the normal scan, scanogram,
and volume scan, and then, reset the cover as before.
9－4
L2E-BW1444
9.2 Version up method of MFPGA, TFPGA, TXRFPGA and TXSFPGA
For the version-up procedure of MFPGA, TFPGA and TXRFPGA (RFPGA) of the system with
the MTCPU2 PCB installed, refer to 9.3.
(1) Open the rear cover of the scanner in case of MFPGA and TFPGA or open the front cover and side cover
(on the left side as viewed from the front) in case of TXRFPGA and TXSFPGA.
(2) Make sure that the power supply is not turned on in the scanner and version up PCB.
(3) Take out FPGA ROM of each PCB, and insert the sent ROM.
Table 9-2 shows the addresses of FPGA ROM of each PCB.
Table 9-2 FPGA ROM addresses
Change ROM
PCB
ROM address
ROM type
MFPGA
MTCPU1
16F
DIP 8Pin
TFPGA
MTCPU1
15G
DIP 8Pin
TXRFPGA
TXR5
6D
DIP 8Pin
TXSFPGA
RXCPU
7D
DIP 8Pin
(4) After replacing, reset the covers, the cover, and check the operation by executing the normal scan,
scanogram, and volume scan.
9－5
L2E-BW1444
9.3 Version-up procedure of MFPGA, TFPGA and RFPGA (for the system installed with
the MTCPU2)
The following parts are provided for this version-up.
(1) CD-ROM containing firmware down-load application software and version-up file
(2) RS-232C cable (straight)
(1) Prepare a PC with an usable RS-232C port (USB serial conversion adaptor is
acceptable).
(2) In the case of the PC without CD-ROM drive, make copy of the contents in the
provided CD-ROM in a folder of the PC in advance.
(1) Open a small cover in the side cover of the scanner (left side in view from the front).
(2) Turn on the power for the scanner system.
(3) Connect the PC and the connector CNSW2 MCPU on the SWBD PCB with the RS-232C cable.
CPU RESET
（SW17）
）
CNSW2
MCPU
Fig. 9-9 SWBD PCB
(4)
Insert the CD-ROM containing the following programs in the PC.
• MainteTool_V***.exe
(FPGA down-load application)
• ***.rpd
(Version-up file for MFPGA, TFPGA and RFPGA)
• Other files
9－6
L2E-BW1444
(5) Start MainteTool_V***.exe (hereafter called MainteTool) in the CD-ROM.
Fig. 9-10 MainteTool Start-up Window
(6) Click the [SERIAL PORT (O)] button in MainteTool and select the communication port No. being used in
the PC in Port No. selection box.
Fig. 9-11 Serial Port Set Up Window
(7) Click the [FPGA LOADER (F)] button in MainteTool to start FPGA LOADER tool.
Fig. 9-12 FPGA LOADER Start Window
9－7
L2E-BW1444
(8) Click the [WRITE FILE (W)] button in FPGA LOADER tool and select FPGA Version-up file (***.rpd) in
the CD-ROM.
Fig. 9-13 Version-up File Selection Window
(9) Press the CPU RESET (SW17) button in the SWBD PCB once and release it, and then wait more than one
minute.
(10) Click the [START (S)] button in EFGA LOADER tool to start the download.
Fig. 9-14 Download Start Window
9－8
L2E-BW1444
(11) As the [Write finish!] dialog is displayed after the download is completed, click [OK] button.
Fig. 9-15 Download End Window
If any error occurs before completion of the download, never shutdown the scanner power.
Retry the procedures from the step (6).
(12) After executing the shutdown process on the control console, turn of the main power supply of the X-ray
control unit and disconnect the connected RS-232C cable.
After successful completion of the download, be sure to shut down the main power.
(13) After the system power is turned on again, perform normal scan, scanogram scan and volume scan to make
sure of normal operation of the system, and then put back the cover.
9－9
328
L2E-BW1444
Section 10
Various setting methods of table
10.1 Preset height setting method
1.
When the versions of various firmware have been updated (version up) or the table has been
replaced, the preset height is held. Accordingly, no resetting is necessary.
2.
When MTCPU1 (or MTCPU2) PCB has been replaced, the preset height is not held.
Accordingly, resetting is necessary.
Set the PRESET height in the exclusive service mode. The setting procedure is shown below.
1.
Turn on the power supply during this work.
2.
Table height indicating LED value should be more than 0.
3.
If plural switches are pressed at the same time, press [RESET] button first without fail.
4.
A buzzer does not always sound depending upon the system setting in the following procedure.
In such a case, check LED only.
(1) Set the table to a desired preset height (Table height indicating LED value is within a range of 0 ~ 250) by
the vertical move switch.
(2) Continue pressing PRESET switch while pressing RESET switch concurrently for longer than 5 seconds.
A buzzer sounds once. Leave the switches when the RESET switch and table height LED start flickering.
If the buzzer sounds three times or if LED does not start flickering after longer than 8 seconds,
check the above cautions and repeat the above procedure starting with step (1).
(3) After restarting the power supply, move the table to the HOME position and make sure that the table stops
within a range of [-1 ~ +5mm] of the value being set by PRESET key.
If the table does not stop as specified above, repeat the above procedure starting with step (1).
(4) End
10－1
L2E-BW1444
10.2 Stop position accuracy setting method
1.
When the versions of various firmware have been updated (version up), the preset stop
position accuracy is maintained. Accordingly, no resetting is necessary.
2.
When MTCPU1 (or MTCPU2) PCB or table has been replaced, the preset stop position
accuracy is not held. Accordingly, resetting is necessary.
Set and check the stop position accuracy only when the table stop position is deviated in the longitudinal operation
of the table. The setting procedure is shown below.
(1) Open the small cover and rear cover of the scanner side face ( left side as viewed from the front ).
(2) After turning on the scanner power supply, set the rotary switch (SW16) of SWBD PCB (Fig.10-1 ) to [0],
and No.4 of DIP switch 4 (DSW4) of MTCPU1 (or MTCPU2) PCB (Fig. 10-2,10-3) to [ON (1)].
CPU RESET
（SW17）
7SEG LED
RESET SW
ROTARY SW
（SW16）
TABLE FORWARD SW
PAT SW
HI-SPEED SW
TABLE BACK SW
Fig. 10-1 SWBD PCB
10－2
L2E-BW1444
DIP SW４
（DSW4）
DIP SW４
（DSW4）
Fig. 10-2 MTCPU1 PCB
Fig. 10-3 MTCPU2 PCB
(3) Press CPU RSET (SW17) of SWBD PCB.
(4) Set the rotary switch (SW16) of SWBD PCB to [F].
(5) If the work is done by one person only, put the phantom or the like on the table as a weight. If the work is
done by two persons, one should ride on the table.
(6) Stop the table at an optional forward position (reference: a position retreated from the longitudinal limit by
50cm) by TABLE FORWARD switch and TABLE BACK switch of SWBD PCB. Make sure that the
7-SEG LED value of SWBD PCB changes. (Be careful since a value exceeding 999.99 is displayed as a
blank.)
If the above value does not change, confirm the setting of DIP switch 4 (DSW4) and rotary switch
(SW16) in step (2), and repeat step (5) by pressing CPU RESET (SW17) of SWBD PCB.
(7) Clear the 7-segment LED value by pressing RESET switch of SWBD PCB once.
(8) Continue pressing PAT switch of SWBD PCB until the table stops running. Release the switch when the
table has stopped running.
(9) Record a deviation of the stop position from [10.00] as a reference by 7-segment LED.
(10) Repeat steps (7) ~ (9) ten times from the position.
(11) Obtain an average value of ten times and calculate the stop position accuracy.
Set [7] and [8] of DIP switch 4 (DSW4) of MTCPU1 (or MTCPU2) PCB as shown below according to the
calculated stop position accuracy.
10－3
L2E-BW1444
Table 10-1 DIP switch 4 (DSW4) setting
Stop position accuracy [mm]
DSW4 No.7
DSW4 No.8
Index correction value
～＋0.025
OFF(0)
OFF(0)
Specified value －0.00mm
＋0.026～＋0.075
ON(1)
OFF(0)
Specified value －0.05mm
＋0.076～＋0.125
OFF(0)
ON(1)
Specified value －0.10mm
＋0.126～
ON(1)
ON(1)
Specified value －0.15mm
(12) After setting DIP switch 4 (DSW4), set the rotary switch (SW16) of SWBD PCB to [0], and then, press CPU
RESET (SW17). If setting of DIP switch 4 (DSW4) has been changed by (11), repeat steps (4) ~ (10) again
and make sure that the stop position accuracy has been improved.
If the stop position accuracy is not improved, set both No.7 and No. 8 of DIP switch 4 (DSW4) to
[OFF (0)], and repeat the above procedure starting with step (4) by pressing CPU RESET (SW17)
of SWBD PCB.
(13) Reset No. 4 of Dip switch 4 (DSW4) changed in step (2) to [OFF (0)] and rotary switch (SW16) to [0].
(14) After turning off the scanner power supply, reset the cover as before, and check the operation by executing
the normal scan, scanogram, and volume scan.
10－4
332
L2E-BW1444
Appendix 1 System configuration setting items
System Config Type
System
Item
Set Data
X-Ray Tube
Presto
Default
5.0M(Dual Focus)
3.5M(Dual Focus)
Tube Shift
○
None
Arcing Recovery
Install
○
OFF
○
ON
Table
Standard
○
Extended
Adaptive-mA＊
None
○
OFF
ON
Bitmap
Wall Paper
None
○
Wave
Orientation Diagram
Gantry to left
○
Gantry to right
Date Format
Date Format
MM/dd/yyyy
○
dd/MM/yyyy
yyyy/MM/dd
＊ Adaptive-mA will can be used by installing Adaptive-mA Function Software in case Application software
version is VI.32.
Words in column “Set Data” are defined as follows:
None: Set this parameter on the system which does not have Adaptive-mA-compatible ROM.
OFF: Set this parameter on the system which has Adaptive-mA-compatible ROM, to set the Adaptive-mA
function to OFF temporarily.
ON: Set this parameter on the system which has Adaptive-mA-compatible ROM, to set the Adaptive-mA
function to ON.
Appendix－1
L2E-BW1444
Appendix 2 How to initialize HU
If a time zone is changed at the Date/Time Setting, HU capacity may keep 100% more than in 10 hours. In that
case, please initialize HU capacity to 0% by the following procedures:
NOTE:
This HU initialization decreases HU capacity intensively, and it may damage tube. Please do
them under X-ray tube cool fully(i.e. HU capacity is 0).
(1) Turn on the maintenance mode (see 5.1) and restart the CT system in "system maintenance mode" (see 5.11).
(2) Insert "application install disk"(V1.32 or later) into CD drive.
(3) Open up E: drive from "My Computer" on the desk top at CRT side.
(4) Double click the "InitializeHU.bat" file in the "InitializeHU" folder on E: drive to initialize HU.
(5) Take out "application install disk" from CD drive.
(6) Double click "Start the CT system" shortcut icon on the desk top to return to the release mode(user mode).
(7) Make sure that HU capacity becomes 0% on the touch panel.
End.
E
Appendix－2
334 L2E-BW1444